Atv31 (E)

Variable speed drives Altivar 31 High performance
instinctively!
Catalogue October
03
For 3-phase asynchronous motors from 0.18 to 15 kW
Contents
Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors

Altivar 31
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
pages 2 to 9
Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 10 to 13 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 14 to 17 Options

v Braking resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 18 and 19 v Line chokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 20 and 21 v Additional EMC input filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 22 and 23 v Output filters and motor chokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 24 and 25 v Communication options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 26 and 27
PowerSuite software workshop. . . . . . . . . . . pages 28 and 29 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 30 and 35 Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 36 and 37 Mounting and installations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 38 and 39
Combinations for self-assembly . . . . . . . . . . . Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schneider Electric worldwide . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
pages 40 to 43
pages 44 to 59
pages 60 to 65
Presentation

Altivar 31
ESC ENT
stop reset FWO REV
RUN
3 2 1
Presentation (continued)

Altivar 31
Applications
The Altivar 31 drive is a frequency inverter for 3-phase squirrel cage asynchronous motors. The Altivar 31 is robust, compact, easy to use and conforms to EN 50178, IEC/EN 61800-2, IEC/EN 61800-3 standards, UL/CSA certification and to e marking. It incorporates functions that are suitable for the most common applications, including: b Materials handling (small conveyors, hoists, etc), b Packing and packaging machines, b Specialist machines (mixers, kneaders, textile machines, etc.), b Pumps, compressors, fans. Altivar 31 drives communicate on Modbus and CANopen industrial buses. These two protocols are integrated as standard into the drive. Altivar 31 drives are supplied with a heatsink for normal environments and ventilated enclosures. Multiple units can be mounted side by side 3 to save space. Drives are available for motor ratings between 0.18 kW and 15 kW, with four types of power supply: b 200 V to 240 V single phase, 0.18 kW to 2.2 kW b 200 V to 240 V 3-phase, 0.18 kW to 15 kW b 380 V to 500 V 3-phase, 0.37 kW to 15 kW b 525 V to 600 V 3-phase, 0.75 kW to 15 kW Altivar 31 drives are available with a choice of two different human-machine interfaces: b 1 ATV 31Hpppp with displays and menu navigation keys b 2 ATV 31HppppA with displays, menu navigation keys and local control (Run/Stop and speed reference set by a potentiometer). Electromagnetic compatibility EMC The incorporation of level A EMC filters (conducted and radiated) in ATV 31HppM2 and ATV 31HppN4 drives simplifies the installation of machines and provides an economical means of meeting e marking requirements. ATV 31HppM3X and ATV 31HppS6X drives are available without EMC filter. Filters are available as an option for customer assembly, if conformity to EMC standards is required.
Functions
The Altivar 31 drive has six logic inputs, three analog inputs, one logic/analog output and two relay outputs. The main functions integrated in the drive are as follows: b Motor and drive protection b Linear, S, U and customised acceleration and deceleration ramps b +/- speed b 16 preset speeds b PI references and regulator b 2-wire/3-wire control b Brake sequence b Automatic catching a spinning load with speed detection and automatic restart b Fault configuration and stop type configuration b Saving the configuration in the drive Several functions can be assigned to one logic input.
Options and accessories

The following options and accessories can be used with the Altivar 31 drive: b Braking resistors b Line chokes b EMC radio interference input filters and output filters b Plates for mounting on 5 rail b UL Type 1 conformity kit b Adaptor plate for replacing an Altivar 28 drive Various dialogue and communication options 4, 5, 6, 7 can be used with the drive, see pages 7 and 8.
Characteristics: pages 10 to 13
References: pages 14 to 17
Dimensions: pages 30 to 35
Schemes: pages 36 to 39
Functions: pages 44 to 59
Presentation

Altivar 31
Enclosed drive
ESC ENT
stop reset FWO REV
RUN
3 1

Altivar 31
Enclosed drive
Applications
The enclosed Altivar 31 drive is suitable for applications requiring: - IP 55 degree of protection in a hostile environment - a drive that is ready for use in a motor starter Once it has been customised, the enclosure can be installed next to the motor. Enclosed drives are available in power ratings from 0.18 kW to 4 kW. There are two types of power supply: b 200 V to 240 V single phase, 0.18 kW and 2.2 kW b 380 V to 500 V 3-phase, 0.37 kW and 4 kW
Customisable enclosed drive

This range allows full customisation of the human-machine interface of an enclosure. The IP 55 enclosure includes: b a drive with external heatsink b removable covers for installation of the following components: 7 Vario switch disconnector or GV2 circuit-breaker 8 3 buttons and/or LEDs with plastic flange 22, and 1 speed reference potentiometer 9 button for the RJ45 connector with IP 55 cable 10 cable glands for cable routing The combinations (drive, circuit-breaker, contactor) required for the motor starter function can be found on pages 40 and 41. Example references: - 3-pole Vario switch disconnector (Vpp + KCp 1pZ) - Selector switch with 3 fixed positions XB5 D33 - LED XB5 AVpp - 2.2 kOhm potentiometer These references can be found in our specialist catalogues. All components must be ordered separately and wired by the customer. Electromagnetic compatibility EMC The incorporation of level A EMC filters (conducted and radiated) in ATV 31CppM2 and ATV 31CppN4 drives simplifies the installation of machines and provides an economical means of meeting e marking requirements.
10

The following options and accessories can be used with the enclosed Altivar 31 drive: b Braking resistors b Line chokes b RJ45 connector with IP 55 cable Various dialogue and communication options 2, 3, 4, 5 can be used with the drive, see pages 7 and 8.
Presentation

Altivar 31
Drive kit
ESC ENT
stop reset FWO REV
RUN
1 2 10
11
12

Altivar 31
Drive kit
Applications
The drive kit is a new addition to the Altivar 31 drives range. The drive kit comprises: b Altivar 31 drive elements (heatsink, power and control subassemblies) b EMC filter b Mechanical fittings b Seals required for use in difficult environments (IP 55) The kit is mounted on a metal fixing support with no flange or protective cover. The Altivar 31 drive kit can be built into a floor-standing or wall-mounted enclosure or a machine frame. The drive kit is available for power ratings from 0.18 kW to 15 kW. There are two types of power supply: b 200 V to 240 V single phase, 0.18 kW to 2.2 kW b 380 V to 500 V 3-phase, 0.37 kW to 15 kW Electromagnetic compatibility EMC The incorporation of level A EMC filters (conducted and radiated) in ATV 31KppM2 and ATV 31KppN4 drives simplifies the installation of machines and provides an economical means of meeting e marking requirements. The drives have been sized to conform to the following standards: IEC/EN61800-3, domestic and industrial environments.
Description
b Drive kit for power ratings y 4 kW 1 The Altivar 31 drive components (heatsink, power and control subassemblies) are fixed by mechanical adaptors 2 and protective fittings. The unit is supported by a metal plate 3 fixed to the heatsink. The plate is sealed on all sides. Once the support has been cut out, the drive kit is fixed to the base of the floorstanding or wall-mounted enclosure by means of this plate. The power terminals 5 are protected (IP 20). b Drive kit for power ratings u 5.5 kW 6 The Altivar 31 drive components (heatsink, power and control subassemblies) are fixed by mechanical adaptors 2 and protective fittings. The metal support plate 3 for the components is fitted with brackets 8 for mounting in a floor-standing or wall-mounted enclosure. The plate is sealed on all sides 4. Two fans are fitted behind the plate under the heatsink. Additional fixing holes 7 are provided for component mounting (GV2 circuit-breaker, Vario switch disconnector, additional plate, etc.). Drive kits are supplied with: b A drilling and cutting template to assist with installation b A users manual with installation instructions and safety precautions.

The following options and accessories can be used with the Altivar 31 drive kit: b Braking resistors b Line chokes Various dialogue and communication options 9, 10, 11, 12 can be used with the drive, see pages 7 and 8.
Presentation

Altivar 31
Dialogue options
The Altivar 31 drive communicates with the following options: b Remote terminal b PowerSuite software workshop b Ethernet/Modbus bridge b Communication gateways The communication function provides access to the drives configuration, adjustment, control and signalling functions.
Remote terminal
The Altivar 31 can be connected to a remote terminal. The remote terminal can be mounted on the door of an enclosure with IP 65 protection on the front panel. The terminal provides access to the same functions as the display and integral keys on the drive (see page 45). It can be used: b to control, adjust and configure the drive remotely b for visible remote signalling b to save and download configurations (4 configuration files can be saved) Description 1 Display v Four 7-segment displays visible at 5 m v Displays numeric values and codes v The display flashes when a value is stored. v The display flashes to indicate a fault on the drive. 2 v v v v Use of keys: Navigation arrows and ENT, ESC for settings and configurations FWD/REV key: reverses the direction of rotation of the motor RUN key: motor run command STOP/RESET key: motor stop command or drive fault reset
563220
1
ESC ENT
stop reset FWO REV
RUN
Presentation

Altivar 31
Communication options
563019
PowerSuite software workshop

PowerSuite advanced dialogue solutions offer the following advantages: b Display messages in plain text and multiple languages b Prepare work in design office without connecting the Altivar to the PC b Save configurations and settings to floppy disk or hard disk and download them to the drive b Print out settings b Read and import Altivar 28 files into the Altivar 31. See pages 28 and 29.
Ethernet/Modbus bridge
The Altivar 31 can be connected to an Ethernet network via an Ethernet/Modbus bridge. Ethernet communication is primarily intended for the following applications: b Coordination between PLCs b Local or centralised supervision b Communication with production management software b Communication with remote I/O b Communication with industrial control products See pages 26 and 27.
563016
174 CEV 300 10
Communication gateways
The Altivar 31 can connect to other communication buses by means of the following gateways: b Fipio/Modbus, b DeviceNet/Modbus b Profibus DP/Modbus See pages 26 and 27.
563017
LUF P1
563018
LA9 P307
Characteristics

Altivar 31
Environment
Conformity to standards Altivar 31 drives have been developed to conform to the strictest international standards and the recommendations relating to electrical industrial control devices (IEC, EN), in particular: low-voltage EN 50178, EMC immunity and EMC conducted and radiated emissions. b IEC/EN 61000-4-2 level 3 b IEC/EN 61000-4-3 level 3 b IEC/EN 61000-4-4 level 4 b IEC/EN 61000-4-5 level 3 (power access) b IEC/EN 61800-3, environments 1 and 2 b IEC/EN 61800-3, environments: 2 (industrial supply) and 1 (public supply) restricted distribution b EN 55011 class A group 1, EN 61800-3 category C2 With additional EMC filter: b EN 55022 class B group 1, EN 61800-3 category C1 b EN 55011 class A group 2, EN 61800-3 category C3 With additional EMC filter (1): b EN 55022 class A group 1, EN 61800-3 category C2 b EN 55022 class B group 1, EN 61800-3 category C1 With additional EMC filter (1): b EN 55011 class A group 1, EN 61800-3 category C2 b EN 55022 class B group 1, EN 61800-3 category C1 The drives bear e marking in accordance with the European low voltage (73/23/EEC and 93/68/EEC) and EMC (89/336/EEC) directives UL, CSA, NOM 117 and C-Tick b IP 31 and IP 41 on upper part and IP 21 on connection terminals b IP 20 without cover plate on upper part of cover b IP 55 2 TC Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6: 1.5 mm peak to peak from 3 to 13 Hz, 1 gn from 13 to 150 Hz 15 gn for 11 ms conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-27 595 without condensation or dripping water, conforming to IEC 60068-2-3 - 25+ 70 - 10+ 50 without derating, with protective cover on top of the drive - 10+ 60 with derating, without protective cover on top of the drive (see derating curves, page 36) - 10+ 40 without derating 1000 without derating (above this, derate the current by 1% per additional 100 m)
EMC immunity
EMC conducted and radiated emissions for drives All ATV 31H018M2...HU15M2, ATV 31C018M2...CU15M2, ATV 31H037N4...HU40N4, ATV 31C037N4...CU40N4 ATV 31HU22M2, ATV 31CU22M2, ATV 31HU55N4...HD15N4.
ATV 31H018M3X...HD15M3X, ATV 31H075S6X....HD15S6X e marking Product certification Degree of protection
ATV 31HpppM2, ATV 31HpppN4, ATV 31HpppM3X, ATV 31HpppS6X ATV 31CpppM2, ATV 31CpppN4
Degree of pollution Climatic treatment Vibration resistance Shock resistance Relative humidity Ambient temperature around the unit
Drive without 5 rail option
Storage Operation ATV 31Hppp
% C C
ATV 31Cppp, ATV 31Kppp Maximum operating altitude Operating position Maximum permanent angle in relation to the normal vertical mounting position
C m
Drive characteristics
Output frequency range Switching frequency Speed range Transient overtorque Braking torque 0500 216 adjustable during operation 150 170-200% of nominal motor torque (typical value) 100% of nominal motor torque continuously and up to 150% for 60 s Value of nominal motor torque (typical value) according to ratings: 30% for > ATV 31pU15pp 50% for y ATV 31pU15pp 100% for y ATV 31p075pp 150% for y ATV 31p018M2 150% of the nominal drive current for 60 seconds (typical value) Sensorless flux vector control with PWM (pulse width modulation) type motor control signal. Factory-set for most constant torque applications. Possible options: specific ratios for pumps and fans, energy saving or constant torque U/f for special motors. Factory-set with the speed loop stability and gain Possible options for machines with high resistive torque or high inertia, or for machines with fast cycles. Automatic whatever the load. Can be suppressed or adjusted. (1) See table on page 23 to check authorised cable lengths Hz kHz
With braking resistor Without braking resistor
Maximum transient current Voltage/frequency ratio
Frequency loop gain
Slip compensation
Presentation: pages 2 to 9
10
Characteristics (continued)

Altivar 31
Electrical characteristics
Power supply Voltage V 200 - 15% to 240 + 10% single phase for ATV 31ppppM2p 200 - 15% to 240 + 10% 3-phase for ATV 31ppppM3X 380 - 15% to 500 + 10% 3-phase for ATV 31ppppN4p 525 - 15% to 600 + 10% 3-phase for ATV 31ppppS6X 50 - 5% to 60 + 5%
Frequency Prospective short-circuit current ICC For drives ATV 31ppppM2 ATV 31H018M3X...HU40M3X, ATV 31p037N4...pU40N4, ATV 31H075S6X...HU40S6X ATV 31HU55M3X...HD15M3X, ATV 31HU55N4...HD15N4, ATV 31KU55N4...KD15N4, ATV 31HU55S6X...HD15S6X
Hz
A A
1000 (ICC at connection point) for single phase power supply 5000 (ICC at connection point) for 3-phase power supply 22000 (ICC at connection point) for 3-phase power supply
Output voltage Maximum connection capacity For drives and tightening torque of the ATV 31H018M2...H075M2, power supply terminals, motor, ATV 31H018M3X...HU15M3X braking module and DC bus ATV 31HU11M2...HU22M2, ATV 31HU22M3X...HU40M3X, ATV 31H037N4...HU40N4, ATV 31H075S6X...HU40S6X ATV 31HU55M3X, HU75M3X, ATV 31HU55N4, HU75N4, ATV 31HU55S6X, HU75S6X ATV 31HD11M3X, HD15M3X, ATV 31HD11N4, HD15N4, ATV 31HD11S6X, HD15S6X Electrical isolation Internal supplies available
Maximum 3-phase voltage equal to line supply voltage. 2.5 mm2 (AWG 14) 0.8 Nm 6 mm2 (AWG 10) 1.2 Nm
16 mm2 (AWG 6) 2.2 Nm 25 mm2 (AWG 3) 4 Nm Electrical isolation between power and control (inputs, outputs, power supplies) Short-circuit and overload protection: - One +10 V (0/+ 8%) supply for the reference potentiometer (2.2 to 10 k), maximum current 10 mA - One + 24 V supply (min. 19 V, max. 30 V) for logic inputs, maximum current 100 mA 3 configurable analog inputs AI1, AI2, AI3. b AI1: analog voltage input 0 to +10V, impedance 30 k (maximum safe voltage 30 V) b AI2: analog bipolar voltage input 10 V, impedance 30 k (maximum safe voltage 30 V) b AI3: analog current input X-Y mA by programming X and Y from 0 to 20 mA, with impedance 250 AIP: potentiometer reference for ATV31pppA only Max. sampling time: 8 ms 10-bit resolution Precision 4.3% Linearity 0.2% of maximum value Use: - 100 m maximum with shielded cable - 25 m maximum with unshielded cable 1 analog output configurable for voltage, current. b AOC: analog current output 0 to 20 mA, maximum load impedance 800 b AOV: analog voltage output 0 to +10V, minimum load impedance 470 8-bit resolution Precision 1% Linearity 0.2% Only analog output AOC is configurable as a logic output. b AOC: operation as logic output 24 V 20 mA max. Max. sampling time: 8 ms 1 relay logic output, one N/C contact and one N/O contact with common point. Minimum switching capacity: 10 mA for c 5 V. Maximum switching capacity: b on resistive load (cos = 1 and L/R = 0 ms): 5 A for a 250 V or c 30 V b on inductive load (cos = 0.4 and L/R = 7 ms): 2 A for a 250 V or c 30 V Max. sampling time: 8 ms Switching: 100,000 operations 1 relay logic output, one N/C contact, contact open on fault. Minimum switching capacity: 10 mA for c 5 V. Maximum switching capacity: b on resistive load (cos = 1 and L/R = 0 ms): 5 A for a 250 V or c 30 V b on inductive load (cos = 0.4 and L/R = 7 ms): 2 A for a 250 V or c 30 V Max. sampling time: 8 ms Switching: 100,000 operations
Configurable analog inputs
Analog output configurable for voltage, current and logic output
Configurable relay outputs
R1A, R1B, R1C
R2A, R2B
11
Characteristics (continued)

Altivar 31
Electrical characteristics (continued)

Logic inputs LI 6 programmable logic inputs Impedance 3.5 k + 24 V internal or 24 V external power supply (min. 19 V, max. 30 V) Max. current: 100 mA Max. sampling time: 4 ms Multiple assignment makes it possible to configure several functions on one input (example: LI1 assigned to forward and preset speed 2, LI3 assigned to reverse and preset speed 3) State 0 if < 5 V or logic input not wired, state 1 if > 11 V State 0 if > 19 V or logic input not wired, state 1 if < 13 V Connection to PLC output (see diagram page 36) 2.5 mm2 (AWG 14) 0.6 Nm Ramp profiles: b linear, can be adjusted separately from 0.1 to 999.9 s b S, U or customised Automatic adaptation of deceleration ramp time if braking capacities exceeded, possible inhibition of this adaptation (use of braking resistor). By d.c. injection: b by a signal on a programmable logic input b automatically as soon as the estimated output frequency drops to < 0.5 Hz, period adjustable from 0 to 30 s or continuous, current adjustable from 0 to 1.2 In b Thermal protection against overheating b Protection against short-circuits between motor phases b Protection against input phase breaks b Protection against motor phase breaks b Protection against overcurrent between output phases and earth b Line supply undervoltage and overvoltage safety circuits b Line supply phase loss safety function, for 3-phase supply Thermal protection integrated in the drive by continuous calculation of the l2t c 2040 V for ATV 31ppppM2 and M3X, c 2410 V for ATV 31ppppN4, c 2550 V for ATV 31ppppS6X a 2880 V for ATV 31ppppM2 and M3X, a 3400 V for ATV 31ppppN4, a 3600 V for ATV 31ppppS6X > 500 M (electrical isolation) c 500 V for 1 minute 1 red LED on front: LED lit indicates the presence of drive voltage Display coded by four 7-segment display units displaying the CANopen bus status (RUN and ERR). 0.1 0.1 to 100 Hz (calculate (high speed low speed) /1024) 5 Modbus and CANopen are integrated into the drive and available via an RJ45 connector RS 485 multidrop serial link b Modbus in RTU mode b Services supported: decimal function codes 03, 06, 16, 23 and 43 b Broadcasting b Number of addresses: drive address can be configured via the integrated terminal from 1 to 247 b Maximum number of Altivar 31 drives connected: 31 (two 470 master pulldown resistors) b Transmission speed: 4800, 9600 or 19200 bps Used for connecting: b the remote terminal (option) b the PowerSuite software workshop b a PLC b a microprocessor card b a PC To connect the ATV31 drive on the CANopen bus, use the VW3 CANTAP2 adapter. b Services supported: v Implicit exchange of Process Data Object - 2 PDOs depending on DSP 402 velocity mode - 2 configurable PDOs (data and transmission type) - PDOs can be exchanged between slaves. v Explicit exchange of Service Data Object - 1 receive SDO and 1 transmit SDO v Boot-up messages, emergency messages, node guarding and producer and consumer heartbeat, sync and NMT b Number of addresses: drive address can be configured via the integrated terminal from 1 to 127 b Maximum number of Altivar 31 drives connected: 127 b Transmission speed: 10, 20, 50, 125, 250, 500 kbps or 1 Mbps
Positive logic Negative logic CLI position Maximum I/O connection capacity and tightening torque Acceleration and deceleration ramps
Braking to a standstill
Main protection and safety features of the drive
Motor protection (see page 48) Dielectric strength
Between earth and power terminals Between control and power terminals
Insulation resistance to earth Signalling
Frequency resolution
Display units Analog inputs Time constant for reference change Communication Modbus
Hz Hz ms
CANopen
12
Characteristics, special uses

Altivar 31
Tn 2,25
2 1,75 1,7 1,50 1,25 1 0,95 0,75 0,50 0,25 0 0 25/30 50/60 75/90 100/120 Hz
Torque characteristics (typical curves) The curves below define the available continuous torque and transient overtorque for both force-cooled and self-cooled motors. The only difference is in the ability of the motor to provide a high continuous torque at less than half the nominal speed
3
Special uses
Use with a motor with a different rating to that of the drive The device can supply any motor which has a power rating lower than that for which it is designed. For motor ratings slightly higher than that of the drive, check that the current taken does not exceed the continuous output current of the drive. Test on a low power motor or without a motor In a testing or maintenance environment the drive can be checked without having to switch to a motor with the same rating as the drive (particularly useful in the case of high power drives). This use requires deactivation of motor phase loss detection. Connecting motors in parallel The rating of the drive must be greater than or equal to the sum of the currents of the motors to be connected to the drive. In this case, external thermal protection must be provided for each motor using probes or LR2 thermal bimetal overload relays designed for a 1.2 In motor. If the number of motors in parallel is greater than or equal to 3, it is advisable to install a 3-phase choke between the drive and the motors. Switching the motor at the drive output The drive can be switched when locked or unlocked. If the drive is switched on-thefly (drive unlocked), the motor is controlled and accelerates until it reaches the reference speed smoothly following the acceleration ramp. This use requires configuration of automatic catching a spinning load (catch on the fly) and activation of the function which manages the presence of a downstream contactor. Example: breaking of downstream contactor
2 1 4
1 2 3 4
Self-cooled motor: continuous useful torque (1) Force-cooled motor: continuous useful torque Transient overtorque 1.7 to 2 Tn Torque in overspeed at constant power (2)
t t1 1 KM1 0 t t2
KM1 Altivar 31 M
t1: deceleration without ramp (freewheel) t2: acceleration with ramp Typical applications: breaking safety circuit at drive outputs, "bypass" function, switching of motors connected in parallel.
(1) For power ratings 250 W, motor derating is less important (20% instead of 50% at very low frequencies). (2) The nominal frequency of the motor and the maximum output frequency can be adjusted between 40 and 500 Hz. Note: Check the mechanical overspeed characteristics of the selected motor with the manufacturer.
13
References

Altivar 31
Drives with heatsink (frequency range from 0.5 to 500 Hz)

Motor Line supply Power Line current Apparent indicated on (2) power rating plate (1) at U1 at U2 (3) kW HP A A kVA 0.18 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 3.0 5.3 6.8 8.9 12.1 15.8 21.9 2.5 4.4 5.8 7.5 10.2 13.3 18.4 0.6 1 1.4 1.8 2.4 3.2 4.4 Altivar 31 Max. Nominal Max. prospective current transient line Isc (4) current for 60 s 4 kHz kA A A 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1.5 3.3 3.7 4.8 6.9 8 11 2.3 5 5.6 7.2 10.4 12 16.5 Power References (5) dissipated at nominal load W 24 41 46 60 74 90 123 ATV 31H018M2 (6) ATV 31H037M2 (6 ) ATV 31H055M2 (6) ATV 31H075M2 (6) ATV 31HU11M2 (6) ATV 31HU15M2 (6) ATV 31HU22M2 (6) Weight
kg 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.800 1.800 3.100
Single phase supply voltage: 200240 V 50/60 Hz, with integrated EMC filters
531248
ATV 31H037M2
3-phase supply voltage: 200240 V 50/60 Hz, without EMC filters (7)
0.18 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 2.1 3.8 4.9 6.4 8.5 11.1 14.9 19.1 24.2 36.8 46.8 63.5 82.1 1.9 3.3 4.2 5.6 7.4 9.6 13 16.6 21.1 32 40.9 55.6 71.9 0.7 1.3 1.7 2.2 3 3.8 5.2 6.6 8.4 12.8 16.2 22 28.5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 22 22 22 22 1.5 3.3 3.7 4.8 6.9 8 11 13.7 17.5 27.5 33 54 66 2.3 5 5.6 7.2 10.4 12 16.5 20.6 26.3 41.3 49.5 81 99 23 38 43 55 71 86 114 146 180 292 388 477 628 ATV 31H018M3X (6) ATV 31H037M3X (6) ATV 31H055M3X (6) ATV 31H075M3X (6) ATV 31HU11M3X (6) ATV 31HU15M3X (6) ATV 31HU22M3X (6) ATV 31HU30M3X (6) ATV 31HU40M3X (6) ATV 31HU55M3X (6) ATV 31HU75M3X (6) ATV 31HD11M3X (6) ATV 31HD15M3X (6) 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.300 1.700 1.700 1.700 2.900 2.900 6.400 6.400 10.500 10.500
531249
ATV 31HU40M3X
3-phase supply voltage: 380500 V 50/60 Hz, with integrated EMC filters
531250
ATV 31HU75N4
0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 15
0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20
2.2 2.8 3.6 4.9 6.4 8.9 10.9 13.9 21.9 27.7 37.2 48.2
1.7 2.2 2.7 3.7 4.8 6.7 8.3 10.6 16.5 21 28.4 36.8
1.5 1.8 2.4 3.2 4.2 5.9 7.1 9.2 15 18 25 32
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 22 22 22 22
1.5 1.9 2.3 3 4.1 5.5 7.1 9.5 14.3 17 27.7 33
2.3 2.9 3.5 4.5 6.2 8.3 10.7 14.3 21.5 25.5 41.6 49.5
32 37 41 48 61 79 125 150 232 269 397 492
ATV 31H037N4 (6) ATV 31H055N4 (6) ATV 31H075N4 (6) ATV 31HU11N4 (6) ATV 31HU15N4 (6) ATV 31HU22N4 (6) ATV 31HU30N4 (6) ATV 31HU40N4 (6) ATV 31HU55N4 (6) ATV 31HU75N4 (6) ATV 31HD11N4 (6) ATV 31HD15N4 (6)
1.800 1.800 1.800 1.800 1.800 3.100 3.100 3.100 6.500 6.500 11.000 11.000
531251
3-phase supply voltage: 525600 V 50/60 Hz, without EMC filters (7)
0.75 1.5 2.2 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 ATV 31HD15N4A 1 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 8 8 6.4 10.7 16.2 21.3 27.8 36.4 2.4 4.2 5.6 9.3 14.1 18.5 24.4 31.8 2.5 4.4 5.8 9.7 15 19 25 33 5 5 5 5 22 22 22 22 1.7 2.7 3.9 6.1 9 11 17 22 2.6 4.1 5.9 9.2 13.5 16.5 25.5 33 36 48 62 94 133 165 257 335 ATV 31H075S6X ATV 31HU15S6X ATV 31HU22S6X ATV 31HU40S6X ATV 31HU55S6X ATV 31HU75S6X ATV 31HD11S6X ATV 31HD15S6X 1.700 1.700 2.900 2.900 6.200 6.200 10.000 10.000
(1) These power ratings are for a maximum switching frequency of 4 kHz, in continuous operation. The switching frequency is adjustable from 2 to 16 kHz. Above 4 kHz derate the nominal drive current. The nominal motor current should not exceed this value: see derating curve on page 38. (2) Typical value for a 4-pole motor and a maximum switching frequency of 4 kHz, with no additional line choke, for the max. prospective line current. (3) Nominal supply voltages, min. U1, max. U2 (200-240 V; 380-500 V; 525-600 V). (4) If line Isc is greater than the values in the table, add line chokes (see page 21). (5) To order a drive intended for wire guiding applications, add a T to the end of the reference. (6) The drive can also be ordered complete with potentiometer. In this case add the letter A to the reference for the drive you require (e.g. ATV 31H018M2A). (7) Optional EMC filter, see pages 22 and 23.
14
References (continued)

Altivar 31
Enclosed drive
Customisable enclosed drives (frequency range from 0.5 to 500 Hz)

Motor Power indicated on rating plate (1) kW 0.18
531252
Line supply Line current (2)
HP 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3
at U1 A 3 5.3 6.8 8.9 12.1 15.8 21.9
at U2 A 2.5 4.4 5.8 7.5 10.2 13.3 18.4
Altivar 31 Apparent Max. Nominal Max. power prospective current transient line Isc (3) current for 60 s 4 kHz KVA kA A A 0.6 1 1.4 1.8 2.4 3.2 4.4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1.5 3.3 3.7 4.8 6.9 8 11 2.3 5 5.6 7.2 10.4 12 16.5
Power References (4) dissipated at nominal load W 24 41 46 60 74 90 123 ATV 31C018M2 ATV 31C037M2 ATV 31C055M2 ATV 31C075M2 ATV 31CU11M2 ATV 31CU15M2 ATV 31CU22M2
Weight
kg 6.300 6.300 6.300 6.300 8.800 8.800 10.700
Single phase supply voltage: 200240 V (5) 50/60 Hz with integrated EMC filters
0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 ATV 31C/Hpppp
3-phase supply voltage: 380500 V (5) 50/60 Hz with integrated EMC filters
0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 5 2.2 2.8 3.6 4.9 6.4 8.9 10.9 13.9 1.7 2.2 2.7 3.7 4.8 6.7 8.3 10.6 1.5 1.8 2.4 3.2 4.2 5.9 7.1 9.2 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 1.5 1.9 2.3 3 4.1 5.5 7.1 9.5 2.3 2.9 3.5 4.5 6.2 8.3 10.7 14.3 32 37 41 48 61 79 125 150 ATV 31C037N4 ATV 31C055N4 ATV 31C075N4 ATV 31CU11N4 ATV 31CU15N4 ATV 31CU22N4 ATV 31CU30N4 ATV 31CU40N4 8.800 8.800 8.800 8.800 8.800 10.700 10.700 10.700
Ready-assembled enclosed drives (frequency range from 0.5 to 500 Hz)

Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
(1) These power ratings are for a maximum switching frequency of 4 kHz, in continuous operation. The switching frequency is adjustable from 2 to 16 kHz. Above 4 kHz derate the nominal drive current. The nominal motor current should not exceed this value: see derating curve on page 38. (2) Typical value for a 4-pole motor and a maximum switching frequency of 4 kHz, with no additional line choke, for the max. prospective line current. (3) If line Isc is greater than the values in the table, add line chokes (see page 21). (4) To order a drive intended for wire guiding applications, add a T to the end of the reference. (5) Nominal supply voltages, min. U1, max. U2 (200-240 V; 380-500 V).
15
References (continued)

Altivar 31
Drive kit
Drive kit (frequency range from 0.5 to 500 Hz)

Motor Power indicated on rating plate (1) Line supply Line current (2) Altivar 31 Apparent Max. Nominal Max. Power References (4) power prospective current transient dissipated line Isc (3) current at nominal for load 60 s 4 kHz KVA kA A A W 0.6 1 1.4 1.8 2.4 3.2 4.4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1.5 3.3 3.7 4.8 6.9 8 11 2.3 5 5.6 7.2 10.4 12 16.5 24 41 46 60 74 90 123 ATV 31K018M2 ATV 31K037M2 ATV 31K055M2 ATV 31K075M2 ATV 31KU11M2 ATV 31KU15M2 ATV 31KU22M2 Weight
kW 0.18
DF531254
HP 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3
at U1 A 3 5.3 6.8 8.9 12.1 15.8 21.9
at U2 A 2.5 4.4 5.8 7.5 10.2 13.3 18.4
kg 6.300 6.300 6.300 6.300 8.800 8.800 10.700
Single phase supply voltage: 200240 V (5) 50/60 Hz with integrated filters
0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 ATV 31Kppppp 2.2
3-phase supply voltage: 380500 V (5) 50/60 Hz with integrated filters

0.37
DF531255
0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20
2.2 2.8 3.6 4.9 6.4 8.9 10.9 13.9 21.9 27.7 37.2 48.2
1.7 2.2 2.7 3.7 4.8 6.7 8.3 10.6 16.5 21 28.4 36.8
1.5 1.8 2.4 3.2 4.2 5.9 7.1 9.2 15 18 25 32
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 22 22 22 22
1.5 1.9 2.3 3 4.1 5.5 7.1 9.5 14.3 17 27.7 33
2.3 2.9 3.5 4.5 6.2 8.3 10.7 14.3 21.5 25.5 41.6 49.5
32 37 41 48 61 79 125 150 232 269 397 492
ATV 31K037N4 ATV 31K055N4 ATV 31K075N4 ATV 31KU11N4 ATV 31KU15N4 ATV 31KU22N4 ATV 31KU30N4 ATV 31KU40N4 ATV 31KU55N4 ATV 31KU75N4 ATV 31KD11N4 ATV 31KD15N4
8.800 8.800 8.800 8.800 8.800 10.700 10.700 10.700 16.500 16.500 23.000 23.000
0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 ATV 31Kppppp 7.5 11 15
(1) These power ratings are for a maximum switching frequency of 4 kHz, in continuous operation. The switching frequency is adjustable from 2 to 16 kHz. Above 4 kHz derate the nominal drive current. The nominal motor current should not exceed this value: see derating curve on page 38. (2) Typical value for a 4-pole motor and a maximum switching frequency of 4 kHz, with no additional line choke, for the max. prospective line current. (3) If line Isc is greater than the values in the table, add line chokes (see page 21). (4) To order a drive intended for wire guiding applications, add a T to the end of the reference. (5) Nominal supply voltages, min. U1, max. U2 (200-240 V; 380-500 V).
16
References

Altivar 31
Accessories
Plate for mounting on 5 rail
Description Plate for mounting on 5 rail, width 35 mm For drives Reference ATV 31H018M2,ATV 31H037M2, VW3 A11851 ATV31H055M2, ATV 31H075M2, ATV 31H018M3X, ATV 31H037M3X, ATV H055M3X, ATV 31H075M3X ATV 31HU11M2, ATV 31HU15M2, VW3 A31852 ATV 31HU11M3X, ATV 31HU15M3X, ATV 31HU22M3X, ATV 31H037N4, ATV 31H055N4, ATV 31H075N4, ATV 31HU11N4, ATV 31HU15N4, ATV 31H075S6X, ATV 31HU15S6X For drives Reference
Weight kg 0.200
0.220
UL Type 1 conformity kit (1)

Description Mechanical device ATV 31H018M2,ATV 31H037M2, VW3 A31812 fixing to the underside of ATV 31H055M2, ATV 31H075M2 the Altivar 31 ATV 31H018M3X, ATV 31H037M3X, VW3 A31811 0.400 ATV H055M3X, ATV 31H075M3X ATV 31HU11M3X, ATV 31HU15M3X VW3 A31813 0.400 ATV 31HU11M2, ATV 31HU15M2, VW3 A31814 0.500 ATV 31HU22M3X, ATV 31H037N4, ATV 31H055N4, ATV 31H075N4, ATV 31HU11N4, ATV 31HU15N4, ATV 31H075S6X, ATV 31HU15S6X ATV 31HU22M2, ATV 31HU30M3X, VW3 A31815 0.500 ATV 31HU40M3X, ATV 31HU22N4, ATV 31HU30N4, ATV 31HU40N4, ATV 31HU22S6X, ATV 31HU40S6X ATV 31HU55M3X, ATV 31HU75M3X, VW3 A31816 0.900 ATV 31HU55N4, ATV 31HU75N4, ATV 31HU55S6X, ATV 31HU75S6X ATV 31HD11M3X, ATV 31HD15M3X, VW3 A31817 1.200 ATV 31HD11N4, ATV 31HD15N4, ATV 31HD11S6X, ATV 31HD15S6X (1) This device allows cables to be connected directly to the drive using conduits or cable glands. Weight kg 0.400
Altivar 28 substitution kit

Description Mechanical adapters allowing an ATV 31 to be used in place of an ATV 28 of the same rating (using the same fixing holes) For drives ATV 31H018M2,ATV 31H037M2, ATV 31H055M2, ATV 31H075M2 ATV 31H018M3X, ATV 31H037M3X, ATV H055M3X, ATV 31H075M3X Reference VW3 A31821 Weight kg
ATV 31HU11M2, ATV 31HU15M2, VW3 A31822 ATV 31HU11M3X, ATV 31HU15M3X, ATV 31HU22M3X, ATV 31H075S6X, ATV 31HU15S6X ATV 31HU55N4, ATV 31HU75N4, VW3 A31823 ATV 31HU55M3X, ATV 31HU75M3X, ATV 31HU55S6X, ATV 31HU75S6X
Remote terminal
Description For ATV 31 drives of all ratings, assembly comprising: - terminal, cable fitted with 2 connectors - seal and screws for IP 65 mounting on an enclosure door
ESC ENT
stop reset FWO REV
Reference VW3 A31101
Weight kg
Documentation
Description - Simplified ATV 31 users manual and CD-ROM, comprising: - a Users manual for the drives - a Users manual for Modbus and CANopen International Technical Manual (ITM) Supplied with the drive Reference Weight kg
RUN
VW3 A31101
CD-ROM
DCI CD39811
0.150
17
Presentation, characteristics

Altivar 31
Options: braking resistors
Presentation
The resistor enables the Altivar 31 drive to operate while braking to a standstill or in braked operation, by dissipating the braking energy. Two types of resistor are available: - enclosed model (IP 30 enclosure) designed to comply with EMC regulations and protected by a temperature-controlled switch or thermal relay - non-protected model (IP00) for low power ratings only They are designed for machine applications with high inertia, driving loads, machines with fast cycles.
Characteristics
References Ambient air temperature Degree of protection of enclosure Resistor protection Temperature-controlled switch C VW3 A58702 to VW3 A58704 40 IP 00 VW3 A58732 to VW3 A58735 IP 30 VW3 A58736 and VW3 A58737 VW3 A66704
IP 23
None By temperature-controlled switch (1) By thermal relay (2) 130 5% 260 14% a 110 V - 0.3 A a 220 V - 6 A c 24 V - 0.01 A m 150 50 The value of the average power that can be dissipated by the resistor in the enclosure Load factor of resistors at 40C is determined for a braking load factor corresponding to the majority of common applications: - braking for 2 seconds with a torque of 0.6 Tn every 40 seconds - braking for 0.8 second with a torque of 1.5 Tn every 40 seconds The internal circuits for drives used for braking on external resistors are sized for the Load factor of drives following cycles. If they are exceeded, the drive will lock and display a fault. - 1.5 TN for 60 seconds per 140-second cycle - TN continuously (1) The contact must be connected in sequence (used for signalling or for controlling the line contactor). (2) To be ordered separately, 8 A rating. Trip temperature Max. voltage - max. current Min. voltage - min. current Maximum contact resistance C
Load factor and determining the nominal power

Speed
0 T
Time
Load factor: --
t T
The value of the average power that can be dissipated by the resistor in the enclosure at 40C is determined for a braking load factor corresponding to the majority of common applications. This load factor is defined above. For a specific application (e.g. handling), the nominal resistor power has to be redefined by taking account of the new load factor.
t: braking time in s T: cycle time in s Chart 1 Graph of the average power as a function of the braking torque for a load factor.
K1 1 60% 40% 20% 0,1 10% 5% 2% 0,01
20 18 16 14 12 10 8 7 6 4 2 0 1 10 100 1000
Chart 2 Permissible resistor overload as a function of time (characteristic curve).

K2
0,06
t (s)
0,001 0,1
0,5 0,6
1,5 Tb/Tn
Example: Motor of power Pm = 4 kW Motor efficiency = 0.85 Braking torque Tb = 0.6 Tn Braking time t = 10 s Cycle time T = 50 s t - = 20% Load factor Lf = -T Use chart 1 to determine the coefficient K1 corresponding to a braking torque of 0.6 Tn and a load factor of 20%. K1 = 0.06
Use chart 2 to determine the coefficient K2 corresponding to a braking time of 10 seconds. K2 = 7 The nominal resistor power (Pn) must be greater than:
1 1 3 Pn = Pm K1 1 + ------------------ = 4,10 0,06 0,85 1 + ----------------- = 350W K2 Lf 7 0,2
18
References

Altivar 31
Options: braking resistors
For drives
Min. resistor value (1) 40 40 27 40 40 27 80 80 54 54 96 64 55 36 44 25 25 16 40 40 27 40 40 27 80 80 54 54 25 25 16 55 36 25 16 55 36 29 19 34 23 16 20 24 8 5
Ohmic value
Average power available at 40C(2) W 32 50C W 28
Reference
Weight
100
kg VW3 A58702 0.600
Non-protected braking resistors

ATV 31H/C/K018M2, ATV 31H/C/K037M2, ATV 31H/C/K055M2, ATV 31H/C/K075M2 ATV 31H/C/KU11M2, ATV 31H/C/KU15M2, ATV 31H018M3X, ATV 31H037M3X, ATV 31H055M3X, ATV 31H075M3X, ATV 31HU11M3X, ATV 31HU15M3X, ATV 31H/C/K037N4, ATV 31H/C/K055N4, ATV 31H/C/K075N4, ATV 31H/C/KU11N4, ATV 31H/C/KU15N4, ATV 31H/C/KU22N4 ATV 31H075S6X ATV 31HU15S6X, ATV31HU22S6X ATV 31H/C/KU30N4, ATV 31H/C/KU40N4 ATV 31HU40S6X ATV 31H/C/KU22M2, ATV 31HU22M3X, ATV 31HU30M3X
531231
100
40
35
VW3 A58703
0.850
68
32
28
VW3 A58704
0.600
Protected braking resistors

ATV 31H/C/K018M2, ATV 31H/C/K037M2, ATV 31H/C/K055M2, ATV 31H/C/K075M2, ATV 31H/C/KU11M2, ATV 31H/C/KU15M2, ATV 31H018M3X, ATV 31H037M3X, ATV 31H055M3X, ATV 31H075M3X, ATV 31HU11M3X, ATV 31HU15M3X, ATV 31H/C/K037N4, ATV 31H/C/K055N4, ATV 31H/C/K075N4, AATV 31H/C/KU11N4, ATV 31H/C/KU15N4, ATV 31H/C/KU22N4 ATV 31H/C/KU22M2, ATV 31HU22M3X, ATV 31HU30M3X ATV 31H/C/KU30N4, ATV 31H/C/KU40N4 ATV 31HU22M3X, ATV 31HU30M3X ATV 31H/C/KU30N4, ATV 31H/C/KU40N4 ATV 31H/KU55N4, ATV 31H/KU75N4 ATV 31HU55S6X ATV 31HU75S6X ATV 31HU40M3X ATV 31H/KD11N4, ATV 31H/KD15N4 ATV 31HD11S6X, ATV 31HD15S6X ATV 31HU55M3X, ATV 31HU75M3X ATV 31HD11M3X, ATV 31HD15M3X VW3 A5873p 100 32 28 VW3 A58732 2.000
VW3 A58702
68
32
28
VW3 A58733
2.000
531232
100 60
40 80
35 69
VW3 A58734 VW3 A58735
2.000 3.400
28
200
173
VW3 A58736
5.100
14 10
400 1000
346 866
VW3 A58737 VW3 A66704 (3)
6.100 17.000
(1) Depends on the drive rating. (2) Power that can be dissipated by the resistor at the maximum temperature of 115C, corresponding to a maximum temperature rise of 75C in a 40C environment. (3) The various ohmic values are obtained as a function of the connection, described in the resistor instructions.
19

Altivar 31
Options: line chokes
Presentation
These chokes provide improved protection against overvoltages on the line supply and reduce harmonic distortion of the current produced by the drive. The recommended chokes are used to limit the line current. They have been developed to conform to standard EN 50178 (VDE 0160 level 1 high energy overvoltages on the line supply). The values of the chokes are defined for a voltage drop between 3% and 5% of the nominal line voltage. Values higher than this will cause loss of torque. The use of line chokes is recommended in particular under the following circumstances: b Line supply with significant disturbance from other equipment (interference, overvoltages) b Line supply with voltage imbalance between phases > 1.8 % of nominal voltage b Drive supplied with power by a line with very low impedance (in the vicinity of power transformers 10 times more powerful than the drive rating) The prospective short-circuit current at the point of connection of the drive must not exceed the maximum value indicated in the tables of references. The use of line chokes allows connection on the following networks: - Max. Isc 22 kA for 200/240 V - Max. Isc 65 kA for 380/500 V and 525/600 V b Installation of a large number of frequency converters on the same line b Reduction of overload in cos correction capacitors, if the installation has a power factor correction unit
Type of line choke VZ1 L00 VZ1 L00 VZ1 L01 VW3 A6 VW3 A6 VW3 A6 VW3 A6 VW3 A6 VW3 A6 4M010 7UM50 8UM20 6501 6502 6503 6504 6505 6506 EN 50178 (VDE 0160 level 1 high energy overvoltages on the line supply) Between 3 and 5% of the nominal line voltage. Values higher than this will cause loss of torque. Choke Terminals mH A W IP 00 IP 20 10 4 17
Characteristics
Conformity to standards Voltage drop Degree of protection Value of choke Nominal current Loss
5 7 20
2 18 30
10 4 45
4 10 65
2 16 75
IP 10 1 30 90
0.5 60 80
IP 00 0.3 100
20
References

Altivar 31
Options: line chokes
Altivar 31 Single phase or 3-phase
Line current without choke at U min. at U max. A A 3.0 5.3 6.8 8.9 12.1 15.8 21.9 2.1 3.8 4.9 6.4 8.5 11.1 14.9 19.1 24.2 36.8 46.8 63.5 82.1 2.2 2.8 3.6 4.9 6.4 8.9 10.9 13.9 21.9 27.7 37.2 48.2 2.5 4.4 5.8 7.5 10.2 13.3 18.4 1.9 3.3 4.2 5.6 7.4 9.6 13 16.6 21.1 32 40.9 55.6 71.9 1.7 2.2 2.7 3.7 4.8 6.7 8.3 10.6 16.5 21 28.4 36.8
Choke Line current with Reference choke at U min. at U max. A A 2.1 3.9 5.2 7.0 10.2 13.4 19.2 1 1.9 2.5 3.3 4.8 6.4 9.2 12.3 16.1 21.7 29 41.6 55.7 1.1 1.4 1.8 2.6 3.4 5 6.5 8.5 11.7 15.4 22.5 29.6 1.8 3.3 4.3 5.9 8.6 11.4 16.1 0.9 1.6 2.2 2.9 4.2 5.6 8 10.7 14 19 25.2 36.5 48.6 0.9 1.2 1.5 2 2.6 4.1 5.2 6.6 9.3 12.1 18.1 23.3 1.4 2.3 3.6 5.8 7.5 10.7 14.4 20.6 VZ1 L004M010 VZ1 L007UM50 VZ1 L018UM20
Weight
kg 0.630 0.880 1.990
Single phase supply voltage: 200240 V (1) 50/60 Hz

ATV 31H/C/K018M2 ATV 31H/C/K037M2 ATV 31H/C/K055M2 ATV 31H/C/K075M2 ATV 31H/C/KU11M2 ATV 31H/C/KU15M2 ATV 31H/C/KU22M2
803687
3-phase supply voltage: 200240 V (1) 50/60 Hz

ATV 31H018M3X ATV 31H037M3X ATV 31H055M3X ATV 31H075M3X ATV 31HU11M3X ATV 31HU15M3X ATV 31HU22M3X ATV 31HU30M3X ATV 31HU40M3X ATV 31HU55M3X ATV 31HU75M3X ATV 31HD11M3X ATV 31HD15M3X ATV 31H/C/K037N4 ATV 31H/C/K055N4 ATV 31H/C/K075N4 ATV 31H/C/KU11N4 ATV 31H/C/KU15N4 ATV 31H/C/KU22N4 ATV 31H/C/KU30N4 ATV 31H/C/KU40N4 ATV 31H/KU55N4 ATV 31H/KU75N4 ATV 31H/KD11N4 ATV 31H/KD15N4 VW3 A66501 1.500
VW3 A66502 VW3 A66503 VW3 A66504
3.000 3.500 6.000
VW3 A6650p
VW3 A66505
11.000

VW3 A66501 1.500
VW3 A66502
3.000
VW3 A66503 VW3 A66504
3.500 6.000

ATV 31H075S6X 2.5 2.4 1.4 ATV 31HU15S6X 4.4 4.2 2.4 ATV 31HU22S6X 5.8 5.6 3.8 ATV 31HU40S6X 9.7 9.3 6 ATV 31HU55S6X 14.7 14.1 7.8 ATV 31HU75S6X 19.3 18.5 11 ATV 31HD11S6X 25.4 24.4 15 ATV 31HD15S6X 33.2 31.8 21.1 (1) Nominal supply voltage: U min.U max. VW3 A66501 1.500
VW3 A66502 VW3 A66503 VW3 A66504
3.000 3.500 6.000
21

Altivar 31
Options: additional EMC input filters
Presentation
Function The Altivar 31 has built-in radio interference input filters to meet EMC "product" standards for variable speed drives IEC/EN 61800-3 and to comply with the European EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) directive. The additional filters enable the drives to meet more stringent requirements: these filters are designed to reduce conducted emissions on the line supply below the limits of standards EN 55011 class A (1) or EN 55022 class B. These additional filters are installed underneath ATV 31H drives. They can be installed at the side of the product in the case of ATV 31C and K drives. They act as supports for the drives and are fixed to them via tapped holes. Use according to the type of network Use of these additional filters is only possible on TN (neutral connection) and TT (neutral to earth) type networks. The standard IEC 61800-3, annex D2.1, indicates that on IT (impedance earthed or isolated neutral) networks the filters can randomise the operation of insulation monitors. The efficiency of additional filters on this type of network also depends on the nature of the impedance between neutral and earth and is therefore unpredictable. If a machine is to be installed on an IT network, one solution is to insert an isolation transformer and to connect locally to the machine on a TN or TT network.
Characteristics
Conformity to standards Degree of protection Maximum relative humidity Ambient air temperature around the device Maximum operating altitude Vibration resistance Shock resistance Max. nominal voltage Operation Storage Without derating Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 50/60 Hz single phase 50/60 Hz 3-phase V V C C m EN 133200 IP 21 and IP 41 on upper part 93% without condensation or dripping water conforming to IEC 68-2-3 - 10+ 60 - 25+ 70 1000 (above this, derate the current by 1% per additional 100 m) 1.5 mm peak to peak from 3 to 13 Hz 1 gn peak from 13 to 150 Hz 15 gn for 11 ms 240 + 10% 240 + 10% 500 + 10% 600 + 10%
22
References

Altivar 31
Options: additional EMC input filters
For drives Reference
Filter Maximum length of In shielded cable (2) EN 55011 EN 55022 class A class B (1) (2) m m A 20 9
Il (3)
Loss (4)
Reference
Weight
mA 100
W VW3 A31401
kg
Single phase supply voltage: 200240 V 50/60 Hz

ATV 31H/C/K018M2 50 ATV 31H/C/K037M2 ATV 31H/C/K055M2 ATV 31H/C/K075M2 ATV 31H/C/KU11M2 50 ATV 31H/C/KU15M2 ATV 31H/C/KU22M2 50 ATV 31H018M3X ATV 31H037M3X ATV 31H055M3X ATV 31H075M3X ATV 31HU11M3X ATV 31HU15M3X ATV 31HU22M3X ATV 31HU30M3X ATV 31HU40M3X ATV 31HU55M3X ATV 31HU75M3X ATV 31HD11M3X ATV 31HD15M3X 5
20 20
16 22 7
150 80 7
VW3 A31403 VW3 A31405
3-phase supply voltage: 200240 V 50/60 Hz

VW3 A31402
15
15
VW3 A31404
5 5 5
25 47 83
35 45 15
VW3 A31406 VW3 A31407 VW3 A31408

ATV 31H/C/K037N4 50 20 15 15 VW3 A31404 ATV 31H/C/K055N4 ATV 31H/C/K075N4 ATV 31H/C/KU11N4 ATV 31H/C/KU15N4 ATV 31H/C/KU22N4 50 20 25 35 VW3 A31406 ATV 31H/C/KU30N4 ATV 31H/C/KU40N4 ATV 31H/KU55N4 50 20 47 45 VW3 A31407 ATV 31H/KU75N4 ATV 31H/KD11N4 50 20 49 45 VW3 A31409 ATV 31H/KD15N4 (1) The filter selection tables show the length limits for the shielded cables connecting the motors to the drives for a switching frequency of 2 to 16 kHz. These limits are given as examples only as they vary depending on the interference capacity of the motors and the cables used. If motors are connected in parallel, it is the total length that should be taken into account. (2) In: Nominal filter current. (3) Maximum earth leakage current at 50 Hz. (4) By heat dissipation.
23

Altivar 31
Options: output filters and motor chokes
Presentation
By inserting an output filter between the drive and the motor, it is possible to: b Limit the dv/dt at the motor terminals (500 to 1500 V/s), for cables longer than 50 m b Filter interference caused by opening a contactor placed between the filter and the motor b Reduce the motor earth leakage current When using a downstream contactor between the drive and the motor, ferrite suppressors should be fitted to each motor cable for certain drive ratings supplied with a single phase or 3-phase 200 V supply. Principle
LR filter cell LC filter cell
This cell comprises 3 high frequency chokes and 3 resistors.

LR filter
U1
This cell comprises 3 high frequency chokes and 3 capacitors.

LC filter
U1 Altivar 31 V1 W1
Altivar 31
V1 W1
M1 3
Motor choke
Ferrite suppressors for downstream contactor opening
For standard motor cables longer than 100 m (50 m for shielded cables), a choke can be used to limit overvoltages at the motor terminals.
Altivar 31
M1 3
Altivar 31
Contactor
M1 3
Characteristics (1)
LR filter cells (2) VW3 A5845p 0.5 ... 4 max. y 100 IP 20 LC filter cells VW3 A6641p 2 or 4 y 100 y 200 IP 00 Motor chokes VW3 A6650p 4 y 100 IP 20
Drive switching frequency Length of motor cable Shielded cables Unshielded cables Degree of protection
kHz m m
12 y 50 y 100 IP 00
(1) Filter performance is ensured if the cable lengths between the motor and the drive given in the above table are not exceeded. For an application with several motors connected in parallel, the cable length must include all tap-offs. If a cable longer than that recommended is used, the filters may overheat. (2) Please consult your Regional Sales Office for frequencies greater than 4 kHz or cables longer than 100 m.
24
References

Altivar 31
Options: output filters and motor chokes
LR filter cells
521425
For drives
Loss W 150
VW3 A58451
ATV 31H/C/K018M2 ATV 31H/C/K037M2 ATV 31H/C/K055M2 ATV 31H/C/K075M2 ATV 31H/C/KU11M2 ATV 31H/C/KU15M2 ATV 31H018M3X ATV 31H037M3X ATV 31H055M3X ATV 31H075M3X ATV 31HU11M3X ATV 31HU15M3X ATV 31H/C/K037N4 ATV 31H/C/K055N4 ATV 31H/C/K075N4 ATV 31H/C/KU11N4 ATV 31H/C/KU15N4 ATV 31H/C/KU22N4 ATV 31H/C/KU30N4 ATV 31H/C/KU40N4 ATV 31H075S6X ATV 31HU15S6X ATV 31HU22S6X ATV 31HU40S6X ATV 31HU55S6X ATV 31H/C/KU22M2 ATV 31HU22M3X ATV 31HU30M3X ATV 31H/KU55N4 ATV 31HU75S6X ATV 31HU40M3X ATV 31HU55M3X ATV 31HU75M3X ATV 31H/KU75N4 ATV 31HD11S6X ATV 31HD15S6X
Nominal Reference current A 10 VW3 A58451
Weight kg 7.400
180
16
VW3 A58452
7.400
220
33
VW3 A58453
12.500
LC filter cells
For drives ATV 31HD11M3X ATV 31HD15M3X Reference VW3 A66412 Weight kg 3.500
Motor chokes
For drives Loss W 65 Nominal Reference current A 10 VW3 A66502 Weight kg 3.000
ATV 31H/C/KU22N4 ATV 31H/C/KU30N4 ATV 31H/C/KU40N4 ATV 31HU40S6X, ATV 31HU55S6X ATV 31H/C/KU22M2, ATV 31HU22M3X ATV 31HU30M3X, ATV 31H/KU55N4 ATV 31HU75S6X ATV 31HU40M3X ATV 31HU55M3X ATV 31HU75M3X ATV 31H/KU75N4 ATV 31H/KD11N4 ATV 31HD11S6X ATV 31HD15S6X ATV 31H/KD15N4 ATV 31HD11M3X ATV 31HD15M3X For drives ATV 31H018M2 ATV 31H037M2, ATV 31H018M3 ATV 31H037M3 ATV 31H055M2, ATV 31H075M2 ATV 31HU11M2, ATV 31HU15M2 ATV 31H055M3, ATV 31H075M3
75
16
VW3 A66503
3.500
90
30
VW3 A66504
6.000
80
60 100
VW3 A66505 VW3 A66506
11.000 16.000

Sold in lots of 3 3 3 Unit reference VW3 A31451 VW3 A31452 VW3 A31453 Weight kg
25
Presentation

Altivar 31
Modbus and CANopen communication buses

The Altivar 31 can be connected directly to Modbus and CANopen buses by means of an RJ45 connector, which supports both protocols. The communication function provides access to the drives configuration, adjustment, control and monitoring functions. CANopen Modbus Connections via splitter blocks and RJ45 connectors
Connections via junction boxes
1 2 2 3 4 4 3 4 3 5 4 3 4
1 6 4 6 5 2
1 5 3 4
ATV 31
ATV 31
ATV 31
1 2 3 4
PLC (1) CANopen trunk cable CANopen tap junction VW3 CAN TAP2 CANopen drop cable VW3 CAN CA RRpp
1 PLC (1) 1 2 Modbus cable depending on the type of 2 controller or PLC 3 3 Modbus splitter block LU9 GC3 4 Modbus drop cables VW3 A8 306 Rpp 4 5 5 Line terminators VW3 A8 306 RC 6 Modbus T-junction boxes 6 VW3 A8 306 TFpp (with cable) 7
PLC (1) Modbus cable depending on the type of controller or PLC Modbus cables TSX CSAp00 T-junction box TSX SCA 50 Subscriber socket TSX SCA 62 Modbus drop cables VW3 A8 306 Modbus drop cables VW3 A8 306 D30
Connections via screw terminals In this case, use a Modbus drop cable VW3 A8 306 D30 and line terminators VW3 A8 306 DRC.
Other communication buses

The Altivar 31 can also be connected to the following networks via a module (bridge or gateway): b Ethernet b Fipio b Profibus DP b DeviceNet The communication function provides access to the drives configuration, adjustment, control and monitoring functions.
2 3 4
2 3
ATV 31
6 5 5 5
1 To network 2 Communication modules 3 Cables VW3 A8 306 Rpp, VW3 P07 306 R10 or VW3 A8 306 D30, depending on the type of module. 4 Modbus splitter block LU9 GC3 5 Modbus drop cables VW3 A8 306 Rpp 6 Line terminator VW3 A8 306 RC
ATV 31
(1) Please consult our specialist catalogues.
26
References

Altivar 31
Modbus and CANopen communication buses

Connection accessories
Description CANopen bus junction box
563028
Reference VW3 CAN TAP2 TSX SCA 50
Weight kg 0.520
TSX SCA 50
Modbus junction box 3 screw terminals, RC line terminator To be connected using cable VW3 A8 306 D30 Modbus subscriber socket 2 female 15-way SUB-D connectors and 2 screw terminals, RC line terminator To be connected using cable VW3 A8 306 Modbus splitter block 10 RJ45 connectors and 1 screw terminal Modbus line For RJ45 R = 120 , C = 1 nF terminators connector (1) R = 150 For screw terminals R = 120 , C = 1 nF R = 150 Modbus T-junction boxes
TSX SCA 62
0.570
LU9 GC3 VW3 A8 306 RC VW3 A8 306 R VW3 A8 306 DRC VW3 A8 306 DR
0.500 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200
563029
TSX SCA 62
With integrated cable (0.3 m) VW3 A8 306 TF03 With integrated cable (1 m) VW3 A8 306 TF10
Connecting cables
Description Cables for CANopen bus Cables for Modbus bus Length m 0.3 m 10 m 3 3 Connectors 2 RJ45 connectors 2 RJ45 connectors Reference Weight kg VW3 CAN CA RR03 0.050 VW3 CAN CA RR1 0.500 0.150 0.150
0.3 1 3 Cables for 1 Profibus gateway LA9 P307 RS 485 double 100 shielded twisted pair cables 200
563030
1 RJ45 connector VW3 A8 306 D30 and one end stripped 1 RJ45 connector and 1 male VW3 A8 306 15-way SUB-D connector for TSX SCA 62 2 RJ45 connectors VW3 A8 306 R03 2 RJ45 connectors 2 RJ45 connectors 2 RJ45 connectors VW3 A8 306 R10 VW3 A8 306 R30 VW3 P07 306 R10
0.050 0.050 0.150 0.050
Supplied without connector TSX CSA 100 Supplied without connector TSX CSA 200 Supplied without connector TSX CSA 500
500
Other communication buses

Description 174 CEV 300 20
563031
Cables to be connected VW3 A8 306 D30
Reference
Ethernet/Modbus bridge with 1 x Ethernet 10baseT port (RJ45) Fipio/Modbus gateway (3) DeviceNet/Modbus gateway (3) Profibus DP/Modbus gateway Parameters set using standard Profibus DP configurator (3)
Weight kg 174 CEV 300 20 (2) 0.500
VW3 A8 306 Rpp VW3 A8 306 Rpp VW3 P07 306 R10
LUF P1 LUF P9 LA9 P307
0.240 0.240 0.240
563032
LUF P1
LA9 P307
Profibus DP/Modbus gateway VW3 A8 306 Rpp LUF P7 Parameters set using ABC Configurator software (3) (1) Sold in lots of 2. (2) Please consult our catalogue "Premium automation platform". (3) Please consult our catalogue "Soft starters and variable speed drives".
0.240
27
Presentation
The PowerSuite software workshop, for PC or Pocket PC, is designed for setting up Telemecanique starters and variable speed drives. This single program is an easy-to-use interface for configuring Altistart and Tesys model U starters and all Altivar drives in a Microsoft Windows environment in five languages (English, French, German, Italian and Spanish).
531439
Functions
The PowerSuite software workshop can be used for preparing, programming, setting up and maintaining Telemecanique starters and variable speed drives. It can be used: b stand alone to prepare and store starter or drive configuration files b connected to the starter or drive to: v configure v adjust v monitor (except for Altivar 11 drives) v control (except for Altivar 11 drives) v transfer and compare configuration files between PowerSuite and the starter or drive The software workshop has online contextual help. PowerSuite can be used to generate configuration files which can then be: b saved to hard disk, CD-ROM, floppy disk, etc. b printed b exported to office automation software b exchanged between a PC and a Pocket PC using standard synchronization software. PowerSuite PC and Pocket PC configuration files are both the same format. The software associated with the Altivar 31 has been enhanced to include the following new functions: oscilloscope function, parameter name customization, configuration locking using a password, creation of a user menu, etc.
PowerSuite with PC screen Oscilloscope function
Connections
Telemecanique starters and variable speed drives are equipped with a Modbus RS485 terminal port (except for Altivar 68 drives). b The PowerSuite software workshop can be connected directly to the terminal port via the serial port on the PC or Pocket PC. Two types of connection are possible: - connection to a single starter or drive (point-to-point connection) - connection to a set of starters or drives (multidrop connection) b The PowerSuite for PC software workshop can also be connected to an Ethernet network (Please consult our catalogue "Soft starters and variable speed drives). In this case, the starters and drives can be accessed: - using an Ethernet-Modbus bridge 174 CEV 300 20 - using a communication option card VW3 A58310 (for Altivar 38, 58 and 58F drives only)
531440
Hardware and software environment

b The PowerSuite for PC software workshop can operate in the following PC environments and configurations: v Microsoft Windows 95 OSR2-98 SE, Microsoft Windows NT4.X SP5, Microsoft Windows Me, Microsoft Windows 2000, Microsoft Windows XP v Pentium III, 800 MHz, hard disk with 300 MB available, 128 MB RAM v SVGA or higher definition monitor b The PowerSuite for Pocket PC software workshop is compatible with Pocket PCs equipped with a Windows for Pocket PC 2002 operating system and an ARM or XSCALE processor. Performance tests for version V2.0.0 of the PowerSuite software workshop have been carried out on the following Pocket PCs: v Hewlett Packard Jornada series 560 v Compaq IPAQ series 3800 and 3900
PowerSuite with Pocket PC screen
28
PowerSuite software workshop for PC and Pocket PC

Description
563019
Reference VW3 A8101
PowerSuite for PC kit comprising: - 1 PowerSuite CD-ROM - 1 PC connection kit PowerSuite for Pocket PC kit comprising: - 1 PowerSuite CD-ROM - 1 Pocket PC connection kit PowerSuite CD-ROM - Contains the software for PC and Pocket PC in English, French, German, Italian and Spanish along with the technical documentation and the ABC configurator program. PowerSuite upgrade CD-ROM - Contains the software for PC and Pocket PC in English, French, German, Italian and Spanish along with the technical documentation and the ABC configurator program. PC connection kit comprising: - 2 x 3 m connecting cables with 2 x RJ 45 connectors - 1 RJ 45/9-way SUB-D adaptor for connecting ATV 58, ATV 58F and ATV 38 drives - 1 RJ 45/9-way SUB-D adaptor for connecting ATV 68 drives - 1 converter marked RS 232/RS 485 PC with one 9-way female SUB-D connector and 1 RJ 45 connector - 1 converter, for ATV 11 drives, with one 4-way male connector and 1 RJ 45 connector Pocket PC connection kit comprising: - 2 x 0.6 m connecting cables with 2 x RJ 45 connectors - 1 RJ 45/9-way SUB-D adaptor for connecting ATV 58, ATV 58F and ATV 38 drives - 1 converter marked RS 232/RS 485 PPC with one 9-way male SUB-D connector and 1 RJ 45 connector - 1 converter, for ATV 11 drives, with one 4-way male connector and 1 RJ 45 connector Caution: The serial synchronization cable must be ordered separately from the supplier of the Pocket PC.
Weight kg 0.400
VW3 A8102
0.400
VW3 A8104
0.100
VW3 A8101
VW3 A8105
0.100
VW3 A8106
0.350
563020
VW3 A8111
0.300
VW3 A8102
(1) To find out about the latest available version, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Compatibility
Compatibility of the PowerSuite software workshop with the Controller starter starters and variable speed drives TeSys model U Soft start/ soft stop unit ATS 48 Drives
ATV 11
ATV28
ATV 31
ATV 38
ATV 58, ATV 58F u V 1.0
ATV 68
PowerSuite software workshop with serial link for PC

Kit and CD-ROM VW3 A8101, VW3 A8104, VW3 A8105 u V 1.40 u V 1.30 u V 1.40 u V 1.0 u V 2.0.0 u V 1.40 u V 1.50
PowerSuite software workshop with Ethernet link for PC

Kit and CD-ROM VW3 A8101, VW3 A8104, VW3 A8105 u V 1.50 and Ethernet/ Modbus bridge u V 1.30 u V 1.50 and EthernetModbus bridge u V 1.20 u V 2.0.0 and Ethernet/ Modbus bridge u V 2.0.0 u V 1.50 and Ethernet V2 communication card or bridge
PowerSuite software workshop for Pocket PC

Kit and CD-ROM VW3 A8102, VW3 A8104, VW3 A8105 u V 1.50 u V 1.40 u V 1.40 u V 1.20
Incompatible products
Compatible products and software versions
Compatibility of the PowerSuite software workshop with Pocket PCs Pocket PC PowerSuite software version Hewlett Packard Jornada 525, 545, 548 not compatible from V 2.0.0 Hewlett Packard Jornada series 560 u 1.30 u 1.30 Compaq IPAQ series 3800 and 3900
29
Dimensions

Altivar 31
ATV 31H0ppM3X/MXA, ATV 31H0ppM2/M2A

Plate for EMC mounting (supplied with the drive)
2x5 121,5 145
18,5
2xM5 screw ATV 31H 018M3X, 037M3X 055M3X, 075M3X 018M2, 037M2 055M2, 075M2 c 120 130 130 140
8 (1) c
72
50 M5 4xM4
Plate for EMC mounting (supplied with the drive) K 16.5 2x5 16.5 2x5 2xM5 screw 6.5 20.5 4x5
60
(1) Only for drives whose reference ends in A.
ATV 31HUppM2/M2A, ATV 31HU1pM3X/M3XA to ATV 31HU4pM3X/M3XA, ATV 31H0ppN4/N4A to ATV 31HU40N4/N4A, ATV 31H075S6X to ATV 31HU40S6X
ATV 31H a U1pM3X 105 U1pM2, U22M3X 105 037N4 to U15N4 U75S6X, U15S6X U22M2, 140 HUp0M3X U22N4 to U40N4 U22S6X, U40S6X b c d G H J 143 130 49 93 121.5 5 143 150 49 93 121.5 5
d M5 4xM4
Plate for EMC mounting (supplied with the drive) 2xM5 screw
8 (1)
184 150 48 126 157
ATV 31HU55M3X/M3XA, ATV 31HU75M3X/M3XA, ATV 31HU55N4/N4A, ATV 31HU75N4/N4A, ATV 31HU55S6X, ATV 31HU75S6X
4x5
232
170
180 4xM4 M5
ATV 31HD1pM3X/M3XA, ATV 31HD1pN4/N4A, ATV 31HD1pS6X

Plate for EMC mounting (supplied with the drive)
4x6 7
329,5
295
2xM5 screw
75 = 27,5 4xM4 M5
References: pages 14 to 17 Schemes: pages 36 to 39 Functions: pages 44 to 59
8 (1)
160
17
210
8 (1)
190
225 245
(1) Only for drives whose reference ends in A. Presentation: pages 2 to 9 Characteristics: pages 10 to 13
30
75
Dimensions

Altivar 31
Enclosed drive
ATV 31C0ppM2
4x5,5
240
163
218
192 210
ATV 31CU11M2, ATV 31CU15M2, ATV 31C0ppN4, ATV 31CU11N4, ATV 31CU15N4
4x5,5
297
192
277
197 215
ATV 31CU22M2, ATV 31CU22N4, ATV 31CU30N4, ATV 31CU40N4

4x5,5
340
208
318
212 230
31
Dimensions

Altivar 31
Drive kit
ATV 31KpppM2, ATV 31K0ppN4, ATV 31KU22N4, ATV 31KUp0N4

Mounting
a1
E 10
c1 c
F G F G 7x5,5
ATV 31K a a1 b 0ppM2 254 214 280 U1pM2, 0ppN4, U1 pN4 250 219 337 U22M2, UppN4 265 234 380 Note: product supplied with drilling template.
b1 240 297 340
c 153 186 209
c1 123 127 134
E 10 1 1
F 117 115 122.5
G 234 230 245
H 260 317 360
K 130 158.5 180
ATV 31KU55N4, ATV 31KU75N4, ATV 31KD1pN4/pM2

Mounting
a 15 8x8
a2
35
b1
35
19 a1 15 30 G 30
19
ATV 31K a a1 a2 U55N4, U75N4 400 340 334 D11N4, D15N4 450 370 386 Note: product supplied with drilling template.
b 600 700
b1 444 546
c 343 267
E 12 13
F 155 180
G 250 280
H 49 39
J 500 600
K 180 150
K1 0 180
12 x 6 14 x 6
32
K1
b1
Dimensions (continued)

Altivar 31
Plates for mounting on 5 rail

VW3 A11851 VW3 A31852
143,6
37,9
77,5
40
144
105
UL NEMA Type 1 conformity kit

VW3 A31811 to VW3 A31817
(1)
b
(2)
VW3 b A31812 77 A31813 and A31814 107 A31815 138 A31816 179 A31817 244 (1) Drive (2) Kit for VW3 A3181p
Remote terminal
VW3 A31101 Mounting 55,6
24
52 4x3,5
36
79,6
33

Altivar 31
Bare braking resistors

VW3 A58702 and A58704 2-wire output, length 0.5 m VW3 A58703 2-wire output, length 0.5 m
4x5
154
170
30
40 60
36
212
6 = = 62
Protected braking resistors

VW3 A58732 to VW3 A58734 VW3 A58735 to VW3 A58737
c 7,5
=
a = =
8,75 H
H 320 415
332
310
195
2x5
3x5,5
61 = = 85
=
VW3 A58735 A58736, A58737 VW3 A66704 a 163 156 b 340 434
77,5 =
c 61 167
410
540
370
4x13
350 380
384 480
b
34

Altivar 31
Single phase chokes

VZ1 Lppppppp
3-phase chokes
VW3 A66501 to VW3 A66506
H c
G a
8x H c c1 G G1 a
a 100 130 130 155 180 275 b 135 155 155 170 210 210 c 55 85 85 115 125 130 c1 60 90 90 135 165 160 G 40 60 60 75 85 105 G1 60 80.5 80.5 107 122 181 H 42 62 62 90 105 100 6x9 6 x 12 6 x 12 6 x 12 6 x 12 11 x 22
VZ1 L004M010 L007UM50 L018UM20
a 60 60 85
b 100 100 120
c 80 95 105
G 50 50 70
H 44 60 70
4x9 4x9 5 x 11
VW3 A66501 A66502 A66503 A66504 A66505 A66506
Additional EMC input filters:

Mounting of filter underneath the drive Mounting of filter adjacent to drive
b1
G a
a 72 105 140 180 245 b 185 185 225 275 365
VW3 A31401, A31402 A31403, A31404 A31405, A31406 A31407 A31408, A31409
b1
c 50 60 60 60 60
G 60 93 126 160 295
H 121.5 121.5 157 210 225
2 x M4 2 x M4 4 x M4 4 x M4 4 x M5
Output filters
VW3 A58451 to VW3 A58453

VW3 A31451 to VW3 A31452
c
VW3 A58451 A58452 A58453 Presentation: pages 2 to 9 a b 169.5 340 239 c 123
G a
G 150 H 315 444 7 7 VW3 A31451 A31452 A31453 a 33.5 33 30 b 33 21.5 19 c 33 22.5 19 13 9 6 Functions: pages 44 to 59
467.5 139.5 212
4x
35
Schemes, combinations

Altivar 31
ATV 31ppppM3X, ATV 31ppppN4, ATV 31ppppS6X

3-phase power supply
ATV 31ppppM2
Single phase power supply
Q1 2 4 6 S2 1 Q3 2 KM1 A2
Q1 2 4 6 S2 1 Q3 2 KM1 A2
5 1 Q2 2 3 4 5 Q2 6 A1 R1A R1C
1 Q2 2 3 1 3 5 4 5 Q2 6
T1
S1
A1
T1
S1
A1
A1 R1A R1C
KM1 2 4 6
KM1 13 14
KM1 2 4
KM1 13 14
(1) (3) (2)
(1) (3) (2)

R1C R1A R1B R2C R2A L1 L2 LI1 LI2 LI3 LI4 LI5 LI6
+ 24
+ 24
R1C
L1
L2
L3
R1A
R1B
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
R2C
R2A
LI6
CLI
PA/+
PA/+
COM
+ 10
COM
+ 10
CLI
A1
A1
AOC
AOV
PC/-
AI2
AI1
AI3
PB
P0
W1
W1
U1
U1
V1
V1
X-Y mA
Braking resistor Reference potentiometer SZ1 RV1202
X-Y mA
Braking resistor Reference potentiometer SZ1 RV1202
M 3
0 10 V
M 3
0 10 V
(1) Line choke (single phase or 3-phase). (2) Fault relay contacts. For remote signalling of drive status. (3) Shared connection of the logic inputs depends on the position of a switch, see diagrams below. Note: All terminals are located at the bottom of the drive. Fit interference suppressors to all inductive circuits near the drive or connected on the same circuit, such as relays, contactors, solenoid valves, fluorescent lighting, etc. Compatible components (for full references, please consult our specialist catalogue). Code Description Q1 GV2 L or Compact NS (see pages 40 to 43) KM1 LC1 ppp + LA4 DA2U (see pages 40 to 43) S1, S2 XB2 B or XA2 B pushbuttons T1 100 VA transformer 220 V secondary Q2 GV2 L rated at twice the nominal primary current of T1 Q2 GB2 CB05
Examples of recommended circuit diagrams

Logic input switches Source position
0V
Sink position
24 V
CLI position with PLC transistor outputs

COM COM CLI CLI LI1 LI1
AOC output Wired as logic output

ATV 31 control terminals
AOC
+ 24 V
COM
LI1
LI1
24 V 0V PLC 0V PLC 24 V
24 V relay 10 mA
2-wire control
3-wire control
Analog voltage inputs 10 V external

10 V external
Analog current input 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA, X-Y mA

+ 24 V
+ 24 V
AI1
0V
AI3
AI2
0V
LI1: Forward LIx: Reverse
LI1: Stop LI2: Forward LIx: Reverse
+ 10 V
Speed reference potentiometer 2.2 to 10 k
10 V
Source 0-20 mA 4-20 mA X-Y mA
36
0V
LI1
LI1
LI2
LIx
LIx
0V
AOC
AOV
PC/-
AI2
AI1
AI3
PB
P0
Schemes, connections, mounting

0
Altivar 31
Electromagnetic compatibility
Schemes
Additional radio interference suppression input filters VW3 A3140p
3-phase power supply Single phase power supply
L1
L2
L3
L1
L2
L'1
L'2
L'3
L'1
L1
L2
L3
L1
L2
L'2
VW3 A3140
VW3 A3140
ATV 31
ATV 31
Connections to meet the requirements of EMC standards

Principle b Grounds between the drive, motor and cable shielding must have high frequency equipotentiality. b Use shielded cables with the shielding connected to ground throughout 360 at both ends for the motor cable, the braking resistor cable and the control/command cables. Metal ducting or conduit can be used for part of the shielding length provided that there is no break in continuity. b Ensure maximum separation between the power supply cable (line supply) and the motor cable. Installation diagram for ATV 31Hppp drives 1 2 3 4 5
2
6 7 8
9
3 8 9 4 7 6
Steel plate supplied with the drive, to be fitted on it (machine ground) Altivar 31 Non-shielded power supply wires or cable Non-shielded wires for the output of the safety relay contacts. Fix and ground the shielding of cables 6, 7 and 8 as close as possible to the drive: - Strip the shielding. - Use cable clamps of an appropriate size on the parts from which the shielding has been stripped, to attach them to the plate 1. The shielding must be clamped tightly enough to the metal plate to ensure good contact. Cable clamps must be made from stainless steel. Shielded cable for connecting the motor. Shielded cable for connecting the control/command wiring. For applications requiring several conductors, use cables with a small cross-section (0.5 mm2). Shielded cable for connecting the braking resistor. 6, 7, 8, the shielding must be connected to ground at both ends. The shielding must be continuous and intermediate terminals must be in EMC shielded metal cases. Ground screw for the motor cable with low ratings, as the screw on the heatsink is inaccessible.
Note: The HF equipotential ground connection between the drive, motor and cable shielding does not remove the need to connect the PE protective conductors (green-yellow) to the appropriate terminals on each unit. If using an additional input filter, it should be mounted beneath the drive and connected directly to the line supply via an unshielded cable. Link 3 on the drive is then via the filter output cable.
Operation on an IT system
IT system: isolated or impedance earthed neutral. Use a permanent insulation monitor compatible with non-linear loads, e.g. Merlin Gerin type XM200. ATV 31pppM2 and N4 drives feature built-in RFI filters. There are two ways of isolating these filters from ground for operation on an IT system: b ATV 31H018M2 to ATV 31HU22M2 and ATV 31H037N4 to ATV 31HU40N4, pull out a jumper to disconnect the filter. b ATV 31HU55N4 to ATV 31HD15N4, move the cable tag to disconnect the filter.
37
Mounting and installation recommendations

0
Altivar 31
Depending on the conditions in which the drive is to be used, its installation will require certain precautions and the use of appropriate accessories.
Mounting recommendations for ATV 31H drives

Install the unit vertically, at 10. b Do not place it close to heating elements. b Leave sufficient free space to ensure that the air required for cooling purposes can circulate from the bottom to the top of the unit.
50 mm d
50 mm
10 mm
Types of mounting b Type A mounting

50 mm 50 mm
b Type B mounting
b Type C mounting
50 mm
50 mm
Removing the protective cover
Removing the protective cover from the top of the drive (as shown opposite) changes the degree of protection to IP 20. Derating curves for the nominal drive current (In) as a function of the temperature, switching frequency and type of mounting.
I / In 100 % In -5% 90 % - 10 % - 15 % 80 % - 25 % 70 % - 35 % 60 % 50 % - 40 % - 45 % 50C Mounting types A and B - 50 % - 55 % 60C Mounting type C 40 % - 65 % 60C Mounting types A and B 30 % 4 kHz 8 kHz 12 kHz 16 kHz Switching frequency - 30 % - 35 % 50C Mounting type C - 20 % - 25 %
40C Mounting types A and B
- 10 %
For intermediate temperatures (e.g. 55C), interpolate between 2 curves.

Presentation: pages 2 to 9 Characteristics: pages 10 to 13 References: pages 14 to 17 Dimensions: pages 30 to 35 Functions: pages 44 to 59
38
Mounting Variable speed drives and installation for asynchronous motors recommendations (continued) Altivar 31
0
Specific recommendations for mounting ATV 31 drives in a wall-mounted or floor-standing enclosure

Observe the mounting recommendations on the opposite page. To ensure proper air circulation in the drive: b Fit ventilation grilles. b Ensure that there is sufficient ventilation. If there is not, install forced ventilation with a filter. The openings and/or fans must provide a flow rate at least equal to that of the drive fans (see the table below). b Use special filters with IP 54 protection. b Remove the protective cover from the top of the drive. Fan flow rate depending on the drive rating ATV 31 drive Flow rate m3/min
H018M2, H037M2, H055M2, H018M3X, H037M3X, H055M3X, H037N4, H055N4, H075N4, HU11N4, H075S6X, HU15N6X H075M2, HU11M2, HU15M2, H075M3X, HU11M3X, HU15M3X, HU15N4, HU22N4, HU22S6X, HU40N6X HU22M2, HU22M3X, HU30M3X, HU40M3X, HU30N4, HU40N4, HU55S6X, HU75S6X HU55M3X, HU55N4, HU75N4, HD11S6X HU75M3X, HD11M3X, HD11N4, HD15N4, HD15S6X HD15M3X 0.3
0.55
1.55 1.7 2.8 3.6
Dust and damp proof metal wall-mounted or floor-standing enclosure (IP 54 degree of protection) The drive must be mounted in a dust and damp proof enclosure in certain environmental conditions: dust, corrosive gases, high humidity with risk of condensation and dripping water, splashing liquid, etc. This enables the drive to be used in an enclosure where the maximum internal temperature can reach 50C. Calculating the size of the enclosure Maximum thermal resistance Rth (C/W) = maximum temperature inside enclosure in C e e = maximum external temperature in C Rth = -----------------P P = total power dissipated in the enclosure in W Power dissipated by drive: see page 14. Add the power dissipated by the other equipment components. Useful heat dissipation surface of enclosure S (m2) (sides + top + front panel if wall-mounted) k S = --------Rth K = thermal resistance per m2 of enclosure.
For metal enclosures: K = 0.12 with internal fan, K = 0.15 without fan
Note: Do not use insulated enclosures as they have a poor level of conductivity.
100 mm
Mounting recommendations for ATV 31 drives

Install the unit vertically, at 10. Do not place it close to heating elements. Leave sufficient free space to ensure that the air required for cooling purposes can circulate from the bottom to the top of the unit.
100 mm
39
Combinations for self-assembly

Altivar 31
Motor starters
Applications
The combinations suggested below can be used to assemble a complete motor starter comprising a circuit-breaker, a contactor and an Altivar 31 variable speed drive. The circuit-breaker provides protection against accidental short-circuits, isolation, and padlocking if required. The contactor provides control and management of any safety features and isolation of the motor on stopping. The Altivar 31 variable speed drive is electronically protected against short-circuits between phases and between phase and earth; it therefore provides continuity of service and thermal protection of the motor.
Motor starter for drive with heatsink

Variable speed drive Reference Standard power Circuit-breaker (2) rating of 4-pole Reference Rating 50/60 Hz motors (1) kW ATV 31H018M2 ATV 31H037M2 ATV 31H055M2 ATV 31H075M2 ATV 31HU11M2 ATV 31HU15M2 ATV 31HU22M2 ATV 31H018M3X ATV 31H037M3X ATV 31H055M3X ATV 31H075M3X ATV 31HU11M3X ATV 31HU15M3X ATV 31HU22M3X ATV 31HU30M3X ATV 31HU40M3X ATV 31HU55M3X ATV 31HU75M3X ATV 31HD11M3X ATV 31HD15M3X 0.18 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 0.18 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 HP 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 GV2 L08 GV2 L10 GV2 L14 GV2 L14 GV2 L16 GV2 L20 GV2 L22 GV2 L07 GV2 L08 GV2 L10 GV2 L14 GV2 L14 GV2 L16 GV2 L20 GV2 L22 GV2 L22 NS80HMA NS80HMA NS80HMA NS100HMA A 4 6.3 10 10 14 18 25 2.5 4 6.3 10 10 14 18 25 25 50 50 80 100 Max. prosp. line Isc Contactor (3) Add the voltage number to the basic reference to obtain the full reference (4)
521466
kA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 22 22 22 22 LC1 K0610 LC1 K0610 LC1 K0610 LC1 K0610 LC1 K0610 LC1 K0610 LC1 D09 LC1 K0610 LC1 K0610 LC1 K0610 LC1 K0610 LC1 K0610 LC1 K0610 LC1 K0610 LC1 D09 LC1 D09 LC1 D32 LC1 D32 LC1 D40 LC1 D40
Single phase supply voltage: 200240 V

803714
3-phase supply voltage: 200240 V

531250
GV2 L + LC1 K + ATV 31Hpppppp

ATV 31H037N4 0.37 0.5 GV2 L07 2.5 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31H055N4 0.55 0.75 GV2 L08 4 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31H075N4 0.75 1 GV2 L08 4 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31HU11N4 1.1 1.5 GV2 L10 6.3 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31HU15N4 1.5 2 GV2 L14 10 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31HU22N4 2.2 3 GV2 L14 10 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31HU30N4 3 GV2 L16 14 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31HU40N4 4 5 GV2 L16 14 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31HU55N4 5.5 7.5 GV2 L22 25 22 LC1 D09 ATV 31HU75N4 7.5 10 GV2 L32 32 22 LC1 D18 ATV 31HD11N4 11 15 NS80HMA 50 22 LC1 D32 ATV 31HD15N4 15 20 NS80HMA 50 22 LC1 D32 (1) The HP values given are NEC-compliant (National Electrical Code). (2) NS80HMA: product sold under the Merlin Gerin brand. (3) Composition of contactors LC1-K06: 3 poles + 1 "N/O" auxiliary contact LC1-D09/D32/D40: 3 poles + 1 "N/O" auxiliary contact (4) Usual control circuit voltages.
a.c. control circuit

Volts a 24 48 110 220 230 240 50 Hz B5 E5 F5 M5 P5 U5 60 Hz B6 E6 F6 M6 U6 50/60 Hz B7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Volts a 24 48 110 220/230 230 230/240 LC1-K 50/60 Hz B7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 For other voltages between 24 and 660 V, or d.c. control circuit, please consult your Regional Sales Office. LC1-D
40

Altivar 31
Motor starters
Applications
Motor starter for drive with heatsink

Variable speed drive Reference Standard power Circuit-breaker (2) rating of 4-pole Reference Rating 50/60 Hz motors (1) kW HP A Max. prosp. line Isc Contactor (3) Add the voltage number to the basic reference to obtain the full reference (4)
521466
kA

ATV 31H075S6X 0.75 1 GV2 L08 4 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31HU15S6X 1.5 2 GV2 L10 6.3 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31HU22S6X 2.2 3 GV2 L14 10 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31HU40S6X 4 5 GV2 L16 14 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31HU55S6X 5.5 7.5 GV2 L20 18 22 LC1 K0610 ATV 31HU75S6X 7.5 10 GV2 L22 25 22 LC1 K0610 ATV 31HD11S6X 11 15 GV2 L32 32 22 LC1 D09 ATV 31HD15S6X 15 20 NS80HMA 32 22 LC1 D09 (1) The HP values given are NEC-compliant (National Electrical Code). (2) NS80HMA: product sold under the Merlin Gerin brand. (3) Composition of contactors LC1-K06: 3 poles + 1 "N/O" auxiliary contact LC1-D09/D32/D40: 3 poles + 1 "N/O" auxiliary contact (4) Usual control circuit voltages.
803714 531250

GV2 L + LC1 K + ATV 31Hpppppp Volts a 24 48 110 220 230 240 50 Hz B5 E5 F5 M5 P5 U5 60 Hz B6 E6 F6 M6 U6 50/60 Hz B7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Volts a 24 48 110 220/230 230 230/240 LC1-K 50/60 Hz B7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 For other voltages between 24 and 660 V, or d.c. control circuit, please consult your Regional Sales Office. LC1-D
41

Altivar 31
Motor starters
Applications
Motor starter for customisable enclosed drive

Variable speed drive Reference Standard power Circuit-breaker rating of 4-pole Reference Rating 50/60 Hz motors (1) kW ATV 31C018M2 ATV 31C037M2 ATV 31C055M2 ATV 31C075M2 ATV 31CU11M2 ATV 31CU15M2 ATV 31CU22M2 0.18 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 HP 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 GV2 L08 GV2 L10 GV2 L14 GV2 L14 GV2 L16 GV2 L20 GV2 L22 A 4 6.3 10 10 14 18 25 Max. prosp. line Isc Contactor Add the voltage number to the basic reference to obtain the full reference (2)
521466
kA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LC1 K0610 LC1 K0610 LC1 K0610 LC1 K0610 LC1 K0610 LC1 K0610 LC1 D09

803714

ATV 31C037N4 0.37 0.5 GV2 L07 2.5 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31C055N4 0.55 0.75 GV2 L08 4 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31C075N4 0.75 1 GV2 L08 4 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31CU11N4 1.1 1.5 GV2 L10 6.3 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31CU15N4 1.5 2 GV2 L14 10 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31CU22N4 2.2 3 GV2 L14 10 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31CU30N4 3 3 GV2 L16 14 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31CU40N4 4 5 GV2 L16 14 5 LC1 K0610 (1) The HP values given are NEC-compliant (National Electrical Code). (2) Usual control circuit voltages. GV2 L + LC1 K + ATV 31Cppppp
531252

42

Altivar 31
Motor starters
Applications
Motor starter for drive kit

Variable speed drive Reference Standard power Circuit-breaker rating of 4-pole Reference Rating 50/60 Hz motors (1) kW ATV 31K018M2 ATV 31K037M2 ATV 31K055M2 ATV 31K075M2 ATV 31KU11M2 ATV 31KU15M2 ATV 31KU22M2 0.18 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 HP 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 GV2 L08 GV2 L10 GV2 L14 GV2 L14 GV2 L14 GV2 L20 GV2 L22 A 4 6.3 10 10 14 18 25 Max. prosp. line Isc Contactor Add the voltage number to the basic reference to obtain the full reference (2)
kA 5 5 5 5 22 22 22 LC1 K0610 LC1 K0610 LC1 K0610 LC1 K0610 LC1 K0610 LC1 K0610 LC1 D09

ATV 31K037N4 0.37 0.5 GV2 L07 2.5 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31K055N4 0.55 0.75 GV2 L08 4 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31K075N4 0.75 1 GV2 L08 4 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31KU11N4 1.1 1.5 GV2 L10 6.3 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31KU15N4 1.5 2 GV2 L14 10 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31KU22N4 2.2 3 GV2 L14 10 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31KU30N4 3 3 GV2 L16 14 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31KU40N4 4 5 GV2 L16 14 5 LC1 K0610 ATV 31KU55N4 5.5 7.5 GV2 L22 25 22 LC1 D09 ATV 31KU75N4 7.5 10 GV2 L32 32 22 LC1 D18 ATV 31KD11N4 11 15 NS80 HMA 50 22 LC1 D32 ATV 31KD15N4 15 20 NS80 HMA 50 22 LC1 D32 (1) The HP values given are NEC-compliant (National Electrical Code). (2) Usual control circuit voltages.

43
Functions

Altivar 31
Summary of functions
563712
PowerSuite for PC welcome screen
PowerSuite for Pocket PC identification screen
Drive factory setting Functions of the display and keys Remote display terminal option Menu access levels Menu access code Operating speed range Acceleration and deceleration ramp times Acceleration and deceleration ramp profile Ramp switching Automatic adaptation of deceleration ramp Voltage/frequency ratio Auto-tuning Switching frequency, noise reduction Skip frequencies Speed reference Analog inputs Preset speeds +/- speed Save reference Step by step (JOG) Control and reference channels Reference switching Summing inputs PI regulator Spooling Current limit switching Limiting low speed operating time Motor switching Control mode switching 2-wire control 3-wire control Forced local mode Freewheel stop Fast stop DC injection stop Brake control Management of limit switch Monitoring Fault management Fault reset General reset (resets all faults) Controlled stop on loss of line supply Stop mode in the event of a fault Automatic catching a spinning load with speed detection Automatic restart Derated operation in the event of an overvoltage Fault relay, unlocking Operating time reset to zero Motor thermal protection Drive thermal protection R1, R2 relay configuration AOC/AOV analog outputs Saving and retrieving the configuration Function compatibility table
page 45 page 45 page 46 page 46 page 46 page 46 page 46 page 47 page 47 page 48 page 48 page 48 page 48 page 49 page 49 page 49 page 49 page 50 page 50 page 51 page 51 page 51 page 51 page 52 page 52 page 53 page 53 page 53 page 53 page 54 page 54 page 54 page 54 page 54 page 54 page 55 page 55 page 55 page 56 page 56 page 56 page 56 page 56 page 57 page 57 page 57 page 57 page 57 page 58 page 58 page 58 page 59 page 59 page 59
563713
44
Functions (continued)

Altivar 31
Drive factory setting

The drive is supplied ready for use in most applications, with the following functions and settings: b Nominal motor frequency: 50 Hz b Motor voltage: 230 V (ATV 31HpppM2 and M3X), 400 V (ATV 31HpppN4) or 600 V (ATV 31HpppS6X) b Linear ramp times: 3 seconds b Low speed (LSP): 0 Hz, high speed (HSP): 50 Hz b Normal stop mode on deceleration ramp b Stop mode in the event of a fault: Freewheel b Motor thermal current = nominal drive current b Standstill injection braking current = 0.7 x nominal drive current, for 0.5 seconds b Constant torque operation, with sensorless flux vector control b Logic inputs: v 2 directions of operation (LI1, LI2), 2-wire control v 4 preset speeds (LI3, LI4): LSP (low speed), 10 Hz, 15 Hz, 20 Hz b Analog inputs: v AI1 speed reference (0 +10 V) v AI2 (0 10 V) summing of AI1 v AI3 (4-20 mA) not configured b Relay R1: fault relay b Relay R2: not assigned b Analog output AOC: 0-20 mA, image of the motor frequency b Automatic adaptation of the deceleration ramp in the event of excessive braking b Switching frequency 4 kHz, random frequency
Functions of the display and keys
4 2 3
6 7 8
1 Information is displayed in the form of codes or values in four "7-segment" displays 2 Buttons for scrolling through the menus or modifying values 3 ENT: Validation button for entering a menu or confirming the new value selected 4 ESC: Button for exiting the menus (no confirmation) 5 2 diagnostic LEDs for the CANopen bus b 6 7 8 For ATV 31HppppM2A, ATV 31HpppM3XA and ATV 31HpppN4A drives only: Speed reference potentiometer RUN: Local control of motor operation STOP/RESET: Controls motor stopping locally and resets any faults
45

Altivar 31
ESC ENT
stop reset FWO REV
RUN
b Remote display terminal option The remote display terminal can be mounted on the door of a wall-fixing or floorstanding enclosure. It comprises an LCD display with programming and control keys and a switch for locking access to the menus. Drive control keys v FWD/RV: reversal of the direction of rotation v RUN: motor run command v STOP/RESET: motor stop command or fault reset The speed reference is given by the remote display terminal. Only the freewheel, fast stop and DC injection stop commands remain active on the terminal block. If the drive/operator terminal link is broken, the drive locks in fault mode. Its subsequent action depends on the control and reference channel programming.
Note: Protection via customer confidential code has priority over the switch.
563220
Remote display terminal
b Menu access levels There are 3 access levels: Level 1: Access to standard functions. Significantly, this level is interchangeable with the Altivar 28. Level 2: Access to advanced application functions. Level 3: Access to advanced application functions and management of mixed control modes. b Menu access code Enables the drive configuration to be protected using an access code. When access is locked using a code, only the adjustment and monitoring parameters can be accessed. b Operating speed range Used to determine the 2 frequency limits which define the speed range permitted by the machine under actual operating conditions for all applications with or without overspeed.
f (Hz) HSP
LSP 0V x mA 4 mA Reference 10 V y mA 20 mA
LSP: low speed, from 0 to HSP, factory setting 0 HSP: high speed, from LSP to f max., factory setting 50 Hz x: configurable between 0 and 20 mA, factory setting 4 mA y: configurable between 4 and 20 mA, factory setting 20 mA
b Acceleration and deceleration ramp times Used to define acceleration and deceleration ramp times according to the application and the machine dynamics.
f (Hz) 50 f (Hz) 50
563714
0 t1
0 t2
Ramp adjustment with PowerSuite for PC
Linear acceleration ramp Linear deceleration ramp t1: acceleration time t2: deceleration time t1 and t2 can be set independently between 0.1 and 999.9 s, factory setting: 3 s
46

Altivar 31
b Acceleration and deceleration ramp profile Used to gradually increase the output frequency starting from a speed reference, following a linear ratio or a preset ratio. - For applications such as material handling, packaging, transportation of people: the use of S ramps takes up mechanical play and eliminates jolts, and limits nonfollowing of speed during rapid transient operation of high inertia machines. - For pumping applications (installation with centrifugal pump and non-return valve): valve closing can be controlled more accurately if U ramps are used. - Selecting linear, S, U or customized profiles will affect both the acceleration and deceleration ramps.
S ramps
f (Hz) HSP f (Hz) HSP
U ramps
Customized ramps
0 t2 t1 HSP: high speed t1: ramp time set t2 = 0.6 x t1 The curve coefficient is fixed.
0 t2 t1
0 t2 t1
t 0 t2 t1
0 tA1 tA2 ACC or AC2
t 0 tA3 tA4 dEC or dE2
HSP: high speed t1: ramp time set t2 = 0.5 x t1 The curve coefficient is fixed.
HSP: high speed tA1: can be set between 0 and 100% (of ACC or AC2) tA2: can be set between 0 and (100% - tA1) (of ACC or AC2) tA3: can be set between 0 and 100% (of dEC or dE2) tA4: can be set between 0 and (100% - tA3) (of dEC or dE2) ACC: acceleration ramp 1 time AC2: acceleration ramp 2 time dEC: deceleration ramp 1 time dE2: deceleration ramp 2 time
b Ramp switching Used to switch 2 acceleration or deceleration ramp times, which can be adjusted separately. Ramp switching can be enabled by: v a logic input v a frequency threshold v a combination of logic input and frequency threshold Function suitable for: - material handling with smooth starting and approach - machines with fast steady state speed correction
f(Hz) HSP dE2 AC2
ACC Forward 1 or Reverse 0
dEC
1 LI4 0
Acceleration 1 (ACC) and deceleration 1 (dEC): - adjustment 0.1 to 999.9 s - factory setting 3 s Acceleration 2 (AC2) and deceleration 2 (dE2): - adjustment 0.1 to 999.9 s - factory setting 5 s HSP: high speed
Example of switching using logic input LI4
47

Altivar 31
b Automatic adaptation of deceleration ramp Used to automatically adapt the deceleration ramp if the initial setting is too low when the load inertia is taken into account. This function avoids the drive locking in the event of an excessive braking fault. Function suitable for all applications not requiring precise stopping and not using braking resistors. Automatic adaptation must be cancelled if the machine has position control with stopping on a ramp and a braking resistor installed. This function is automatically disabled if the brake sequence is configured. b Voltage/frequency ratio v Motor and power supply characteristics Used to determine the limit values for the voltage/frequency ratio according to the line supply, the motor and the application. The following values should be set for variable or constant torque applications with or without overspeed: - the base frequency corresponding to the supply - the nominal motor frequency (in Hz) given on the motor rating plate - the nominal motor voltage (in V) given on the motor rating plate - the maximum output frequency of the drive (in Hz) v Type of voltage/frequency ratio Used to adapt the voltage/frequency ratio to the application in order to optimize performance for the following applications: v Constant torque applications (machines with average loads operating at low speed) with motors connected in parallel or special motors (e.g.: resistive cage motor): ratio L v Variable torque applications (pumps, fans): ratio P v Machines with heavy loads operating at low speed, machines with fast cycles, with (sensorless) flux vector control: ratio n v Energy saving, for machines with slow speed and torque variations: ratio nLd Voltage is automatically reduced to a minimum according to the necessary torque
U (V) Un
563715
Adjustment of the voltage/frequency ratio with PowerSuite for PC
L n P
f (Hz) frn Un: Nominal motor voltage frn: Nominal motor frequency
b Auto-tuning Auto-tuning may be performed: v voluntarily by the operator using dialogue tools via local control mode or the serial link v each time the drive is switched on v on each run command v by enabling a logic input Auto-tuning is used to optimize application performance. b Switching frequency, noise reduction The switching frequency can be adjusted to reduce the noise generated by the motor. The switching frequency is modulated randomly in order to avoid resonance. This function can be disabled if it causes instability. High frequency switching of the intermediate DC voltage can be used to supply the motor with a current wave that has a lower harmonic distortion. The switching frequency can be adjusted during operation to reduce the noise generated by the motor. Value: 2 to 16 kHz, with a factory setting of 4 kHz. For all applications which require low motor noise.
48

Altivar 31
b Skip frequencies Used to suppress one or two critical speeds which may be the cause of mechanical resonance. It is possible to prohibit the prolonged operation of the motor on 1 or 2 frequency bands (with a bandwidth of 1 Hz), which can be set within the operating range. Function suitable for lightweight machines, bulk product conveyors with unbalanced motor, fans and centrifugal pumps.
f (Hz)
563716
2 Hz
Reference Motor speed change depending on the skip frequency reference
Adjustment of the skip frequency with PowerSuite for Pocket PC
b Speed reference The speed reference can have different sources depending on the drive configuration: v references provided by 3 analog inputs v the potentiometer reference (for ATV 31pppA drives only) v the +/- speed function via logic input, using the keypad or remote terminal keys v the remote display terminal reference v speed references provided by the communication bus or networks These different sources are managed by programming the reference functions and channels. b Analog inputs There are 3 analog inputs: v 2 voltage inputs: - 0-10 V (AI1) - 10 V (AI2) v 1 current input: - X-Y mA (AI3) where X is configurable between 0 and 20 mA, and Y is configurable between 4 and 20 mA. b Preset speeds Used to switch preset speed references. 2, 4, 8 or 16 preset speeds can be selected. Enabled by means of 1, 2, 3 or 4 logic inputs. The preset speeds can be adjusted in increments of 0.1 Hz from 0 Hz to 500 Hz. Function suitable for material handling and machines with several operating speeds.
f (Hz)
563717
20 15 10
LSP
The speed obtained with inputs LI3 and LI4 at state 0 is LSP or the speed reference, depending on the level of analog inputs AI1, AI2 and AI3. Factory settings: t
Adjustment of preset speeds with PowerSuite for PC
Forward 1 or Reverse LI2 0 t
1st speed: LSP (low speed or speed reference) 2nd speed: 10 Hz 3rd speed: 15 Hz
1 LI3 0
4th speed: 20 Hz (high speed) t
1 LI4 0
Example of operation with 4 preset speeds and 2 logic inputs t
49

Altivar 31
b +/- speed Used to increase or decrease a speed reference by means of 1 or 2 logic inputs, with or without the last reference being saved (motorised potentiometer function). This function is suitable for centralised control of a machine with several sections operating in one direction or for control by a pendant control station of a handling crane with two operating directions. Two types of operation are available: v Use of single action buttons: Two logic inputs are required in addition to the operating direction(s). The input assigned to the "+ speed" command increases the speed, the input assigned to the "- speed" command decreases the speed.
f (Hz)
563718
Adjustment of the +/- speed function with PowerSuite for PC
HSP
LSP Forward 1 or Reverse 0

1
+ speed 0
1
- speed 0 Example of "+/- speed" with 2 logic inputs, single action buttons and reference saving
v Use of double action buttons (only one logic input assigned to + speed is necessary): Logic inputs:
Forward Reverse + speed
a and b: 1st press c and d: 2nd press f (Hz) HSP LSP LSP HSP Forward operation 2nd press 1st press
Forward button Reverse button
Released 1st press (- speed) (speed maintained) a c
2nd press (+ speed) a and b c and d
0
t
0
Reverse operation 2nd press 1st press
b b a a a a
0
LSP: low speed, HSP: high speed Example with double action buttons and 1 logic input
d c
Note: This type of +/- speed control is incompatible with 3-wire control
b Save reference This function is associated with +/- speed control. Enables the reading and saving of the last speed reference prior to the loss of the run signal or mains supply. The saved reference is applied at the next run signal.
50

Altivar 31
f (Hz)
t tm Forward 1 or Reverse 0
b Step by step (JOG) Used for pulse operation with minimum ramp times (0.1 s), limited speed reference and minimum time between 2 pulses. Enabled by a logic input and pulses given by the operating direction command. This function is suitable for machines with product insertion in manual mode (example: gradual movement of the mechanism during maintenance operations). b Control and reference channels There are several control and reference channels which can be independent. Commands (forward, reverse, etc.) and speed references can be sent using the following methods: v terminals (logic and analog inputs) v keypad for ATV 31pppA only (RUN/STOP and potentiometer) v ATV 31 keypad v via the serial link - remote display terminal - Modbus control word - CANopen control word The control and speed reference channels can be separate. Example: speed reference issued by CANopen and commands issued by the remote display terminal.
Note: The STOP keys on the keypad and the remote display terminal may retain priority. The summing inputs and PI regulator functions only apply to one reference channel.
1
JOG
t tm: fixed time of 0.5 s, minimum time between 2 pulses
Speed reference: can be adjusted from 0 to 10 Hz factory setting 10 Hz
Example of jog operation
f (Hz) AI1
AI2
t Forward or 1 Reverse 0
b Reference switching Switching between 2 speed references can be enabled via: v a logic input v a bit in a Modbus or CANopen control word Reference 1 is active if the logic input (or control word bit) is at 0, reference 2 is active if the logic input (or control word bit) is at 1. The reference can be switched with the motor running.
COM
+10
AI1
AI2
1 LIx 0
t
10 V
+ 24 V 0
Connection diagram for reference switching
X-Y (X is adjustable from 0 to 20 mA and Y is adjustable from 4 to 20 mA)
Example of reference switching
b Summing inputs Used to add up 2 or 3 speed references from different sources. The references to be added together are selected from all the possible types of speed reference. Example: Reference 1 sent by AI1 Reference 2 sent by AI2 Reference 3 sent by AIP Drive speed reference: reference 1 + reference 2 + reference 3.
AI3
LIx
51

Altivar 31
Ramp PI Feedback
PIC X1
PI inversion
b PI regulator Used for simple control of a flow rate or a pressure with a sensor which supplies a feedback signal adapted to the drive. This function is suitable for pumping and ventilation applications. v PI reference: - internal regulator reference, adjustable from 0 to 100 - regulation reference selected from all the possible types of regulation reference - preset PI references v 2 or 4 preset PI references, adjustable from 0 to 100, require the use of 1 or 2 logic inputs respectively v Manual reference - speed reference selected from all the possible types of speed reference v PI feedback: - analog input AI1, AI2 or AI3 v Auto/Man: - logic input LI for switching operation to speed reference (Man) or PI regulation (Auto). During operation in automatic mode it is possible to adapt the process feedback, to correct inverse PI, to adjust the proportional and integral gain and to apply a ramp (time = ACC - DEC) for establishing the PI action on starting and stopping. The motor speed is limited to between LSP and HSP.
Note: The PI function is incompatible with the preset speeds and step by step (JOG) functions. The PI reference can also be transmitted on line via the Modbus RS 485 serial link or via the CANopen bus.
FBS
Multiplier
RPG RIG
PI regulator
Ramp if PSP = 0 Ramp
Auto Manual reference Auto/man Man
HSP LSP
ACC DEC
Reference
ACC: Acceleration DEC: Deceleration FBS: PI feedback multiplication coefficient HSP: High speed PIC: Reversal of the direction of correction of the PI regulator LSP: Low speed RIG: PI regulator integral gain RPG: PI regulator proportional gain PI regulator
b Spooling (Function only available with ATV 31ppppT drives) Function for winding reels of thread (in textile applications)
Spooling drive Winding drive
Reel of thread Gearbox Motor Thread Thread guide Gearbox Motor Cam Main shaft
The cam speed of rotation must follow a precise profile to ensure steady winding.
RUN command
LI or bit Wiring check trC
t Ramp ACC Ramp 0.1 s Ramp dEC
Base reference + trH Base reference + trH - qSH Base reference Base reference - trL + qsL Base reference - trL Ramp 0.1 s Start of function End of function
qSH qSL trL

t
Motor speed
When the function is configured, the ramp type is forced to linear ramp.
52
trH

Altivar 31
b Current limit switching A 2nd current limit can be configured between 0.25 and 1.5 times the nominal drive current. Used to limit the torque and the temperature rise of the motor. Switching between 2 current limits can be enabled via: v a logic input v a bit in a Modbus or CANopen control word b Limiting low speed operating time The motor is stopped automatically after an operating period at low speed (LSP) with zero reference and run command present. This time can be set between 0.1 and 999.9 seconds (0 corresponds to an unlimited time). Factory setting 0 s. The motor restarts automatically on the ramp when the reference reappears or if the run command is broken and then re-established. This function is suitable for automatic stopping/starting on pressure-regulated pumps. b Motor switching Allows two motors with different powers to be supplied successively by the same drive. Switching must take place with the drive stopped and locked, using an appropriate sequence at the drive output. The function can be used to adapt the motor parameters. The following parameters are switched automatically: v nominal motor voltage v nominal motor frequency v nominal motor current v nominal motor speed v motor cosine Phi v selection of the type of voltage/frequency ratio for motor 2 v IR compensation, motor 2 v motor frequency loop gain v motor stability v motor slip compensation Motor thermal protection is disabled by this function. Motor switching can be enabled by: v a logic input v a bit in a Modbus or CANopen control word With hoisting applications, this function enables a single drive to be used for vertical and horizontal movements. b Control mode switching Control channel switching provides a choice of 2 operating modes. Switching can be enabled by: v a logic input v a bit in a Modbus or CANopen control word
563719
Configuration of current switching with PowerSuite for PC
53

Altivar 31
b 2-wire control Used to control the direction of operation by means of a maintained contact. Enabled by means of 1 or 2 logic inputs (one or two directions). This function is suitable for all non-reversing and reversing applications. 3 operating modes are possible: v detection of the state of the logic inputs v detection of a change in state of the logic inputs v detection of the state of the logic inputs with forward operation always having priority over reverse
Altivar 31 control terminals LI1: Forward LIx: Reverse
24 V
LI1
LIx
f (Hz)
Wiring diagram for 2-wire control t
0
Stop 1
0 1
Forward
b 3-wire control Used to control the operating direction and stopping by means of pulsed contacts. Enabled by means of 2 or 3 logic inputs (non-reversing or reversing). This function is suitable for all non-reversing and reversing applications.
Altivar 31 control terminals LI1 LI2 24 V LI1: Stop LI2: Forward LIx: Reverse
0 1
Reverse 0
LIx
t Wiring diagram for 3-wire control
Example of operation with 3-wire control
b Forced local mode Forced local mode imposes control via the terminals or operator terminal and prohibits all other control modes. The following references and commands are available for forced local mode: v references AI1, or AI2, or AI3 and control via logic inputs v reference and control via RUN/STOP keys and potentiometer (ATV 31pppA drives only) v reference and control via the remote display terminal The changeover to forced local mode is enabled by a logic input. b Freewheel stop Stops the motor by resistive torque only if the motor power supply is cut. A freewheel stop is achieved: v by configuring a normal stop command as a freewheel stop (on disappearance of a run command or appearance of a stop command) v by enabling a logic input b Fast stop Used to achieve a braked stop with an acceptable deceleration ramp time (divided by 2 to 10) for the drive/motor unit to avoid locking on an excessive braking fault. Used for conveyors with emergency stop electrical braking. A fast stop is achieved: v by configuring a normal stop as a fast stop (on disappearance of a run command or appearance of a stop command) v by enabling a logic input
Configuration of stop types with PowerSuite for Pocket PC
563720
b DC injection stop Used to brake (at low speed) high inertia fans, or to maintain torque on stopping in the case of fans located in an airflow. A DC injection stop is achieved: v by configuring a normal stop as a DC injection stop (on disappearance of a run command or appearance of a stop command) v by enabling a logic input The DC value and the standstill braking time are adjustable.
54

Altivar 31
Speed reference
0 Relay or logic output 1 0 Motor current

T Brake release current t1
0
t2
Speed reference Brake engage frequency
0 LI forward or reverse 1 0
State of brake Engaged Released
t Engaged
Accessible settings: t1: Brake release time delay t2: Brake engage time delay
Brake control
b Brake control Used to manage control of an electromagnetic brake in synchronization with the starting and stopping of the motor to avoid jolts and load veering. The brake control sequence is managed by the drive. Values that can be adjusted for releasing the brake: current threshold and time delay Values that can be adjusted for engaging the brake: frequency threshold and time delay Enabled: by relay logic output R2 or logic output AOC assigned to brake control. Function suitable for material handling applications with movements equipped with electromagnetic brakes (hoisting) and machines requiring a parking brake (unbalanced machines). v Principle: - Vertical lifting movement: Maintain motor torque in an upward direction when the brake is being released and engaged, in order to hold the load, and start smoothly as soon as the brake is released. - Horizontal lifting movement: Synchronizes brake release with the build-up torque on starting and brake engage at zero speed on stopping, in order to prevent jerking. Recommended settings for brake control for a vertical lifting application (for a horizontal lifting application set the current threshold to zero): - Brake release current: Adjust the brake release current to the nominal current indicated on the motor. If, during testing, the torque is insufficient, increase the brake release current (the maximum value is imposed by the drive). - Acceleration time: For lifting applications it is advisable to set the acceleration ramps to more than 0.5 seconds. Ensure that the drive does not change to current limiting. The same recommendation applies for deceleration. Note: For a lifting movement, a braking resistor should be used. Ensure that the settings and configurations selected cannot cause a drop or a loss of control of the lifted load. - Brake release time delay t1: Adjust according to the type of brake. It is the time required for the mechanical brake to release. - Brake engage frequency: Set to twice the nominal slip then adjust according to the result. - Brake engage time delay t2: Adjust according to the type of brake. It is the time required for the mechanical brake to engage. b Management of limit switch Used to manage the operation of one or two limit switches (with 1 or 2 operating directions). Each limit (forward, reverse) is associated with a logic input. The type of stop that occurs on detection of a limit can be configured as normal, freewheel or fast. Following a stop, the motor is permitted to restart in the opposite direction only. b Monitoring The following data can be displayed: v frequency reference v internal PI reference v frequency reference (absolute value) v output frequency applied to the motor (value signed in twos complement) v output value in customer units v current in the motor v motor power: 100% = nominal power v line voltage v motor thermal state: 100%: nominal thermal state, 118%: motor overload threshold v drive thermal state: 100%: nominal thermal state, 118%: drive overload threshold v motor torque: 100% = nominal torque v last fault v operating time v auto-tuning status v configuration and state of logic inputs v configuration of analog inputs
563721
Monitoring the different parameters with PowerSuite for PC

563722
Monitoring the different parameters with the oscilloscope function in PowerSuite for PC
55

Altivar 31
Fault management with PowerSuite for PC
b Fault management There are different modes of operation on a resettable fault: v Freewheel stop v The drive switches to the fallback speed v The drive maintains the speed at which it was operating when the fault occurred until the fault disappears v Stop on ramp v Fast stop The detected resettable faults are as follows: v drive overheating v motor overheating v CANopen bus fault v Modbus serial link failure v external faults v loss of 4-20 mA signal b Fault reset Used to clear the last fault by means of a logic input. The restart conditions after a reset to zero are the same as those of a normal power-up. Resets the following faults: overvoltage, overspeed, external fault, drive overheating, motor phase loss, DC bus overvoltage, loss of 4-20 mA reference, load veering, motor overload if the thermal state is less than 100%, serial link fault. "Line supply undervoltage" and "line supply phase loss" faults are reset automatically when the line supply is restored. Function suitable for applications where the drives are difficult to access, for example on moving parts in material handling systems. b General reset (resets all faults) This function can be used to inhibit all faults, including thermal protection (forced operation) and may cause irreparable damage to the drive. Function suitable for applications where a restart can be vital (conveyor in a furnace, smoke extraction station, machine with hardening products which need to be removed). The function is enabled by a logic input. Fault monitoring is active if the logic input is at state 1. All faults are reset on a change of state of the logic input. b Controlled stop on loss of line supply Used to control motor stopping on a loss of line supply. Function suitable for material handling, machines with high inertia, continuous product processing machines. Type of stop possible: v locking of the drive and freewheel stop v stop which uses the mechanical inertia to maintain the drive power supply as long as possible v stop on ramp v fast stop (depends on the inertia and the braking ability of the drive) b Stop mode in the event of a fault The type of stop that occurs on detection of a fault can be configured as normal, freewheel or fast for the following faults: v external fault (detection enabled by a logic input or a bit in a Modbus or CANopen control word) v motor phase loss fault If a downstream contactor is being used between the drive and the motor, the motor phase loss fault should be inhibited.
563723
56

Altivar 31
b Automatic catching a spinning load with speed detection (catch on the fly) Used to restart the motor smoothly after one of the following events, provided the run command is still present: v loss of line supply or simple switch off v fault reset or automatic restart v freewheel stop On disappearance of the event, the effective speed of the motor is detected in order to restart on a ramp at this speed and return to the reference speed. The speed detection time can be up to 1 s depending on the initial deviation. This function is automatically disabled if the brake sequence is configured. This function is suitable for machines where the speed loss is negligible during the time over which the mains supply is lost (machines with high inertia), fans and pumps driven by residual flow, etc. b Automatic restart Enables the drive to be restarted automatically after locking following a fault if this fault has disappeared and if the other operating conditions permit a restart. This restart is performed by a series of automatic attempts separated by increasingly longer wait periods of 1 s, 5 s, 10 s then 1 minute for the rest. The whole restart procedure can last anywhere from 5 minutes to an unlimited time. If the drive has not restarted after the configured time, it will lock and the procedure is abandoned until it has been switched off and on again. The faults permitting this restart are: v line supply overvoltage v motor thermal overload v drive thermal overload v DC bus overvoltage v failure of a line supply phase v external fault v loss of 4-20 mA reference v CANopen bus fault v Modbus serial link fault v line supply voltage too low. For this fault, the function is always active, even if it is not configured. For these types of fault, the relay configured as a fault relay remains activated if the function is configured. The speed reference and the direction of operation must be maintained for this function. This function is suitable for machines or installations in continuous operation or without monitoring, and where a restart will not endanger equipment or personnel in any way. b Derated operation in the event of an overvoltage The line voltage monitoring threshold is lowered to 50% of the motor voltage. In this case, a line choke must be used and the performance of the drive cannot be guaranteed. b Fault relay, unlocking The fault relay is energised when the drive is powered up and is not faulty. It contains a C/O common point contact. The drive can be unlocked after a fault in one of the following ways: v by powering down until the ON LED extinguishes, then switching the power back on v by assigning a logic input to the reset faults function v by the automatic restart function, if it has been configured b Operating time reset to zero The drive operating time can be reset to zero.
563724
Configuration of the fault relay with PowerSuite for Pocket PC
57

Altivar 31
b Motor thermal protection Indirect motor thermal protection is implemented via continuous calculation of its theoretical temperature rise. Thermal protection can be adjusted from 0.2 to 1.5 times the nominal drive current. This function is suitable for applications with self-cooled motors.
10 000 2 h 45)
t
13 5
10
20
50
Hz
Trip time in seconds
1 000 16 mn)
100 0,7 0,8 0,9 1 1,1 1,2 1,3 1,4 1,5 1,6 Motor current/ItH
Motor thermal protection curves
b Drive thermal protection Thermal protection, by a PTC probe fitted on the heatsink or integrated in the power module, ensures that the drive is protected in the event of poor ventilation or excessive ambient temperatures. Locks the drive in the event of a fault.
t
5000
3000
Trip time in seconds
1000 200 160
100 60
2 0
1,1
1,2
1,3
1,4
1,5
1,6
1,7
1,8
1,9 Motor current/Drive In
b R1/R2 relay configuration The following states are signalled when the relay is powered on: v drive fault v drive running v frequency threshold reached v high speed reached v current threshold reached v frequency reference reached v motor thermal threshold reached v brake sequence (R2 only)
58

Altivar 31
Configuration of AOC/AOV outputs with PowerSuite for PC
b AOC/AOV analog output The same data is available on analog outputs AOC and AOV. The following assignments are possible: v motor current v motor frequency v motor torque v power supplied by the drive v drive fault v frequency threshold reached v high speed reached v current threshold reached v frequency reference reached v motor thermal threshold reached v brake sequence The adjustment of analog output AOC/AOV is used to modify the characteristics of the current analog output AOC or the voltage analog output AOV. AOC: can be set as 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA AOV: can be set at 0-10 V b Saving and retrieving the configuration A configuration can be saved to the EEPROM. This function is used to store a configuration in addition to the current configuration. Retrieving this configuration clears the current configuration.
563725
Function compatibility table

b Configurable I/O Functions which are not listed in this table are fully compatible. Stop functions have priority over run commands. The selection of functions is limited: - by the number of drive I/O - by the incompatibility of certain functions with one another Functions
Summing inputs
Summing inputs +/- speed ManagePreset ment of speeds limit switch PI regulator Jog operation Brake sequence DC injection stop Fast stop Freewheel stop
+/- speed
Management of limit switch
Preset speeds
PI regulator
Jog operation
Brake sequence
DC injection stop
A A X
Priority functions (functions which cannot be active at the same time) The arrow indicates which function has priority X
Fast stop
Freewheel stop
Incompatible functions Compatible functions Not applicable
Example: the "Freewheel stop" function has priority over the "Fast stop" function
59
Schneider Electric worldwide
Up-dated: 28-07-2003
Afghanistan Albania Algeria Andorra Angola Anguilla Antartica Antigua & Barbuda Argentina Armenia Aruba Australia
Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric India Schneider Electric Austria voie A Lot C22 Zone industrielle Rouiba - Alger Schneider Electric France Schneider Electric South Africa Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Schneider Electric Brazil Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Viamonte 2850 - 1678 Caseros (provincia Buenos Aires) Schneider Electric Russian Fed. Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Norwest Business Park Baulkham Hill _ NSW 2153 Birostrasse 11 1239 Wien Schneider Electric Russian Fed. Union Village PO Box 3901 - Nassau Floor 1 - Juma Building Abu Horaira Avenue PO Box 355 - 304 Manama Schneider Electric India Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Prospect Macherova 5, of. 202 220004 Minsk Dieweg 3 B - 1180 Brussels Schneider Electric USA Schneider Electric Ivory Coast Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Schneider Electric India Schneider Electric Chile Schneider Electric Croatia Schneider Electric South Africa Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Avenida Das Naes Unidas 23223 Jurubatuba - CEP 04795-907 So Paulo-SP Schneider Electric Singapore Expo 2000, Boulevard Vaptzarov 1407 Sofiav Schneider Electric Ivory Coast Schneider Electric Kenya Schneider Electric Viet Nam 166, rue de l'Htel de Ville BP12087 - Douala 19, Waterman Avenue M4 B1Y2 Toronto - Ontario Schneider Electric Senegal Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Schneider Electric Cameroon Schneider Electric Cameroon Avda. Pdte Ed. Frei Montalva, 6001-31 Tel.: +56 2 444 3000 Conchali - Santiago Fax: +56 2 423 9335 Landmark bldg-Room 1801 8 North Dong Sanhuan Rd Chaoyang District 100004 Beijing Tel.: +86 10 65 90 69 07 Fax: +86 10 65 90 00 13 www.schneider-electric.co.cl www.schneider-electric.com.cn Tel.: +237 343 38 84 Fax: +237 343 11 94 Tel.: +1 416 752 8020 Fax: +1 416 752 4203 www.schneider-electric.ca Tel.: +3592 919 42 Fax: +3592 962 44 39 www.schneiderelectric.bg Tel.: +55 55 24 52 33 Fax: +55 55 22 51 34 www.schneider-electric.com.br Tel. : +375 172 23 75 50 Fax : +375 172 23 97 61 Tel.: +3223737711 Fax: +3223753858 www.schneider-electric.be Tel. : +1 242 327 42 91 Fax : +1 242 327 42 91 Tel.: +97 322 7897 Fax: +97 321 8313 www.squared.com Tel.: +61 298 51 28 00 Fax: +61 296 29 83 40 Tel.: +431 610 540 Fax: +431 610 54 54 www.schneider.com.au Tel.: +54 1 716 88 88 Fax: +54 1 716 88 33 www.schneider-electric.com.ar Tel. : +213 21 92 97 02 09 Fax : +213 21 92 97 00 01
b Schneider Electric
Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by
b Schneider Argentina
Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Limited
b Schneider Electric (Australia) Pty. 2 Solent Circuit
Austria Azerbaijan Bahamas Bahrain
b Schneider Austria Ges.m.b.H.

Contacts are assured by
www.schneider-electric.at
b Schneider Electric b Schneider Electric
Bangladesh Barbados Belarus Belgium Belize Benin Bermuda Bhutan Bolivia Bosnia and Herzegovina Botswana Bouvet island Brazil
Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by
b Schneider Electric Industries SA b Schneider Electric nv/sa

Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by
b Schneider Electric Brazil Ltda.
Brunei (Darussalam) Bulgaria Burkina Faso Burundi Cambodia Cameroon Canada Cape Verde Caribee Cayman islands Central African Republic Chad Chile China
Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by
b Schneider Electric Cameroon b Schneider Canada

b Schneider Electric Chile S.A. b Schneider Beijing
60
Up-dated: 28-07-2003
Christmas island Cocos (Keeling) islands Colombia Comoros Congo Cook islands Costa Rica
Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric Australia Calle 45A #102-48 Bogota DC Schneider Electric la Reunion Schneider Electric Cameroon Schneider Electric Australia 1.5 kmts oeste de la Embajada Americana, Pavas, San Jos, Costa Rica C.A. Apartado: 4123-1000 San Jose Fallerovo Setaliste 22 HR - 10000 Zagreb Bureau de Liaison de La Havane Calle 36- N306-Apto1 Entre 3ra y 5ta Avenida Miramar Playa Habana 28 General Timayia Avenue Kyriakos Building, Block #A301 Larnaca 6046 Thmova 13 Praha 8 - 186 00 Schneider Electric Cameroon Baltorpbakken 14 DK-2750 Ballerup Schneider Electric Egypt Calle Jacinto Manon Esq. Federico Geraldino Edificio D' Roca Plaza Suite 402, Ens. Paraiso - Santo Domingo Tel.: +1 809 334 66 63 Fax: +1 809 334 66 68 Tel.: +45 44 73 78 88 Fax: +45 44 68 5255 www.schneider-electric.dk Tel.: +506 232-60-55 Fax: +506 232-04-26 www.schneider-ca.com Tel.: +57 1 426 97 00 Fax: +57 1 426 97 40
b Schneider Electric de Colombia

S.A. Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by
b Schneider Centroamrica Ltda.
Croatia Cuba
b Schneider Electric SA b Schneider Electric
Tel.: +385 1 367 100 Fax: +385 1 367 111 Tel.: +53 724 15 59 Fax: +53 724 12 17
Cyprus
b Schneider Electric Cyprus
Tel.: +00357 248 12646 Fax: +00357 246 37382 Tel.: +420 2 810 88 111 Fax: +420 2 24 81 08 49 www.schneider-electric.cz
Czech Republic Democratic Rep. of Congo Denmark Djibouti Dominican Republic
b Schneider Electric CZ, s.r.o.

b Schneider Electric A/S

Ecuador Egypt El Salvador Equatorial Guinea Eritrea Estonia Ethiopia Falkland islands Faroe islands Fiji Finland France French Polynesia French West Indies Gabon Gambia Georgia Germany Ghana
b Schneider Electric Ecuador SA b Schneider Electric Egypt sae

Av.Republica del Salvador 1082 y Nac Tel. : +593 2 224 42 42 Edificio Mansion Blanca-Quito Fax : +593 2 224 42 94 68, El Tayaran Street Nasr City, 11371 - Cairo Schneider Electric USA Schneider Electric Cameroon Schneider Electric Egypt Ehitajate tee 110 EE 12618 Talinn Schneider Electric Egypt Schneider Electric Brazil Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric Australia Sinimentie 14 02630 Espoo 5, rue Nadar 92500 Rueil Malmaison Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Schneider Electric Cameroon Schneider Electric Senegal Schneider Electric Russian Fed. Gothaer Strae 29 D-40880 Ratingen PMB Kia 3rd Floor Opeibea House Airport Commercial Center Liberation road - Accra Schneider Electric Spain 14th km - RN Athens-Lamia GR - 14564 Kifissia Schneider Electric United States Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Schneider Electric Martinique Schneider Electric Australia Tel.: +302 106 29 52 00 Fax: +302 106 29 52 10 www.schneider-electric.com.gr Tel.: +49210 240 40 Fax: +492 10 240 49 256 Tel. : +233 21 70 11 687 Fax : +233 21 77 96 22 www.schneiderelectric.de Tel. : +358 9 527 000 Fax : +358 9 5270 0376 Tel.: +33 (0)1 41 29 82 00 Fax: +33 (0)1 47 51 80 20 www.schneider-electric.fi www.schneider-electric.fr Tel. : +372 650 97 00 Fax : +372 650 97 22 Tel.: +20 24 01 01 19 Fax: +20 24 01 66 87 www.schneider.com.eg
b Lexel Electric
Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by
b Schneider Electric Oy b Schneider Electric SA

b Schneider Electric GmbH b Schneider Electric Ghana
Gilbraltar Greece Greenland Grenada Guadeloupe Guam
b Schneider Electric AE
61
Up-dated: 28-07-2003
Guatemala Guinea-Bissau Guinea Guyana Haiti Heard & Mac Donald isl. Honduras Hong Kong
Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric United States Schneider Electric Sngal Schneider Electric Ivory Coast Schneider Electric United States Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric United States Room 3108-28, 31th Floor, Sun Hung Kai Centre, 30 Harbour Road, Wanchai Fehrvri t 108 112 H-1116 Budapest Schneider Electric Denmark Max House, 1 Dr Jha Marg, Okhla 110 020 New Dehli Ventura Building 7th Floor Jalan R.A. Kartini Kav.26 Cilandak - 12430 Jakarta 1047 Avenue VALI ASSR P.O. Box 15875-3547 15116 Teheran 38050 Grenoble Cedex 9 Maynooth Road Cellbridge - Co. Kildare Centro Direzionale Colleoni Palazzo Sirio - Viale Colleoni, 7 20041 Agrate Brianza (Mi) Rue Pierre et Marie Curie 18 BP 2027 Abidjan 18 Shop#5, Plaza Dunrobin 30 Dunrobin Avenue - Kingstown Torigoe F. Bldg 1-8-2, Torigoe Taito-Ku - 111-0054 Tokyo Abu Al Haj Commercial Complex 2nd Floor - Office # 202 - Amman Tel. : +91 11 631 85 84 Tel. : +91 11 631 71 61 Tel.: +62 +21 750 44 06 Fax: +62 +21 750 44 15/ 16 Tel.: +98 218 71 01 42 Fax: +98 218 71 81 87 Tel.: +33 04 76 60 54 27 Fax: +33 04 76 60 56 60 Tel.: +353+0 1 6012200 Fax: +353+0 1 6012201 Tel.: +39 39 655 8111 Fax: +39 39 605 6237 Tel.: +225 21 75 00 10 Fax: +225 21 75 00 30 Tel. : +1876 755 41 27 Tel. : +931 87 74 Tel.: +81 358 35 35 81 Fax: +81 358 35 35 85 Tel.: 962 65 16 78 87 Fax: 962 65 16 79 1 Tel. : +7 327 250 93 88 Tel. : +7 327 250 63 70 Tel. : +254 2.824.156 Fax : +254 2.824.157 www.schneider-electric.co.jp www.schneiderelectric.ie www.schneiderelectric.it www.schneiderelectric-in.com www.schneider-electric.co.id Tel.: +852 25 65 06 21 Fax: +852 28 11 10 29 Tel.: +36 1 382 26-06 Fax: +36 1 206 1429 www.schneider-electric.hu
b Schneider Electric (Hong Kong)

Ltd
Hungary Iceland India Indonesia
b Schneider Electric Hungria

Villamossgi Rt. Contacts are assured by
b Schneider Electric India b P.T. Schneider Indonesia
Iran (Islamic Republic of)
b Telemecanique Iran
Irak Ireland Italy
b Schneider Electric Industries SA b Schneider Electric Ireland b Schneider Electric S.p.A.
Ivory Coast Jamaica Japan
b Schneider Electric Afrique de

l'Ouest
b Schneider Electric b Schneider Electric Japan Ltd
Jordan
b Schneider Electric Industr. Jordan Jordan University Street
Kazakstan Kenya
b Schneider Electric Kazakhstan

Liaison Office
Prospekt Abaia 157 off 9 480009 Almaty Power Technics Complex Monbasa Road - PO Box 46345 Nairobi Schneider Electric Australia 3Floor, Cheil Bldg., 94-46, 7-Ka Youngdeungpodong, Youngdeungpo-ku 150-037 Seoul Schneider Electric Russian Fed. Al Gaas Tower - Sharq 2nd Floor PO Box 20092 - 13 061 Safat Schneider Electric Russian Fed. Schneider Electric Thailand 60A A.Deglava str. LV1035 Riga Tabaris, Avenue Charles Malek Immeuble Ashada, 8 P.O. Box 166223 - Beyrouth Schneider Electric South Africa Schneider Electric Ghana Schneider Electric Tunisia Schneider Electric Switzerland 44, Verkiu str. LT-2012 Vilnius Schneider Electric Australia 1, Rue Graham Bell - BP n 35190 57075 Metz cedex 3 - France
b Schneider East Africa
Kiribati Korea
b Schneider Electric Korea Ltd
Tel. : +82 2 2630 9700 Fax : +82 2 2630 9800
www.csinfo.co.kr/schneider/
Kurdistan Kuwait Kyrgyz Republic Laos Latvia Lebanon
b Schneider Electric Kuwait

Tel.: +965 240 75 46 Fax: +965 240 75 06
b Lexel Electric b Schneider Electric Liban
Tel. : +371 780 23 74/75 Fax : +371 754 62 80 Tel. : +961 1 20 46 20 Tel. : +961 1 20 31 19
Lesotho Liberia Libya Liechtenstein Lithuania Loro Sae Luxembourg
b Lexel Electric
Tel. : +370 278 59 59/61 Fax : +370 278 59 60
b Schneider Electric Industrie SAS Agence de Metz
Tel.: 33 03 87 39 06 03 Fax: 33 03 87 74 25 96
www.schneider-electric.fr
62
Up-dated: 28-07-2003
Macau Macedonia Madagascar Malawi Malaysia
Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Bhd Schneider Electric China Schneider Electric Bulgaria Schneider Electric la Reunion Schneider Electric South Africa Hicom-Glenmarie Industrial Park 40150 Shah Alam Selangor Darul Ehsan Schneider Electric Reunion Schneider Electric Senegal Schneider Electric Tunisia Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric Immeuble Cottrell - ZI de la Lzarde 97232 Le Lamentin Schneider Electric Senegal Route ctire Calodyne - Mauritius Schneider Electric Reunion Calz. Rojo Gomez N 1121-A Col. Guadalupe del Moral Mxico, D.F. - C.P. 09300 Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric Romania Schneider Electric France Schneider Electric Russian Fed. Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. 26, rue Ibnou Khalikane Quartier Palmiers 20100 Casablanca Schneider Electric South Africa Schneider Electric Singapore Schneider Electric South Africa Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric India Waarderweg 40 - Postbus 836 2003 RV Haarlem Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Schneider Electric Australia 14 Charann Place Avondale P.O. Box 15355 - New Lynn Auckland Schneider Electric United States Schneider Electric Ivory Coast Abeyemo Alakija Street Victoria Islan - Lagos Tel. : +234 1 2702973 Fax : +234 1 2702976 Tel. : +64 9 829 04 90 Fax : +64 9 829 04 91 www.schneider-electric.co.nz Tel.: +31 23 512 4124 Fax: +31 23 512 4100 www.schneider-electric.nl Tel.: +212 299 08 48 to 57 Fax: +212 299 08 67 and 69 www.schneider.co.ma Tel.: +525 686 30 00 Fax: +525 686 24 09 www.schneiderelectric.com.mx Tel.: 230 282 18 83 Fax: 230 282 18 84 Tel.: +05 96 51 06 00 Fax: +05 96 51 11 26 Tel. : (603) 7883 6333 Fax : (603) 7883 6188 www.schneiderelectric.com.my
b Schneider Electric (Malaysia) Sdn No.11 Jalan U1/19, Seksyen U1
Maldives Mali Malta Marshall islands Martinique
Mauritania Mauritius Mayotte Mexico
b Groupe Schneider Mexico
Micronesia Moldova Monaco Mongolia Montserrat Morocco
b Schneider Electric Morocco
Mozambique Myanmar Namibia Nauru Nepal Netherlands Netherlands Antilles New Caledonia New Zealand
b Schneider Electric BV
b Schneider Electric (NZ) Ltd
Nicaragua Niger Nigeria
b Schneider Electric Nigeria Limited Biro plaza - 8th Floor - Plot 634
Niue Norfolk island North Korea Northern Mariana islands Norway Oman Pakistan Palau Panama Papua New Guinea Paraguay
Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric China Schneider Electric Australia Solgaard Skog 2 Postboks 128 - 1501 Moss c/o Arab Development Co PO Box 439 - 113 Muscat 43-L, 2nd floor, M.M. Alam Road, Gulberg II - Lahore Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric United States Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric Uruguay Tel.: +47 6924 9700 Fax: +47 6925 7871 Tel.: +968 77 163 64 Fax: +968 77 104 49 Tel.: +92 42 5754471 73 Fax: +92 42 5754474 www.schneider-electric.no
b Schneider Electric Norge A/S b Schneider Electric CA b Schneider Electric Pakistan

63
Up-dated: 28-07-2003
Peru Philippines b Schneider Electric Peru S.A.
Los Telares n231 Urb. Vulcano, Ate Lima 03 391 Sen, Gil Puyat Avenue Makati 1209 Tel.: +511 348 44 11 Fax: +511 348 05 23 Tel. : +632 896 6063 Fax : +632 896 7229 www.schneider-electric.com.pe
b Schneider Electric Philippines, Inc 5th Floor, ALCO Building
Pitcairn Poland Portugal
Schneider Electric Australia 03-878 - Warszawa Tel.: +48 22 511 8 200 Fax: +48 22 511 8 210 Tel.: +351 21 416 5800 Fax: +351 21 416 5857 www.schneider-electric.pl www.schneiderelectric.pt
b Schneider Electric Polska Sp.zo.o. ul. Lubinowa 4a b Schneider Electric Portugal

Av.do Forte, 3 Edificio Sucia II, Piso 3-A CP 2028 Carnaxide 2795 Linda-A-Velha Schneider Electric United States c/o Khalifa BinFahred Al Thani Trad.and Co - P.O. Box 4484 Doha Immeuble Futura, 190, rue des 2 canons BP 646 - 97497 Sainte Clothilde Bd Ficusului n42 Apimondia, Corp.A, et.1, Sector 1 Bucuresti Enisseyskaya 37 129 281 Moscow Schneider Electric Kenya Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric Italy Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric Senegal Second Industrial City P.O. Box 89249 - 11682 Riyadh BP 15952 - Dakar-Fann Rond point N'Gor - Dakar Schneider Electric Reunion Schneider Electric Ghana #02-17/20 TechPoint Singapore 569059 Borekova 10 SK-821 06 Bratislava Dunasjka 47 1000 Ljubljana Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric Egypt Private Bag X139 Halfway House 1685 - Midrand. Pl. Dr. Letamendi, 5-7 08007 Barcelona Liaison office SRI Lanka Level 3B Valiant towers 46/7 Nawam Mawatha-Colombo 2 Schneider Electric Italy Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Schneider Electric Egypt Schneider Electric United States Schneider Electric Denmark Schneider Electric South Africa Djupdalsvgen 17/19 19129 Sollentuna Schermenwaldstrasse 11 CH - 3063 Ittigen
Puerto Rico Qatar
b Schneider Electric Qatar Branch
Tel.: +97 4424358 Fax: +97 4424358 Tel.: +262 28 14 28 Fax: +262 28 39 37 Tel.: +401 203 06 50 Fax: +401 232 15 98 Tel.: +7095 797 40 00 Fax: +7095 797 40 03 www.schneider-electric.ro
Reunion
Romania
Russian Federation Rwanda Samoa San Marino Sandwich & Georgia island Sao Tome & Principe Saudi Arabia Senegal Seychelles Sierra Leone Singapore
b Schneider Electric ZAO

www.schneider-electric.ru
b Schneider Electric b Schneider Electric Sngal

Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Ltd
Tel.: +966 1 265 1515 Fax: +966 1 265 1860 Tel.: +221 820 68 05 Fax: +221 820 58 50
b Schneider Electric Singapore Pte 10 Ang Mo Kio Street 65
Tel.: +65 484 78 77 Fax: +65 484 78 00 Tel. : +02 45 52 40 10 and 40 30 Fax : +02 45 52 40 00 Tel. : +386 1 23 63 555 Fax : +386 1 23 63 559
www.schneider-electric.com.sg
Slovak Republic Slovenia Solomon islands Somalia South Africa
b Schneider Electric Slovakia spol

s.r.o.
www.schneider-electric.sk www.schneider-electric.si
b Schneider Electric, d.o.o.

b Schneider Electric South Africa

(PTY) Ltd
Tel.: +27 11 254 6400 Fax: +27 11 315 8830 Tel.: +34 93 484 3100 Fax: +34 93 484 3308 Tel. : +94 77 48 54 89
www.schneider-electric.co.za
Spain Sri Lanka
b Schneider Electric Espaa, S.A. b Schneider Electric Industries SA
www.schneiderelectric.es www.schneiderelectric-in.com
St Helena St Kitts & Nevis St Lucia St Pierre et Miquelon St Vincent & Grenadines Sudan Suriname Svalbard & Jan Mayen isl. Swaziland Sweden Switzerland
Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by
b Schneider Electric AB b Schneider Electric (Switzerland)

S.A.
Tel.: +46 8 623 84 00 Fax: +46 8 623 84 85 Tel.: +41 31 917 3333 Fax: +41 31 917 3355
www.schneider-electric.se www.schneider-electric.ch
64
Up-dated: 28-07-2003
Syrian Arab Republic b Schneider Electric Syria
Elba Street - Malki Gheibeh and Qassas bldg, 1st floor PO Box 33876-Damascus Taipei 114 Tel. : +963 11 37 49 88 00 Fax : +963 11 37 17 55 9 www.schneider-electric.com.tw
Taiwan, Republic of China Tajikistan Tanzania, United Rep. of Thailand
b Schneider Electric Taiwan Co Ltd 2FI., N37, Ji-Hu Road, Nei-Hu Dist., Tel. : +886 2 8751 6388
Fax : +886 2 8751 6389 Contacts are assured by Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Russian Fed. Schneider Electric Kenya 20th Floor Richmond Building 75 Sukhumvit 26 Road, Klongtoey Bangkok 10110 Schneider Electric Ivory Coast Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric Australia 6, 1st Street West Ext. Beaulieu Avenue Trincity Trinidad West Indies Rue du Lac Oubeira 1053 Les Berges du Lac - Tunis Tel.: 1868 640 42 04 Fax: 1868 640 42 04 Tel.: +216 71 960 477 Fax: +216 71 960 342 Tel.: +662 204 9888 Fax: +662 204 9816
b Schneider (Thailand) Ltd
www.schneider-electric.co.th
Togo Tokelau Tonga Trinidad & Tobago
Tunisia Turkey Turkmenistan
b Schneider Electric Tunisia b Schneider Elektrik Sanayi Ve

Ticaret A.S.
Ttnc Mehmet Efendi Cad. N:110 Tel.: +90 21 63 86 95 70 Kat 1-2 - 81080 Gztepe Istanbul Fax: +90 21 63 86 38 75 rue Neitralny Turkmenistan 28, off.326/327 74 000 Achgabad Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric Kenya Rue Krechtchalik 2 252601 Kiev PO Box 29580 Office Floor 2/Lulu Street Al Marina Plaza Tower Abu Dhabi Braywick House East Windsor Road - Maidenhead Berkshire SL6 1 DN North American Division 1415 Roselle Road Palatine - IL 60067 Ramon Masini 3190 Montevideo Schneider Electric Russian Fed. Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric Italy Calle 162/ Piso 2 Edificio Centro Cynamid La Urbina, 1070 - 75319 Caracas Unit 2.9, 2nd Floor, e-Town Building 364 Cong Hoa Street Tan Binh District - Ho Chi Minh City Schneider Electric Dominican Rep. Schneider Electric Australia Schneider Electric Morocco Schneider Electric U.A.E. Ratarski put 27d 11186 Belgrade Zambia Office c/o Matipi Craft Center Building Plot 1036 - Accra Road PO Box 22792 - Kitwe Zimbabwe Liaison Office 75A Second Street (corner Livingstone Avenue) Harare Tel.: +381 11 192 414 Fax: +381 11 107 125 Tel.: +260 222 22 52 Fax: +260 222 83 89 Tel.: +58 2 241 13 44 Fax: +58 2 243 60 09 Tel.: +84 8 8103 103 Fax: +84 8 8120 477 Tel.: +380 44 462 04 25 Fax: +380 44 462 04 24 Tel.: +9712 6 339444 Fax: +9712 6 316606 Tel. : +993 12 46 29 52 Fax : +993 12 46 29 52
www.schneiderelectric.com.tr
b Schneider Electric Turkmenistan

Liaison Office
Turks & Caicos islands Tuvalu Uganda Ukraine United Arab Emirates
b Schneider Electric b Schneider Electric Abu Dhabi
www.schneider-electric.com.ua
United Kingdom
b Schneider Electric Ltd
Tel.: +44 (0)1 628 508 500 Fax: +44 (0)1 628 508 508 Tel.: +1 847 397 2600 Fax: +1 847 925 7500 Tel. : +59 82 707 2392 Fax : +59 82 707 2184
www.schneider.co.uk
United States
www.squared.com
Uruguay Uzbekistan Vanuatu Vatican city St./Holy See Venezuela
b Schneider Electric Uruguay S.A.

b Schneider Mg SD TE, S.A
www.schneider-electric.com.ve
Viet Nam
b R.R.O. of Schneider Electric

Industries S.A.S. in Viet Nam
Virgin islands Wallis & Futuna islands Western Sahara Yemen Yugoslavia Zambia
b Schneider Electric Jugoslavija

d.o.o.
b Schneider Zambia
Zimbabwe
Tel.: +263 4 707 179/180 Fax: +263 4 707 176
65
Schneider Electric Industries SAS

Headquarters 89, bd Franklin Roosevelt F - 92506 Rueil Malmaison Cedex Owing to changes in standards and equipment, the characteristics given in the text and images in this document are not binding until they have been confirmed with us. Production : Schneider Electric Industries Photos : Schneider Electric Industries Printed by : October 2003
http://www.schneider-electric.com ART. 063912
DIA2ED2031002EN
Altivar 31H
Installation manual
Contents
Drive references ______________________________________________________________________________________________ 2 Mounting ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ 4 Wiring ______________________________________________________________________________________________________ 8
NOTE: Please also refer to the Programming Manual.
When the drive is powered up, the power components and some of the control components are connected to the line supply. It is extremely dangerous to touch them. The drive cover must be kept closed. In general, the drive power supply must be disconnected before any operation on either the electrical or mechanical parts of the installation or machine. After the ALTIVAR has been switched off and the display has disappeared completely, wait for 10 minutes before working on the equipment. This is the time required for the capacitors to discharge. The motor can be stopped during operation by inhibiting start commands or the speed reference while the drive remains powered up. If personnel safety requires prevention of sudden restarts, this electronic locking system is not sufficient: fit a cut-off on the power circuit.. The drive is fitted with safety devices which, in the event of a fault, can shut down the drive and consequently the motor. The motor itself may be stopped by a mechanical blockage. Finally, voltage variations, especially line supply failures, can also cause shutdowns. If the cause of the shutdown disappears, there is a risk of restarting which may endanger certain machines or installations, especially those which must conform to safety regulations. In this case the user must take precautions against the possibility of restarts, in particular by using a low speed detector to cut off power to the drive if the motor performs an unprogrammed shutdown. The drive must be installed and set up in accordance with both international and national standards. Bringing the device into conformity is the responsibility of the systems integrator who must observe the EMC directive among others within the European Union. The specifications contained in this document must be applied in order to comply with the essential requirements of the EMC directive. The Altivar 31 must be considered as a component: it is neither a machine nor a device ready for use in accordance with European directives (machinery directive and electromagnetic compatibility directive). It is the responsibility of the end user to ensure that the machine meets these standards. The drive must not be used as a safety device for machines posing a potential risk of material damage or personal injury (lifting equipment, for example). In such applications, overspeed checks and checks to ensure that the trajectory remains under constant control must be made by separate devices which are independent of the drive. The products and equipment described in this document may be changed or modified at any time, either from a technical point of view or in the way they are operated. Their description can in no way be considered contractual.
Drive references
Single phase supply voltage: 200240 V 50/60 Hz
3-phase motor 200240 V Motor Power indicated on plate (1) kW/HP 0.18/0.25 0.37/0.5 0.55/0.75 0.75/1 1.1/1.5 1.5/2 2.2/3 Line supply (input) Max. line current (2) at at 200 V 240 V A A 3.0 2.5 5.3 4.4 6.8 5.8 8.9 7.5 12.1 10.2 15.8 13.3 21.9 18.4 Drive (output) Max. Max. inrush Nominal current In transient current (1) current (1) (3) (4) A 10 10 10 10 19 19 19 A 1.5 3.3 3.7 4.8/4.2 (6) 6.9 8.0 11.0 A 2.3 5.0 5.6 7.2 10.4 12.0 16.5 Altivar 31 Reference (5)
Max. Apparent prospective power line Isc kA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 kVA 0.6 1.0 1.4 1.8 2.4 3.2 4.4
Power dissipated at nominal load W 24 41 46 60 74 90 123
ATV31H018M2 ATV31H037M2 ATV31H055M2 ATV31H075M2 ATV31HU11M2 ATV31HU15M2 ATV31HU22M2

3-phase motor 200240 V Motor Power indicated on plate (1) kW/HP 0.18/0.25 0.37/0.5 0.55/0.75 0.75/1 1.1/1.5 1.5/2 2.2/3 3/3 4/5 5.5/7.5 7.5/10 11/15 15/20 Line supply (input) Max. line current (2) at at 200 V 240 V A A 2.1 1.9 3.8 3.3 4.9 4.2 6.4 5.6 8.5 7.4 11.1 9.6 14.9 13.0 19.1 16.6 24.2 21.1 36.8 32.0 46.8 40.9 63.5 55.6 82.1 71.9 Drive (output) Max. Max. inrush Nominal current In transient current (1) current (1) (3) (4) A 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 19 19 23 23 93 93 A 1.5 3.3 3.7 4.8 6.9 8.0 11.0 13.7 17.5 27.5 33.0 54.0 66.0 A 2.3 5.0 5.6 7.2 10.4 12.0 16.5 20.6 26.3 41.3 49.5 81.0 99.0 Altivar 31 Reference (5)
Max. Apparent prospective power line Isc kA 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 22 22 22 22 kVA 0.7 1.3 1.7 2.2 3.0 3.8 5.2 6.6 8.4 12.8 16.2 22.0 28.5
Power dissipated at nominal load W 23 38 43 55 71 86 114 146 180 292 388 477 628
ATV31H018M3X ATV31H037M3X ATV31H055M3X ATV31H075M3X ATV31HU11M3X ATV31HU15M3X ATV31HU22M3X ATV31HU30M3X ATV31HU40M3X ATV31HU55M3X ATV31HU75M3X ATV31HD11M3X ATV31HD15M3X
(1) These power ratings and currents are for a maximum ambient temperature of 50C and a switching frequency of 4 kHz in continuous operation.The switching frequency is adjustable from 2 to 16 kHz. Above 4 kHz, the drive will reduce the switching frequency in the event of excessive temperature rise. The temperature rise is controlled by a PTC probe in the power module. Nonetheless, the nominal drive current should be derated if operation above 4 kHz needs to be continuous. Derating curves are shown on page 6 as a function of switching frequency, ambient temperature and mounting conditions. (2) Current on a line supply with the "Max. prospective line Isc" indicated. (3) Peak current on power-up, for the max. voltage (240 V + 10%). (4) For 60 seconds. (5) Reference for a drive with built-in terminal but no control unit. For a drive with control potentiometer and RUN/STOP buttons, add an A at the end of the reference, e.g.: ATV31H018M2A. (6) 4.8 A at 200 V/4.6 A at 208 V/4.2 A at 230 V and 240 V.
Drive references
3-phase motor 380500 V Motor Power indicated on plate (1) kW/HP 0.37/0.5 0.55/0.75 0.75/1 1.1/1.5 1.5/2 2.2/3 3/3 4/5 5.5/7.5 7.5/10 11/15 15/20 Line supply (input) Max. line current (2) at at 380 V 500 V A A 2.2 1.7 2.8 2.2 3.6 2.7 4.9 3.7 6.4 4.8 8.9 6.7 10.9 8.3 13.9 10.6 21.9 16.5 27.7 21.0 37.2 28.4 48.2 36.8 Drive (output) Max. Max. inrush Nominal current In transient current (1) current (1) (3) (4) A 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 30 30 97 97 A 1.5 1.9 2.3 3.0 4.1 5.5 7.1 9.5 14.3 17.0 27.7 33.0 A 2.3 2.9 3.5 4.5 6.2 8.3 10.7 14.3 21.5 25.5 41.6 49.5 Altivar 31 Reference (5)
Max. Apparent prospective power line Isc kA 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 22 22 22 22 kVA 1.5 1.8 2.4 3.2 4.2 5.9 7.1 9.2 15.0 18.0 25.0 32.0
Power dissipated at nominal load W 32 37 41 48 61 79 125 150 232 269 397 492
ATV31H037N4 ATV31H055N4 ATV31H075N4 ATV31HU11N4 ATV31HU15N4 ATV31HU22N4 ATV31HU30N4 ATV31HU40N4 ATV31HU55N4 ATV31HU75N4 ATV31HD11N4 ATV31HD15N4

3-phase motor 525600 V Motor Power indicated on plate (1) Line supply (input) Max. line current (2) at at 525 V 600 V A 2.8 4.8 6.4 10.7 16.2 21.3 27.8 36.4 A 2.4 4.2 5.6 9.3 14.1 18.5 24.4 31.8 Drive (output) Max. Max. inrush Nominal current In transient current (1) current (1) (3) (4) A 12 12 12 12 36 36 117 117 A 1.7 2.7 3.9 6.1 9.0 11.0 17.0 22.0 A 2.6 4.1 5.9 9.2 13.5 16.5 25.5 33.0 Altivar 31 Reference
Max. Apparent prospective power line Isc
kW/HP 0.75/1 1.5/2 2.2/3 4/5 5.5/7.5 7.5/10 11/15 15/20
kA 5 5 5 5 22 22 22 22
kVA 2.5 4.4 5.8 9.7 15.0 19.0 25.0 33.0
Power dissipated at nominal load W 36 48 62 94 133 165 257 335
ATV31H075S6X ATV31HU15S6X ATV31HU22S6X ATV31HU40S6X ATV31HU55S6X ATV31HU75S6X ATV31HD11S6X ATV31HD15S6X
(1) These power ratings and currents are for a maximum ambient temperature of 50C and a switching frequency of 4 kHz in continuous operation. The switching frequency is adjustable from 2 to 16 kHz. Above 4 kHz, the drive will reduce the switching frequency in the event of excessive temperature rise. The temperature rise is controlled by a PTC probe in the power module. Nonetheless, the nominal drive current should be derated if operation above 4 kHz needs to be continuous. Derating curves are shown on page 6 as a function of switching frequency, ambient temperature and mounting conditions. (2) Current on a line supply with the "Max. prospective line Isc" indicated. (3) Peak current on power-up, for the max. voltage (500 V + 10%, 600 V + 10%). (4) For 60 seconds. (5) Reference for a drive with built-in terminal but no control unit. For a drive with control potentiometer and RUN/STOP buttons, add an A at the end of the reference, e.g.: ATV31H037N4A.
Mounting
Dimensions and weights
h = H = G a 2
ATV31 H018M3X, H037M3X H055M3X, H075M3X H018M2, H037M2 H055M2, H075M2 HU11M3X, HU15M3X HU11M2, HU15M2, HU22M3X, H037N4, H055N4, H075N4, HU11N4,HU15N4, H075S6X, HU15S6X Size 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5 Size 6
a mm 72 72 72 72 105 105
b mm 145 145 145 145 143 143
c (1) mm 120 130 130 140 130 150
G mm 601 601 601 601 931 931
hr mm 5 5 5 5 5 5
H mm 121.51 121.51 121.51 121.51 121.51 121.51
mm 2x5 2x5 2x5 2x5 2x5 2x5
For screw M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4
Weight kg 0.9 0.9 1.05 1.05 1.25 1.35
G a
ATV31 HU22M2, HU30M3X, HU40M3X, HU22N4, HU30N4, HU40N4, HU22S6X, HU40S6X HU55M3X, HU75M3X, HU55N4, HU75N4, HU55S6X, HU75S6X HD11M3X, HD15M3X, HD11N4, HD15N4, HD11S6X, HD15S6X Size 7
a mm 140
b mm 184
c (1) mm 150
G mm 1261
hr mm 6.5
H mm 1571
mm 4x5
For screw M4
Weight kg 2.35
Size 8
180
232
170
1601
2101
4x5
M4
4.70
Size 9
245
330
190
2251
2951
4x6
M5
9.0
(1) For drives in the A range, add 8 mm for the protruding potentiometer button.
Mounting
Mounting and temperature conditions
Install the unit vertically, at 10. Do not place it close to heating elements. Leave sufficient free space to ensure that the air required for cooling purposes can circulate from the bottom to the top of the unit. Free space in front of unit: 10 mm minimum. When IP20 protection is adequate, we recommend that the protective cover on the top of the drive be removed, as shown below.
50 mm 50 mm
Removing the protective cover
Example ATV31HU11M3X
3 types of mounting are possible:

Type A mounting: Free space u 50 mm on each side, with protective cover fitted
u 50 mm
u 50 mm
Type B mounting:
Drives mounted side-by-side, protective cover removed (the degree of protection becomes IP20)
Type C mounting:
Free space u 50 mm on each side, protective cover removed (the degree of protection becomes IP20)
u 50 mm
u 50 mm
Mounting
Derating curves for the drive current In as a function of the temperature, switching frequency and type of mounting. I/In
In = 100 % -5% 90 % 80 % - 25 % 70 % - 35 % 60 % 50 % 40 % - 65 % 30 % - 40 % - 50 % - 30 % - 10 % - 15 % - 20 %
40C mounting types A, B and C
- 10 %
- 25 %
50C mounting type C
- 35 % - 45 % - 55 %
50C mounting types A and B 60C mounting type C 60C mounting types A and B
Switching frequency
4 kHz
8 kHz
12 kHz
16 kHz
For intermediate temperatures (e.g. 55C), interpolate between 2 curves.
If you are installing the drives in enclosures, make provision for a flow of air at least equal to the value given in the table below for each drive.
ATV31 H018M2, H037M2, H055M2, H018M3X, H037M3X, H055M3X, H037N4, H055N4, H075N4, HU11N4 H075S6X, HU15S6X H075M2, HU11M2, HU15M2 H075M3X, HU11M3X, HU15M3X HU15N4, HU22N4 HU22S6X, HU40S6X HU22M2, HU22M3X, HU30M3X, HU40M3X HU30N4, HU40N4 HU55S6X, HU75S6X HU55M3X HU55N4, HU75N4 HD11S6X HU75M3X, HD11M3X, HD11N4, HD15N4 HD15S6X HD15M3X Flow rate in m3/hour 18
33
93
102
168
216
Mounting
EMC mounting plate: Supplied with the drive
Fix the EMC equipotentiality mounting plate to the holes in the ATV 31 heatsink using the 2 screws supplied, as shown in the drawings below. Size 1 - 4 Size 5 -6 Size 7 Size 8 Size 9
2
50 49
2 2
48
2
75
2 Screws supplied: 4 x M4 screws for fixing the EMC clamps (clamps not supplied) 1 x M5 screw for ground
75
ATV31 H018M3X, H037M3X H055M3X, H075M3X H018M2, H037M2 H055M2, H075M2 HU11M3X, HU15M3X HU11M2, HU15M2, HU22M3X, H037N4, H055N4, H075N4, HU11N4, HU15N4, H075S6X, HU15S6X
Size 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5 Size 6
ATV31 HU22M2, HU30M3X, HU40M3X, HU22N4, HU30N4, HU40N4, HU22S6X, HU40S6X HU55M3X, HU75M3X, HU55N4, HU75N4, HU55S6X, HU75S6X HD11M3X, HD15M3X, HD11N4, HD15N4, HD11S6X, HD15S6X
Size 7
Size 8
Size 9
Wiring
Access to terminals
To access the terminals, open the cover as shown in the example below.
Example ATV31HU11M2
Power terminals
Connect the power terminals before connecting the control terminals.
Power terminal characteristics

Altivar ATV 31 Maximum connection capacity AWG mm2 AWG 14 2.5 5 Tightening torque in Nm 0.8 1.2
H018M2, H037M2, H055M2, H075M2, H018M3X, H037M3X, H055M3X, H075M3X, HU11M3X, HU15M3X HU11M2, HU15M2, HU22M2, AWG 10 HU22M3X, HU30M3X, HU40M3X, H037N4, H055N4, H075N4, HU11N4,HU15N4, HU22N4, HU30N4, HU40N4 H075S6X, HU15S6X, HU22S6X, HU40S6X HU55M3X, HU75M3X, AWG 6 HU55N4, HU75N4, HU55S6X, HU75S6X HD11M3X, HD15M3X, AWG 3 HD11N4, HD15N4, HD11S6X, HD15S6X
16
2.2
25
Power terminal functions

Terminal
t
R/L1 S/L2 R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 PO PA/+ PB PC/U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
Function Ground terminal Power supply
For Altivar ATV 31 All ratings ATV31ppppM2 ATV31ppppM3X ATV31ppppN4 ATV31ppppS6X All ratings All ratings All ratings All ratings All ratings
DC bus + polarity Output to braking resistor (+ polarity) Output to braking resistor DC bus - polarity Outputs to the motor
Never remove the commoning link between PO and PA/+.
Wiring
Arrangement of the power terminals
ATV 31H018M3X, H037M3X, H055M3X, H075M3X
ATV 31H018M2, H037M2, H055M2, H075M2
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 P0 PA/+ PB PC/- U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
R/L1 S/L2 P0 PA/+ PB PC/- U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
ATV 31HU11M3X, HU15M3X, HU22M3X, HU30M3X, HU40M3X, H037N4, H055N4, H075N4, HU11N4, HU15N4, HU22N4, HU30N4, HU40N4, H075S6X, HU15S6X, HU22S6X, HU40S6X
ATV 31HU11M2, HU15M2, HU22M2
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 P0 PA/+ PB PC/- U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 R/L1 S/L2 P0 PA/+ PB PC/- U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
ATV 31HU55M3X, HU75M3X, HU55N4, HU75N4, HU55S6X, HU75S6X
ATV 31HD11M3X, HD15M3X, HD11N4, HD15N4, HD11S6X, HD15S6X
Wiring
Control terminals
COM
AOC
AOV
R1C LI5
Logic input configuration switch
Source CLI SINK COM 10V AI1
AI2
CLI
LI4
LI6
R2C
R1A
R1B
R2A
AI3
Control terminals
24V
LI1
LI2
RJ45 connector
RJ45
- Maximum connection capacity: 2.5 mm2 - AWG 14 - Max. tightening torque: 0.6 Nm
10
LI3
Wiring
Control terminals
Arrangement, characteristics and functions of the control terminals
Terminal R1A R1B R1C R2A R2C Function Common point C/O contact (R1C) of programmable relay R1 Electrical characteristics Min. switching capacity: 10 mA for 5 V c Max. switching capacity on resistive load (cos = 1 and L/R = 0 ms): 5 A for 250 V a and 30 V c N/O contact of programmable relay R2 Max. switching capacity on inductive load (cos = 0.4 and L/R = 7 ms): 1.5 A for 250 V a and 30 V c Sampling time 8 ms Service life: 100,000 operations at max. switching power 1,000,000 operations at min. switching power Analog I/O common Analog voltage input 0V Analog input 0 + 10 V (max. safe voltage 30 V) Impedance 30 k Resolution 0.01 V, 10-bit converter Precision 4.3%, linearity 0.2%, of max. value Sampling time 8 ms Operation with shielded cable 100 m max. +10 V (+ 8% - 0), 10 mA max, protected against short-circuits and overloads
COM AI1
10 V
AI2
Power supply for setpoint potentiometer 1 to 10 k Analog voltage input
Bipolar analog input 0 10 V (max. safe voltage 30 V) The + or - polarity of the voltage on AI2 affects the direction of the setpoint and therefore the direction of operation. Impedance 30 k Resolution 0.01 V, 10-bit + sign converter Precision 4.3%, linearity 0.2%, of max. value Sampling time 8 ms Operation with shielded cable 100 m max. Analog input X - Y mA. X and Y can be programmed from 0 to 20 mA Impedance 250 Resolution 0.02 mA, 10-bit converter Precision 4.3%, linearity 0.2%, of max. value Sampling time 8 ms 0V Analog output 0 to 10 V, min. load impedance 470 or Analog output X - Y mA. X and Y can be programmed from 0 to 20 mA, max. load impedance 800 Resolution 8 bits (1) Precision 1% (1) Linearity 0.2% (1) Sampling time 8 ms This analog output can be configured as a 24 V logic output on AOC, min. load impedance 1.2 k. (1) Characteristics of digital/analog converter. + 24 V protected against short-circuits and overloads, min. 19 V, max. 30 V Max. customer current available 100 mA Programmable logic inputs + 24 V power supply (max. 30 V) Impedance 3.5 k State 0 if < 5 V, state 1 if > 11 V (voltage difference between LI- and CLI) Sampling time 4 ms Programmable logic inputs + 24 V power supply (max. 30 V) Impedance 3.5 k State 0 if < 5 V, state 1 if > 11 V (voltage difference between LI- and CLI) Sampling time 4 ms See page 12.
AI3
Analog current input
COM AOV AOC
Analog I/O common Analog voltage output AOV or Analog current output AOC or Logic voltage output AOC AOV or AOC can be assigned (either, but not both)
24 V LI1 LI2 LI3
Logic input power supply Logic inputs
LI4 LI5 LI6
Logic inputs
CLI
Logic input common
11
Wiring
Wiring diagram for factory settings
ATV31ppppM2
Single-phase supply
(1)
R / L1
S / L2
ATV31ppppM3X/N4/S6X
3-phase supply
(1)
(2)
Using the analog output as a logic output
U / T1 R / L1
W / T3 T / L3 R1A
S / L2
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
R1C
R2C
CLI
LI6
R1B
PA / +
V / T2
R2A
PC / -
COM
24V
COM
AOC
AOV
A0C
24 V relay or 24 V PLC input or LED
+10
AI1
AI3
0 10 V
W1
U1
V1
PB
M 3=
Reference potentiometer Braking resistor, if used
X - Y mA
(1) Line choke, if used (single phase or 3-phase) (2) Fault relay contacts, for remote indication of the drive status. Note: Fit interference suppressors to all inductive circuits near the drive or coupled to the same circuit (relays, contactors, solenoid valves, etc). Choice of associated components: Please refer to the catalogue.
Logic input switch

This switch assigns the logic input common link to 0V, 24 V or "floating":
0V SOURCE
CLI at 0 V (factory setting)
CLI
LI1
LIx
CLI
CLI "floating"
CLI 24V LI1 LIx
CLI at 24 V
SINK CLI LI1 LIx
12
AI2
P0
Wiring
Examples of recommended circuit diagrams
Using volt-free contacts
Switch in "Source" position (ATV31 factory setting for types other than ATV31ppppA)
0V
Switch in "SINK" position (factory setting for ATV31ppppA)

24V
LI1
24V
LI1
COM
Using PLC transistor outputs

Switch in CLI position Switch in CLI position
COM
CLI
LI1
COM
CLI
LI1
24V 0V
PLC
0V
PLC
24V
Wiring recommendations
Power
The drive must be earthed to conform with the regulations concerning high leakage currents (over 3.5 mA). When upstream protection by means of a "residual current device" is required by the installation standards, a type A device should be used for single-phase drives and type B for 3-phase drives. Choose a suitable model incorporating: HF current filtering A time delay which prevents tripping caused by the load from stray capacitance on power-up. The time delay is not possible for 30 mA devices. In this case, choose devices with immunity against accidental tripping, for example RCDs with reinforced immunity from the s.i range (Merlin Gerin brand). If the installation includes several drives, provide one "residual current device" per drive. Keep the power cables separate from circuits in the installation with low-level signals (detectors, PLCs, measuring apparatus, video, telephone). If you are using cables > 50 m between the drive and the motor, add output filters (please refer to the catalogue).
Control
Keep the control circuits away from the power cables. For control and speed reference circuits, we recommend using shielded twisted cables with a pitch of between 25 and 50 mm, connecting the shielding to ground at each end.
13
Wiring
Operation on an IT system
IT system: Isolated or impedance earthed neutral. Use a permanent insulation monitor compatible with non-linear loads (a Merlin Gerin type XM200, for example). ATV 31pppM2 and N4 drives feature built-in RFI filters. These filters can be isolated from ground for operation on an IT system as follows: ATV31H018M2 to U22M2 and ATV31H037N4 to U40N4: Pull out the jumper on the left of the ground terminal as illustrated below.
Normal (filter connected)
IT system (filter disconnected)
ATV31HU55N4 to D15N4: Move the cable tag on the top left of the power terminals as illustrated below (example ATV31HU55N4): IT system (filter disconnected)
Normal (filter connected) (factory setting)
14
Wiring
Principle
Grounds between the drive, motor and cable shielding must have "high frequency" equipotentiality. Use shielded cables with shielding connected to ground throughout 360 at both ends for the motor cable 6, braking resistor (if used) 8, and control-signalling cables 7. Metal ducting or conduit can be used for part of the shielding length provided that there is no break in continuity. Ensure maximum separation between the power supply cable (line supply) and the motor cable.
Installation diagram (examples)

Sizes 1 to 7 Size 8 Size 9
2 2 2
3 1 8 6
3 5 4 1 8 6 7
3 1
5 7
8 6
4 7
Size 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5 Size 6 ATV31 H018M3X, H055M3X, H018M2, H055M2, HU11M3X, HU11M2, HU15M2 H037M3X H075M3X H037M2 H075M2 HU15M3X HU22M3X H037N4, H055N4, H075N4, HU11N4, HU15N4 H075S6X, HU15S6X
Size 7 HU22M2 HU30M3X, HU40M3X HU22N4, HU30N4, HU40N4 HU22S6X, HU40S6X
Size 8 HU55M3X, HU75M3X HU55N4, HU75N4 HU55S6X, HU75S6X
Size 9 HD11M3X, HD15M3X HD11N4, HD15N4 HD11S6X, HD15S6X
1 Sheet steel grounded plate supplied with the drive, to be fitted as indicated on the diagram. 2 Altivar 31 3 Non-shielded power supply wires or cable 4 Non-shielded wires for relay contacts 5 Fix and ground the shielding of cables 6, 7 and 8 as close as possible to the drive: - Strip the shielding. - Use stainless steel cable clamps of an appropriate size on the parts from which the shielding has been stripped, to attach them to the plate 1. The shielding must be clamped tightly enough to the metal plate to ensure correct contact. 6 Shielded cable for motor connection with shielding connected to ground at both ends. The shielding must be continuous and intermediate terminals must be in EMC shielded metal boxes. For 0.18 to 1.5 kW drives, if the switching frequency is higher than 12 kHz, use cables with low linear capacitance: max. 130 pF (picoFarads) per metre. 7 Shielded cable for connecting the control/signalling wiring. For applications requiring several conductors, use cables with a small cross-section (0.5 mm2). The shielding must be connected to ground at both ends. The shielding must be continuous and intermediate terminals must be in EMC shielded metal boxes. 8 Shielded cable for connecting braking resistor (if fitted). The shielding must be continuous and intermediate terminals must be in EMC shielded metal boxes. Note: If using an additional input filter, it should be mounted under the drive and connected directly to the line supply via an unshielded cable. Link 3 on the drive is then via the filter output cable. The HF equipotential ground connection between the drive, motor and cable shielding does not remove the need to connect the PE protective conductors (green-yellow) to the appropriate terminals on each unit.
15
VVDED303041EN
atv31h_installing manual_EN_V2 2004-02
Altivar 31
Communication variables
User's manual
####
####
####
Contents
General _____________________________________________________________________________________________________ 3 Communication bus monitoring __________________________________________________________________________________ 5 Supervision and control in LINE mode _____________________________________________________________________________ 6 Function compatibility _________________________________________________________________________________________ 10 DRIVECOM variables _________________________________________________________________________________________ 11 Control variables_____________________________________________________________________________________________ 14 Monitoring variables __________________________________________________________________________________________ 16 Identification variables ________________________________________________________________________________________ 22 Configuration and adjustment variables ___________________________________________________________________________ 23 Replacing an ATV28 with an ATV31 _____________________________________________________________________________ 51 Code index _________________________________________________________________________________________________ 52
While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document, Schneider Electric SA assumes no liability for any omissions or errors it may contain, nor for any damages resulting from the application or use of the information herein. The products described in this document may be changed or modified at any time, either from a technical point of view or in the way they are operated. Their description can in no way be considered contractual.
NOTE
General
The Altivar 31 can be connected directly to Modbus and CANopen buses by means of an RJ45 connector, which supports both protocols. The communication function provides access to the drives configuration, adjustment, control and monitoring functions. The "Communication variables" User's Manual defines the drive control processes and the drive variables which can be accessed by these buses. It supplements each of the following manuals: Modbus CANopen These documents should be referred to for the hardware and software setup specific to each bus. We also recommend consulting the Programming Manual for additional explanations (operation, factory settings, etc). If the PowerSuite software workshop is used, consult the on-line help provided.
The communication variables are listed with: Their address in decimal format for Modbus Their index and subindex address / in hexadecimal format for CANopen They are grouped into several different tables according to the following criteria: DRIVECOM variables control variables monitoring variables identification variables configuration and adjustment variables
Read/write
Whether the parameters have read and/or write access is indicated in the "Read/Write" column with the following codes: R: read only, drive stopped or running R/WS: read access when drive stopped or running and write access only when drive stopped R/W: read and write access when drive stopped or running
Authorized addresses
Only the addresses and values defined in this document can be used. Any other address or value must be considered to be reserved and must never be written. Failure to observe this precaution may result in malfunctions.
Control modes
Control and reference channels

The control and the reference may originate from different channels: the terminal block the built-in keypad (ATV31...A only) the remote display terminal Modbus CANopen
These channels are managed: - either in priority mode for compatibility with the ATV28 - or in deterministic mode The "Function access level (LAC)" and "Mixed mode (CHCF)" parameters are used to select the run mode. Operation is described in detail in the Programming Manual ("Control menu" section).
Priority stops
In line mode, stop requests which can be activated by the terminals or by the remote display terminal always have priority: Type of stop Fast stop DC injection stop Freewheel stop From LI2 to LI6 LI2 to LI6 LI2 to LI6 Drivecom state reached "Operation enabled" "Operation enabled" "Switch on disabled" Actions for restoring control of the Altivar using the fieldbus - Set the logic input assigned to the "fast stop" function to 1 (active at 0) - Set the logic input assigned to the "injection stop" function to 0 (active at 1) - Set the logic input assigned to the "freewheel stop" function to 1 (active at 0) - Perform the transitions required to return the drive to "run" status - Set the logic input assigned to STOP to 1 (active at 0) - Perform the transitions required to return the drive to "run" status - Release the Stop key - Perform the transitions required to return the drive to "run" status
LI1 "Switch on disabled" 3-wire control stop via STOP logic input (LI1) (3-wire control) Stop by the display terminal STOP key "Switch on disabled" (1) (1)Unless the PSt parameter has been set to "NO"
Communication bus monitoring
The drive behaviour in the event of loss of communication can be configured via the "SLL" parameter (page 47) for Modbus or the "COL" parameter (page 47) for CANopen. This configuration is saved if the power supply is disconnected. In its factory setting, loss of communication triggers a fault (COF for CANopen or SLF for Modbus) with freewheel stopping. Bit 14 (NTO) of "Extended control word (CMI)" is also used to inhibit Modbus communication monitoring. This configuration is not saved if the power supply is disconnected. For safety reasons, inhibiting the communication fault should be restricted to the debug phase or to special applications.
Supervision and control in LINE mode
DRIVECOM status chart

Enter the status chart
Key DRIVECOM drive status Drive status applied to ATV ETA = 16#xxxx "ATV terminal display" Transition condition X CMD = 16#xxxx
All states
0
Not ready to switch on ATV powered down ETA = 16#xx00 Fault disappeared, fault reset CMD =16#0080
13
Fault
Malfunction reaction active ETA = 16#xxxx
1
Switch on disabled ATV locked Disable voltage CMD = 16#0000 or modification of 9 a configuration parameter (motor stopped) or STOP key on display terminal or STOP at terminals ETA = 16#xx40 "nSt"
14
Malfunction ATV faulty ETA = 16#xxx8
15
Shutdown CMD =16#0006
Disable voltage CMD = 16#0000 Disable or voltage modification of Shutdown CMD = 16#0000 a configuration CMD = 16#0006 2 7 or 12 parameter Quick stop (motor stopped) CMD = 16#0002 or STOP key on Disable display terminal voltage Ready to switch on 10CMD = 16#0000 or ATV waiting STOP at terminals or ETA = 16#xx21 modification of "nSt" a configuration parameter Switch on Shutdown 6 CMD = 16#0007 3 CMD = 16#0006 (motor stopped) Switched on ATV ready ETA = 16#xx23 "nSt" Enable Disable operation 4 5 operation CMD = 16#xxxF CMD = 16#0007 Operation enabled ATV running ETA = 16#xx27 "rUn, rdY, ..." Quick stop active Emergency stop ETA = 16#xx07 "rdY, dCb"
3A
Enable operation CMD = 16#xxxF
Quick stop CMD = 16#000B
11
Examples: ETA = 16#0627 : Normal stop or Forward operation, speed reached ETA = 16#8627 : Reverse operation, speed reached ETA = 16#0227 : Forward operation, ACC or DEC ETA = 16#8227 : Reverse operation, ACC or DEC
Examples (default configuration): CMD = 16#000F : Forward operation CMD = 16#080F : Reverse operation CMD = 16#100F : Stop (configured by "Stt") CMD = 16#200F : DC injection stop CMD = 16#400F : Fast stop
Any "Operation enabled" output except "Quick stop" = freewheel stop
The Altivar control process using the communication bus conforms to the CANopen DS402 profile status chart compatible with the DRIVECOM standard. Each state represents an aspect of the internal behaviour of the drive. This chart evolves according to whether the control word is sent (CMD W8501) or an event occurs (example: lock following malfunction). The drive status can be identified by the value of the status word (ETA W3201).
Not ready to switch on (Initialization):

Communication is being initialized. Transient state invisible to the communication bus.
Switch on disabled (Configuration):

Initialization of the drive is complete. The configuration and adjustment parameters can be modified. If all or part of the configuration and settings are to be loaded, we recommend disabling the consistency check function during the transfer (CMI W8504, bit 15 = 1). On completion of the transfer, the consistency check must be enabled (CMI W8504, bit 15 = 0). The drive is locked.
Ready to switch on and Switched on (Drive initialized):

The configuration and adjustment parameters can be modified. In the "Switched on" state, modifying a configuration parameter returns the drive to the "Switch on disabled" state. The drive is locked. The power stage of the drive is ready to operate, but voltage has not yet been applied to the output.
Operation enabled (Operational):

Only the adjustment parameters can be modified. Modifying a configuration parameter (motor stopped) returns the drive to the "Switch on disabled" state. The drive functions are activated and voltage is applied to the motor terminals. Auto-tuning (tUn) requires an injection of current. The drive must therefore be in this state for this command.
Quick stop active (Emergency stop active):

Fast stop. Restarting is only possible after the drive has changed to the "Switch on disabled" state.
Malfunction reaction active (Reaction on fault):

Transient state during which the drive performs an action appropriate to the type of fault. The drive function is disabled.
Malfunction (Fault):
The drive is faulty. The drive is locked.
CMD control word (W8501)

bit 7 Fault reset bit 6 0 bit 5 0 bit 4 0 bit 3 Enable operation bit 11 (1) bit 2 Quick stop (active at 0) bit 10 0 bit 1 Disable voltage (active at 0) bit 9 0 bit 0 Switch on
bit 15 (1)
bit 14 (1)
bit 13 (1)
bit 12 (1)
bit 8 0
(1)This bit action depends on the LAC "Access levels" parameter and the functions configured by the user. For example, to use bit 15 to switch the ramp, simply configure LAC = L3 (Access to advanced functions and management of mixed modes) and set the "Ramp switching rPS" configuration parameter to Cd15.
Command Shut down Switch on Enable operation Disable operation Disable voltage
Transition address 2, 6, 8 3 4 5 7, 9, 10, 12 11
bit 7 Final state Ready to switch on Switched on Operation enabled Switched on Switch on disabled Quick stop active Switch on disabled Switch on disabled Reset x x x x x
bit 3 Enable operation x x 1 0 x
bit 2 Quick stop 1 1 1 1 x
bit 1 Disable voltage 1 1 1 1 0
bit 0 Switch on 0 1 1 1 x
Typical value of CMD (W8501) 16#0006 16#0007 16#000F 16#0007 16#0000 16#000B or 16#0002 16#0080
Quick stop 7, 10 Fault reset 15
0V1
x: State not significant 0 V 1: Change from 0 to 1
ETA status word (W3201)

bit 7 Alarm bit 6 Switch on disabled bit 14 Stop via STOP key bit 5 Quick stop active at 0 bit 13 0 bit 4 0 (1) bit 12 0 bit 3 Malfunction bit 2 Operation enabled bit 10 Reference reached bit 1 Switched on bit 0 Ready to switch on bit 8 0
bit 15 Direction of rotation
bit 11 Reference exceeded
bit 9 Forced local mode (active at 0)
State Not ready to switch on Switch on disabled Ready to switch on Switched on Operation enabled Malfunction Malfunction reaction active Quick stop active x: State not significant
bit 6 Switch on disabled 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
bit 5 Quick stop x x 1 1 1 x x 0
bit 3 Malfunction 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
bit 2 Operation enabled 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1
bit 1 Switched on 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
bit 0 Ready to switch on 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1
ETA (W3201) masked by 16#006F 16#0000 16#0020 16#0040 16#0060 16#0021 16#0023 16#0027 16#0008 16#0028 16#000F 16#002F 16#0007
(1)Bit 4 of the ETA status word corresponds to DRIVECOMs "Voltage disabled".
Function compatibility
Incompatible functions
The following functions will be inaccessible or deactivated in the cases described below:
Automatic restart
This is only possible for 2-wire level detection control (tCC = 2C and tCt = LEL or PFO).
Flying restart
This is only possible for 2-wire level detection control (tCC = 2C and tCt = LEL or PFO). This function is locked if automatic injection on stopping is configured as DC (AdC = Ct).
Reverse
On the ATV31pppA range only, this function is locked if local control is active (tCC = LOC).

The choice of application functions may be limited by the number of I/O and by the fact that some functions are incompatible with one another. Functions which are not listed in this table are fully compatible. If there is an incompatibility between functions, the first function configured will prevent the remainder being configured. To configure a function, first check that the incompatible functions are not assigned, especially "Preset speeds" and "Summing inputs" which are assigned by default in the factory setting. Management of limit switches
DC injection stop
Brake sequence
Summing inputs
Summing inputs +/- speed (1) Management of limit switches Preset speeds PI regulator Jog operation Brake sequence DC injection stop Fast stop Freewheel stop
p p X p X p p p
A p
p p p p p p
A p A p p p X X
p X
p p p A A
(1)Excluding special application with reference channel Fr2.
p Incompatible functions
Compatible functions
N/A
Priority functions (functions which cannot be active at the same time): The function indicated by the arrow has priority over the X A other. Stop functions have priority over run commands. Speed references via logic command have priority over analog references.
Logic and analog input application functions

Each of the functions can be assigned to one of the inputs. A single input can activate several functions at the same time (reverse and 2nd ramp for example). The user must therefore ensure that these functions can be used at the same time.
10
Freewheel stop
Preset speeds
Jog operation
+/- speed (1)
PI regulator
Fast stop
DRIVECOM variables
Modbus address 8601
CANopen Read/ Code address Write 6040 CMDD R/W
Name/Description/Possible values DRIVECOM control word Identical to CMD (page 14). bit 0: "Switch on": active at 1 bit 1: "Disable Voltage": active at 0 bit 2: "Quick Stop": active at 0 bit 3: "Enable Operation": active at 1 bits 4 to 6: Reserved: set to 0 bit 7: Fault reset: active on rising edge 0 -> 1 bits 8 to 10: Reserved: set to 0 For "Access level" LAC (page 30) = L1 or L2: bit 11 = 0: Forward direction command bit 11 = 1: Reverse direction command bit 12 = 0: No action bit 12 = 1: Stop command depending on the Stt "Stop type" parameter bit 13 = 0: No action bit13 = 1: Injection stop command bit 14 = 0: No action bit14 = 1: Fast stop command bit 15: Reserved: set to 0 For "Access level" LAC (page 30) = L3: Factory assignments bit 11 = 0: Forward direction command bit 11 = 1: Reverse direction command bit 12 = 0: No action bit 12 = 1: Stop command depending on the Stt "Stop type" parameter bit 13: No action bit 14: No action bit 15: No action These 5 bits can be assigned to functions. For example, to use bit 15 to switch the ramp, simply set the "Ramp switching" rPS configuration parameter (page 33) to Cd15. Speed reference via the bus (signed value) DSP402: vl target velocity DRIVECOM: Nominal speed value Unit: 1 = 1 rpm if bit 9 of CMI (page 15) = 0 1 0.018 Hz (resolution 32767 points = 600 Hz) if bit 9 of CMI = 1 DRIVECOM status word Identical to ETA (page 16). bit 0: Ready to switch on bit 1: Switched on bit 2: Operation enabled bit 3 = 0: No fault bit 3 = 1: Malfunction, fault present (FAI) bit 4: Voltage disabled bit 5: Quick stop bit 6: Switch on disabled bit 7 = 0: No alarm bit 7 = 1: Alarm present bit 8: Reserved bit 9 = 0: Forced local mode in progress (FLO) bit 9 = 1: No forced local mode bit 10 = 0: Reference not reached (transient state) bit 10 = 1: Reference reached (steady state) bit 11 = 0: LFRD reference normal bit 11 = 1: LFRD reference exceeded (< LSP or > HSP) Caution: LFRD is expressed in rpm, LSP and HSP in Hz bits 12 and 13: Reserved bit 14 = 0: No stop imposed by STOP key on built-in keypad (ATV31...A) or on the remote display terminal bit 14 = 1: Stop imposed by STOP key on built-in keypad (ATV31...A) or on the remote display terminal bit 15 = 0: Forward rotation (output frequency) bit 15 = 1: Reverse rotation (output frequency)
8602
6042
LFRD R/W
8603
6041
ETAD R
11
DRIVECOM variables
Modbus address 8605
CANopen Read/ Code address Write 6043 FRHD R
Name/Description/Possible values Speed reference (signed ramp input) DSP402: vl velocity demand DRIVECOM: Reference speed variable Unit: 1 rpm Output speed (signed value) DSP402: vl control effort DRIVECOM: Actual speed value Unit: 1 = 1 rpm if bit 9 of CMI (page 15) = 0 1 0.018 Hz (resolution 32767 points = 600 Hz) if bit 9 of CMI = 1 Fault code DSP402: Error code DRIVECOM: Malfunction code 0000H = "nOF": No fault saved 1000H = "CrF": Capacitor pre-charge fault or = "OLF": Motor overload fault or = "SOF": Motor overspeed fault 2310H = "OCF": Overcurrent fault 2320H = "SCF": Impeding short-circuit fault or = "SCF": Power module fault, specific to ATV31pD15p 2330H = "SCF": Motor short-circuit fault (to earth) 2340H = "SCF": Motor short-circuit fault (phase to phase) 3110H = "OSF": Line supply overvoltage fault 3120H = "USF": Line supply undervoltage fault 3130H = "PHF": Line supply phase loss fault 3310H = "ObF": DC bus overvoltage fault or = "OPF": Motor phase loss fault or = "OPF": Motor phase loss fault - 3 phases 4210H = "OHF": Drive overheating fault 5520H = "EEF": EEPROM memory fault 6100H = "InF": Internal fault 6300H = "CFF": Configuration (parameters) incorrect or = "CFI": Configuration (parameters) invalid 7300H = "LFF": 4 - 20 mA fault on AI3 7510H = "SLF": Modbus communication fault 8100H = "COF": CANopen communication fault 9000H = "EPF": External fault FF00H = "tnF": Auto-tuning fault FF01H = "bLF": Brake control fault Min. speed DSP402: vl velocity min amount DRIVECOM: Speed min amount Low speed, equivalent to LSP (page 23), but in rpm Unit: 1 rpm 32-bit word (low order: 8607, high order: 8608) Adjustment range: 0 to HSP (page 23) Max. speed DSP402: vl velocity max amount DRIVECOM: Speed max amount High speed, equivalent to HSP (page 23), but in rpm Unit: 1 rpm 32-bit word (low order: 8609, high order: 8610) Adjustment range: LSP (page 23) to tFR (page 27) Acceleration - Speed delta Speed for calculation of acceleration ramp Unit: 1 rpm 32-bit word (low order: 8611, high order: 8612) Adjustment range: 1 to 65535 Acceleration - Time delta Time for calculation of acceleration ramp (time to go from 0 to SPAL) Unit: 1 s Adjustment range: 0 to 65535
8604
6044
RFRD R
8606
603F
ERRD R
8607 8608
6046 / 1
SMIL R/W
8609 8610
6046 / 2
SMAL R/W
8611 8612
6048 / 1
SPAL R/W
8613
6048 / 2
SPAT R/W
12
DRIVECOM variables
Modbus address 8614 8615
CANopen Read/ Code address Write 6049 / 1 SPDL R/W
Name/Description/Possible values Deceleration - Speed delta Speed for calculation of deceleration ramp Unit: 1 rpm 32-bit word (low order: 8614, high order: 8615) Adjustment range: 1 to 65535 Deceleration - Time delta Time for calculation of deceleration ramp (time to go from SPDL to 0) Unit: 1 s Adjustment range: 0 to 65535
8616
6049 / 2
SPDT R/W
13
Control variables
Modbus address 8501
CANopen address 2037 / 2
Code CMD
Read/ Write R/W
Name/Description/Possible values Control word bit 0: "Switch on": active at 1 bit 1: "Disable Voltage": active at 0 bit 2: "Quick Stop": active at 0 bit 3: "Enable Operation": active at 1 bits 4 to 6: Reserved: set to 0 bit 7: Fault reset: active on rising edge 0 -> 1 bits 8 to 10: Reserved: set to 0 For "Access level" LAC (page 30) = L1 or L2: bit 11 = 0: Forward direction command bit 11 = 1: Reverse direction command bit 12 = 0: No action bit 12 = 1: Stop command depending on the Stt "Stop type" parameter bit 13 = 0: No action bit13 = 1: Injection stop command bit 14 = 0: No action bit14 = 1: Fast stop command bit 15: Reserved: set to 0 For "Access level" LAC (page 30) = L3: Factory assignments bit 11 = 0: Forward direction command bit 11 = 1: Reverse direction command bit 12 = 0: No action bit 12 = 1: Stop command depending on the Stt "Stop type" parameter bit 13: No action bit 14: No action bit 15: No action These 5 bits can be assigned to functions. For example, to use bit 15 to switch the ramp, simply set the "Ramp switching" rPS configuration parameter (page 33) to Cd15. Frequency reference via the bus (signed value) Unit: 1 = 0.1 Hz if bit 9 of CMI (page 15) = 0 1 0.018 Hz (resolution 32767 points = 600 Hz) if bit 9 of CMI = 1 PI regulator reference via the bus Unit: 0.1% Adjustment range: 0 to 1000
8502
2037 / 3
LFr
R/W
8503
2037 / 4
PISP
R/W
14
Control variables
Modbus address 8504
Code CMI
Read/ Write R/W
Name/Description/Possible values Extended control word bit 0 = 0: No action bit 0 = 1: Recall factory settings command. This bit automatically resets to 0 when the request is taken into account. It is only active when the drive has come to a complete stop: ETI.4 = ETI.5 = 0. bit 1 = 0: No action bit 1 = 1: Save configuration/adjustments in EEPROM if voltage is sufficient (no USF fault). This bit automatically resets to 0 when the request is taken into account. During saving (ETI.0 = 1), parameters cannot be written. bits 2 and 3: Reserved bit 4 = 0: No action bit 4 = 1: Ramp switching command bits 4 to 8: Reserved bit 9 = 0: Normal resolution (references, output speed and ouput frequency in physical units: rpm and Hz) bit 9 = 1: High resolution (references, output speed and ouput frequency in 32767 points for 600 Hz) bits 10 to 12: Reserved bit 13 = 0: Drive not locked on standstill bit 13 = 1: Drive locked on standstill bit 14 = 0: Control with Modbus communication monitoring bit 14 = 1: Control with no Modbus communication monitoring (NTO) For safety reasons, inhibiting the Modbus communication fault (NTO) should be restricted to the debug phase or to special applications. bit 15 = 0: Parameter consistency check bit 15 = 1: No parameter consistency check + drive locked on standstill (switching this bit to 0 will revalidate all parameters) Value of logic I/O (0 = inactive, 1 = active) bits 0 to 7: Not accessible in write mode bit 8: Value of "R1" relay output, accessible in write mode if R1 is not assigned bit 9: Value of "R2" relay output, accessible in write mode if R2 is not assigned bit 10: Value of "LO" logic output, accessible in write mode if LO is not assigned bits 11 to 13: Reserved bit 14: Not accessible in write mode bit 15: Reserved Value of the analog output AO1R is accessible in write mode if dO (page 29) is not assigned Variation range: 0 to 10000 The value 10000 corresponds to 10V if AO1t = 10U, or to 20 mA if AO1t = OA or 4A (page 28)
5240
2016 / 29
IOLR R/W
5261
2016 / 3E
AO1R R/W
15
Monitoring variables
Modbus address 3201
Code ETA R
Read/ Write
Name/Description/Possible values Status word bit 0: Ready to switch on bit 1: Switched on bit 2: Operation enabled bit 3 = 0: No fault bit 3 = 1: Malfunction, fault present (FAI) bit 4: Voltage disabled (still equals 0) bit 5: Quick stop bit 6: Switch on disabled bit 7 = 0: No alarm bit 7 = 1: Alarm present bit 8: Reserved bit 9 = 0: Forced local mode in progress (FLO) bit 9 = 1: No forced local mode bit 10 = 0: Reference not reached (transient state) bit 10 = 1: Reference reached (steady state) bit 11 = 0: LFRD reference normal bit 11 = 1: LFRD reference exceeded (< LSP or > HSP) Caution: LFRD is expressed in rpm, LSP and HSP in Hz bits 12 and 13: Reserved bit 14 = 0: No stop imposed by STOP key on built-in keypad (ATV31...A) or on the remote display terminal bit 14 = 1: Stop imposed by STOP key on built-in keypad (ATV31...A) or on the remote display terminal bit 15 = 0: Forward rotation (output frequency) bit 15 = 1: Reverse rotation (output frequency) Output frequency applied to the motor (signed value) Unit: 1 = 0.1 Hz if bit 9 of CMI (page 15) = 0 1 0.018 Hz (resolution 32767 points = 600 Hz) if bit 9 of CMI = 1 Frequency reference before ramp (absolute value) Unit: 0.1 Hz Current in the motor Unit: 0.1 A Motor torque Unit: 1% 100% = Nominal motor torque, calculated using the configuration parameters. Motor power Unit: 1% 100% = Nominal motor power, calculated using the configuration parameters. Line voltage Unit: 0.1 V (gives the line voltage via the DC bus, motor running or stopped) Drive thermal state Unit: 1% 100% = Nominal thermal state 118% = "OHF" threshold (drive overheating) Max. thermal state reached by the drive Unit: 1% 100% = Nominal thermal state 118% = "OHF" threshold (drive overheating) Automatically reset to zero when the drive is powered down. Motor thermal state Unit: 1% 100% = Nominal thermal state 118% = "OLF" threshold (motor overload) Operating time Unit: 1 Hour Factory setting: 0 Adjustment range: 0 to 65535 Total time the motor has been powered up. Can be reset to zero by the rPr parameter (see page 48).
3202
2002 / 3
rFr
3203 3204 3205
2002 / 4 2002 / 8 2002 / 6
FrH LCr Otr
R R R
3211
2002 / C
OPr
3207
2002 / 5
ULn
3209
2002 / A
tHd
3210
2002 / B
TDM
9630
2042 / 1F
tHr
3231
2002 / 20
rtH
16
Modbus address 12002
CANopen Read/ Code address Write 205A / 3 USPL R
Name/Description/Possible values Motor speed in customer units - Low order Unit: 1 USPL/USPH = rFr x SdS on 32 bits (see pages 25 and 16). Motor speed in customer units - High order Unit: 1 USPL/USPH = rFr x SdS on 32 bits (see pages 25 and 16). Extended status word bit 0 = 0: Write parameters authorized bit 0 = 1: Write parameters not authorized (the drive is in the process of saving the current parameters from the RAM to the EEPROM) bit 1 = 0: No parameter consistency check + drive locked on standstill bit 1 = 1: Parameter consistency check bit 2 = 0: Fault reset not authorized bit 2 = 1: Fault reset authorized bit 3: Reserved bit 4 = 0: Motor stopped bit 4 = 1: Motor running bit 5 = 0: No DC injection bit 5 = 1: DC injection bit 6 = 0: Drive in steady state bit 6 = 1: Drive in transient state bit 7 = 0: No motor thermal overload alarm bit 7 = 1: Motor thermal overload alarm bit 8 = 0: No alarm if excessive braking bit 8 = 1: Alarm if excessive braking bit 9 = 0: Drive not accelerating bit 9 = 1: Drive accelerating bit 10 = 0: Drive not decelerating bit 10 = 1: Drive decelerating bit 11 = 0: No current limit alarm bit 11 = 1: Current limit alarm bit 12 = 0: Fast stop not in progress bit 12 = 1: Fast stop in progress bit 14 = 0 and bit 13 = 0: ATV controlled via terminal block or built-in keypad (ATV31....A) bit 14 = 0 and bit 13 = 1: ATV controlled via the remote display terminal bit 14 = 1 and bit 13 = 0: ATV controlled via ModBus bit 14 = 1 and bit 13 = 1: ATV controlled via CanOpen bit 15 = 0: Forward rotation requested (reference) bit 15 = 1: Reverse rotation requested (reference) Extended status word No. 1 bit 0: Reserved bit 1 = 0: No drive fault bit 1 = 1: Drive fault bit 2 = 0: Motor stopped bit 2 = 1: Motor running bit 3: Reserved bit 4 = 0: Frequency threshold (Ftd) not reached bit 4 = 1: Frequency threshold (Ftd) reached bit 5 = 0: High speed not reached bit 5 = 1: High speed reached bit 6 = 0: Current threshold (Ctd) not reached bit 6 = 1: Current threshold (Ctd) reached bit 7 = 0: Speed reference not reached bit 7 = 1: Speed reference reached bit 8 = 0: No motor thermal overload alarm bit 8 = 1: Motor thermal overload alarm bit 9 = 0: No brake control (brake engaged) bit 9 = 1: Brake control in progress (brake released) bits 10 and 11: Reserved bit 12 = 0: No loss of 4-20 mA fault bit 12 = 1: Loss of 4-20 mA fault bit 13: Reserved bit 14 = 0: No drive thermal overload alarm bit 14 = 1: Drive thermal overload alarm bit 15: Reserved
12003
205A / 4
USPH R
3206
2002 / 7
ETI
3250
2002 / 33
LRS1 R
17
Modbus address 3252
Code LRS3 R
Read/ Write
Name/Description/Possible values Extended status word No. 3 bit 0 = 0: The reference is given by Fr1 bit 0 = 1: The reference is given by Fr2 bit 1 = 0: The command is given by Fr1 or Cd1 bit 1 = 1: The command is given by Fr2 or Cd2 bit 2 = 0: ACC and DEC are used as ramp parameters bit 2 = 1: ACC2 and DEC2 are used as ramp parameters bit 3 = 0: CLI is used for current limiting bit 3 = 1: CL2 is used for current limiting bits 4 to 10: Reserved bit 11 = 0: Motor 1 is not used bit 11 = 1: Motor 1 is used bit 12 = 0: Motor 2 is not used bit 12 = 1: Motor 2 is used bits 13 to 15: Reserved Value of logic I/O (0 = inactive, 1 = active) bit 0: Value of logic input "LI1" bit 1: Value of logic input "LI2" bit 2: Value of logic input " LI3" bit 3: Value of logic input " LI4" bit 4: Value of logic input " LI5" bit 5: Value of logic input " LI6" bit 6: Reserved bit 7: Keypad presence: 0 = absent, 1 = present bit 8: Value of "R1" relay output, also accessible in write mode if R1 is not assigned bit 9: Value of "R2" relay output, also accessible in write mode if R2 is not assigned bit 10: Value of "LO" logic output, also accessible in write mode if LO is not assigned bit 11: Reserved bit 12: Reserved bit 13: Reserved bit 14: 0 = AOC/AOV logic output, 1 = AOC/AOV analog output bit 15: Reserved Value of analog input AIP (ATV31.A drive potentiometer) Unit: 1 mV Variation range: 0 to 10000 Value of analog input AI1 Unit: 1 mV Variation range: 0 to 10000 Value of analog input AI2 Unit: 1 mV Variation range: -10000 to 10000 Value of analog input AI3 Unit: 1 A Variation range: 0 to 20000 Value of the analog output AO1R is also accessible in write mode if dO (page 29) is not assigned Variation range: 0 to 10000 The value 10000 corresponds to 10V if AO1t = 10U, or to 20 mA if AO1t = OA or 4A (page 28)
5240
2016 / 29
IOLR R
5241
2016 / 2A
AIPC R
5242
2016 / 2B
AI1C
5243
2016 / 2C
AI2C
5244
2016 / 2D
AI3C
5261
2016 / 3E
AO1R R
18
Modbus address 7121
Code LFt R
Read/ Write
Name/Description/Possible values Last fault The fault remains saved even if the fault disappears, but LFt is reset after powering down the drive then powering up again. 0 = "nOF": No fault saved 3 = "CFF": Configuration (parameters) incorrect 4 = "CFI": Configuration (parameters) invalid 5 = "SLF": Modbus communication fault 8 = "EPF": External fault 9 = "OCF": Overcurrent fault 10 = "CrF": Capacitor pre-charge fault 13 = "LFF": 4 - 20 mA fault on AI3 16 = "OHF": Drive overheating fault 17 = "OLF": Motor overload fault 18 = "ObF": DC bus overvoltage fault 19 = "OSF": Line supply overvoltage fault 20 = "OPF": Motor phase loss fault 21 = "PHF": Line supply phase loss fault 22 = "USF": Line supply undervoltage fault 23 = "SCF": Motor short-circuit fault (phase to phase) 24 = "SOF": Motor overspeed fault 25 = "tnF": Auto-tuning fault 26 to 29 = "InF": Internal fault 30 = "EEF": EEPROM memory fault 31 = "SCF": Impeding short-circuit fault 32 = "SCF": Motor short-circuit fault (to earth) 33 = "OPF": Motor phase loss fault - 3 phases 34 = "COF": Communication fault line 2 (CANopen) 35 = "bLF": Brake control fault 36 = "SCF": Power module fault, specific to ATV31pD15p Past fault No. 1 (Same format as "LFt" page 19) Past fault No. 2 (Same format as "LFt" page 19) Past fault No. 3 (Same format as "LFt" page 19) Past fault No. 4 (Same format as "LFt" page 19)
7201 7202 7203 7204
202A / 2 202A / 3 202A / 4 202A / 5
DP1 DP2 DP3 DP4
R R R R
19
Modbus address 7211
CANopen address 202A / C
Code EP1 R
Read/ Write
Name/Description/Possible values Status of past fault No. 1 bit 0 = Same as ETA.1: - 0: Drive not ready - 1: Drive ready (RDY) bit 1 = Same as ETA.5: - 0: Emergency stop in progress - 1: No emergency stop bit 2 = Same as ETA.6: - 0: No SWITCH ON DISABLED status - 1: SWITCH ON DISABLED status bit 3 = Same as ETA.9: Reserved bit 4 = Same as ETA.15: - 0: Forward rotation (output frequency) - 1: Reverse rotation (output frequency) bit 5 = Same as ETI.4: - 0: Motor stopped - 1: Motor running bit 6 = Same as ETI.5: - 0: No DC injection - 1: DC injection bit 7 = Same as ETI.7: - 0: No motor thermal overload alarm - 1: Motor thermal overload alarm bit 8 = Same as ETI.8: Reserved bit 9 = Same as ETI.9: - 0: Drive not accelerating - 1: Drive accelerating bit 10 = Same as ETI.10: - 0: Drive not decelerating - 1: Drive decelerating bit 11 = Same as ETI.11: - 0: No current limit alarm - 1: Current limit alarm bit 12 = Same as ETI.12: Reserved bits 13 and 14 = Same as ETI.13 and ETI.14: - bit 14 = 0 and bit 13 = 0: ATV controlled via terminal block or built-in keypad (ATV31....A) - bit 14 = 0 and bit 13 = 1: ATV controlled via the remote display terminal - bit 14 = 1 and bit 13 = 0: ATV controlled via ModBus - bit 14 = 1 and bit 13 = 1: ATV controlled via CanOpen bit 15 = Same as ETI.15: - 0: Forward rotation requested (reference) - 1: Reverse rotation requested (reference) Status of past fault No. 2 (Same format as "EP1") Status of past fault No. 3 (Same format as "EP1") Status of past fault No. 4 (Same format as "EP1") CANopen: error word Unit: 1 Range: 0 to 4 0: "No error" 1: "Bus off error" 2: "Life time error" 3: "CAN overrun" 4: "Heartbeat error" Image of Modbus extended control word (received by the Modbus channel) Identical to CMI (page 15).
7212 7213 7214 6056
202A / D 202A / E 202A / F 201E / 39
EP2 EP3 EP4
R R R
ErCO R
8541
2037 / 2A
CMI1 R
20
Modbus address 8542
CANopen address 2037 / 2B
Code CMI2 R
Read/ Write
Name/Description/Possible values Image of CANopen extended control word (received by the CANopen channel) Identical to CMI (page 15). Image of Modbus frequency reference (received by the Modbus channel) Identical to LFr (page 14). Image of CANopen frequency reference (received by the CANopen channel) Identical to LFr (page 14). Image of Modbus speed reference Speed reference received by the Modbus channel Identical to LFRD (page 11) Image of CANopen speed reference Speed reference received by the CANopen channel Identical to LFRD (page 11) Image of Modbus PI reference (received by the Modbus channel) Identical to PISP (page 14). Image of CANopen PI reference (received by the CANopen channel) Identical to PISP (page 14).
8521
2037 / 16
LFR1 R
8522
2037 / 17
LFR2 R
8631
2038 / 20
LFD1 R
8632
2038 / 21
LFD2 R
8531
2037 / 20
PIR1
8532
2037 / 21
PIR2
21
Identification variables
Modbus address 3011
CANopen address 2000 / C
Code NCV R
Read/ Write
Name/Description/Possible values Drive rating 0 = unknown 1 = 018 (0.18 kW) 2 = 037 (0.37 kW) 3 = 055 (0.55 kW) 4 = 075 (0.75 kW) 5 = U11 (1.1 kW) 6 = U15 (1.5 kW) 7 = U22 (2.2 kW) 8 = U30 (3 kW) 9 = U40 (4 kW) 10 = U55 (5.5 kW) 11 = U75 (7.5 kW) 12 = D11 (11 kW) 13 = D15 (15 kW) Drive voltage 0 = unknown 1 = M2 (200...240 V single phase) 2 = M3X (200...240 V 3-phase) 3 = N4 (380...500 V 3-phase) 4 = S6X (525...600 V 3-phase) Nominal drive current Unit: 0.1 A Drive type 0 = unknown 1 = ATV31(drive without built-in keypad) 3 = ATV31(drive with built-in keypad) Drive firmware type The firmware type is specified by an ASCII letter "A": Standard firmware Drive firmware version Coded on 2 bytes. - low order byte: firmware upgrade index (UI) in hexadecimal format - high order byte: firmware version (V) in hexadecimal format Example : For V1.2 IE04, UdP = 16#1204
3012
2000 / D
VCAL R
3017 3010
2000 / 12 2000 / B
INV ZON
R R
3401
2004 / 2
TSP
3302
2000 / 4
UdP
22
Configuration and adjustment variables
Modbus address 3105
Code LSP
Read/ Write R/W
Name/Description/Possible values Low speed Unit: 0.1 Hz Factory setting: 0 Adjustment range: 0 to HSP (Motor frequency at min. reference) High speed Unit: 0.1 Hz Factory setting: if bFr = 50: 500, if bFr = 60: 600 Adjustment range: LSP to tFr (Motor frequency at max. reference): Ensure that this setting is suitable for the motor and the application. Motor thermal protection - max. thermal current Unit: 0.1 A Factory setting: According to drive rating Adjustment range: 0.2 to 1.5 In (1) Set ItH to the nominal current on the motor rating plate. Please refer to OLL on page 47 if you wish to suppress thermal protection. (1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive rating plate. IR compensation/Voltage boost Unit: 1% Factory setting: 20 Adjustment range: 0 to 100 - For UFt (page 27) = n or nLd: IR compensation - For UFt = L or P: Voltage boost Used to optimize torque at very low speed (increase UFr if the torque is insufficient). Check that the value of UFr is not too high for when the motor is warm (risk of instability). Modifying UFt (page 27) will cause UFr to return to the factory setting (20%). Frequency loop gain Unit: 1% Factory setting: 20 Adjustment range: 1 to 100 Parameter active only if UFt (page 27) = n or nLd. The FLG parameter adjusts the following of the speed ramp on the basis of the inertia of the machine being driven. Too high a gain may result in operating instability. Frequency loop stability Unit: 1% Factory setting: 20 Adjustment range: 1 to 100 Parameter active only if UFt (page 27) = n or nLd. Used to adapt the return to steady state after a speed transient (acceleration or deceleration), according to the dynamics of the machine. Gradually increase the stability to avoid any overspeed. Slip compensation Unit: 1% Factory setting: 100 Adjustment range: 0 to 150 Parameter active only if UFt (page 27) = n or nLd. Used to adjust the slip compensation value fixed by nominal motor speed. The speeds given on motor rating plates are not necessarily exact. If slip setting < actual slip: the motor is not rotating at the correct speed in steady state. If slip setting > actual slip: the motor is overcompensated and the speed is unstable. Skip frequency Unit: 0.1 Hz Factory setting: 0 Adjustment range: 0 to 5000 Prevents prolonged operation at a frequency range of 1 Hz around JPF. This function prevents a critical speed which leads to resonance. Setting the function to 0 renders it inactive.
3104
2001 / 5
HSP
R/W
9622
2042 / 17
ItH
R/W
9623
2042 / 18
UFr
R/W
9620
2042 / 15
FLG
R/W
9621
2042 / 16
StA
R/W
9625
2042 / 1A
SLP
R/W
11301
2053 / 2
JPF
R/W
23
Code JF2
Read/ Write R/W
Name/Description/Possible values 2 skip frequency Unit: 0.1 Hz Factory setting: 0 Adjustment range: 0 to 5000 Prevents prolonged operation at a frequency range of 1 Hz around JF2. This function prevents a critical speed which leads to resonance. Setting the function to 0 renders it inactive. Current limit Unit: 0.1 A Factory setting: 1.5 In (1) Adjustment range: 0.25 to 1.5 In (1) Used to limit the torque and the temperature rise of the motor. (1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive rating plate. Low speed operating time Unit: 0.1 s Factory setting: 0 (no time limit) Adjustment range: 0 to 9999 Following operation at LSP for a defined period, a motor stop is requested automatically. The motor restarts if the frequency reference is greater than LSP and if a run command is still present. Caution, value 0 corresponds to an unlimited time. Motor frequency threshold Unit: 0.1 Hz Factory setting: bFr Adjustment range: 0 to 5000 Motor frequency threshold above which the relay contact (R1 or R2 = FtA) closes or output AOV = 10 V (dO = StA) Motor thermal state threshold Unit: 1% Factory setting: 100 Adjustment range: 0 to 118 Motor thermal state threshold above which the relay contact (R1 or R2 = tSA) closes or output AOV = 10 V (dO = tSA) Motor current threshold Unit: 0.1 A Factory setting: In (1) Adjustment range: 0 to 1.5 In (1) Motor current threshold above which the relay contact (R1 or R2 = CtA) closes or output AOV = 10 V (dO = CtA) (1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive rating plate.
nd
9201
203E / 2
CLI
R/W
11701
2057 / 2
tLS
R/W
11003
2050 / 4
Ftd
R/WS
11002
2050 / 3
ttd
R/WS
11001
2050 / 2
Ctd
R/WS
24
CANopen address 205A / 2
Code SdS
Read/ Write R/W
Name/Description/Possible values USPL/USPH scale factor (USPL/USPH = rFr x SdS) See USPL/USPH page 17. Unit: 0.1 Factory setting: 300 Adjustment range: 1 to 2000 This parameter also affects the display parameter SPd1/SPd2/SPd3 in the SUP- menu (See Programming Manual) Standard motor frequency Factory setting: 0 0 = "50" 1 = "60" 50 Hz: IEC 60 Hz: NEMA This parameter modifies the presets of the following parameters: HSP page 23, Ftd page 24, FrS page 25 and tFr page 27. Nominal motor voltage given on the rating plate Unit: 1 V Factory setting: According to drive rating Adjustment range according to drive rating: ATV31ppp M2: 100 to 240 V ATV31ppp M3X: 100 to 240 V ATV31ppp N4: 100 to 500 V ATV31ppp S6X: 100 to 600 V Nominal motor frequency given on the rating plate Unit: 0.1 Hz Factory setting: if bFr = 50: 500 if bFr = 60: 600 Adjustment range: 100 to 5000 The ratio UnS (in volts) must not exceed the following values: FrS (in Hz)
3015
2000 / 10
bFr
R/WS
9601
2042 / 2
UnS
R/WS
9602
2042 / 3
FrS
R/WS
9603
2042 / 4
nCr
R/WS
ATV31ppp M2: 7 max. ATV31ppp M3X: 7 max. ATV31ppp N4: 14 max. ATV31ppp S6X: 17 max. Nominal motor current given on the rating plate Unit: 0.1 A Factory setting: According to drive rating Adjustment range: 0.25 to 1.5 In (1) (1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive rating plate.
25
Modbus address 9604
Code nSP
Read/ Write R/WS
Name/Description/Possible values Nominal motor speed given on the rating plate Unit: 1 rpm Factory setting: According to drive rating Adjustment range: 0 to 32767 RPM 0 to 9999 RPM then 10.00 to 32.76 KRPM If, rather than the nominal speed, the rating plate indicates the synchronous speed and the slip in Hz or as a %, calculate the nominal speed as follows: Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x or Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x or Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x 100 - slip as a % 100 50 - slip in Hz 50 60 - slip in Hz 60
(50 Hz motors) (60 Hz motors)
9606
2042 / 7
COS
R/WS
9643
2042 / 2C
rSC
R/WS
Motor Cos Phi given on the rating plate Unit: 0.01 Factory setting: According to drive rating Adjustment range: 50 to 100 Cold state stator resistance Factory setting: 0 0 = "nO": Function inactive. For applications which do not require high performance or do not tolerate automatic auto-tuning (passing a current through the motor) each time the drive is powered up. 1 = "InIt": Activates the function. To improve low-speed performance whatever the thermal state of the motor. >1 =" XXXX" XXXX: Value of cold state stator resistance used, in m. Caution: It is strongly recommended that this function is activated for Lifting and Handling applications. The function should be activated (InIt) only when the motor is in cold state. When rSC = InIt, parameter tUn is forced to POn. At the next run command or the next power-up, the stator resistance is measured with an auto-tune. Parameter rSC then changes to this value (XXXX) and maintains it; tUn remains forced to POn. Parameter rSC remains at InIt as long as the measurement has not been performed. Value XXXX can be forced or changed using the keys. XXXX corresponds to half the resistance measured between 2 phases.
9608
2042 / 9
tUn
R/WO
Motor control auto-tuning Factory setting: 0 It is essential that all the motor parameters (UnS, FrS, nCr, nSP, COS) are correctly configured before performing the auto-tuning. 0 = "nO": Auto-tuning not performed. 112 = "YES": Auto-tuning is performed as soon as possible, then the parameter automatically switches to dOnE or nO in the event of a fault (the tnF fault is displayed if tnL = YES, see page 48). 113 = "dOnE": Use of the values given the last time auto-tuning was performed. 114 = "rUn": Auto-tuning is performed every time a run command is sent. 115 = "POn": Auto-tuning is performed on every power-up. 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 LI1 to LI6: Auto-tuning is performed on the transition from 0 V 1 of a logic input assigned to this function. Caution: tUn is forced to POn if rSC is other than nO. Auto-tuning is only performed if no command has been activated. If a "freewheel stop" or "fast stop" function has been assigned to a logic input, this input must be set to 1 (active at 0). Auto-tuning may last for 1 to 2 seconds. Do not interrupt; wait for the display to change to "dOnE" or "nO". During auto-tuning the motor operates at nominal current.
26
Modbus address 9609
CANopen address 2042 / A
Code tUS R
Read/ Write
Name/Description/Possible values Auto-tuning status Factory setting: 0 0 =" tAb": The default stator resistance value is used to control the motor. 1 = "PEnd": Auto-tuning has been requested but not yet performed. 2 = "PrOG": Auto-tuning in progress. 3 = "FAIL": Auto-tuning has failed. 4 = "dOnE": The stator resistance measured by the auto-tuning function is used to control the motor. 5 = "Strd": The cold state stator resistance (rSC other than nO) is used to control the motor. Selection of the type of voltage/frequency ratio Factory setting: 2 0 = "L": Constant torque for motors connected in parallel or special motors 1 = "P": Variable torque for pump and fan applications 2 = "n": Sensorless flux vector control for constant torque applications 3 = "nLd": Energy saving, for variable torque applications not requiring high dynamics (behaves in a similar way to the P ratio at no load and the n ratio on load). Random switching frequency Factory setting: 1 0 = "nO": Fixed frequency 1 = "YES": Frequency with random modulation Random frequency modulation prevents any resonance which may occur at a fixed frequency. Switching frequency Unit: 0.1 kHz Factory setting: 40 Adjustment range: 20 to 160 The frequency can be adjusted to reduce the noise generated by the motor. If the frequency has been set to a value higher than 4 kHz, in the event of excessive temperature rise, the drive will automatically reduce the switching frequency and increase it again once the temperature has returned to normal. Maximum output frequency Unit: 0.1 Hz Factory setting: if BFR = 50: 600 if BFR = 60: 720 Adjustment range: 100 to 5000 Suppression of the speed loop filter Factory setting: 0 0 = "nO": The speed loop filter is active (prevents the reference being exceeded). 1 = "YES": The speed loop filter is suppressed (in position control applications, this reduces the response time and the reference may be exceeded). Saving the configuration Factory setting: 0 0 = "nO": Function inactive 2 = "Str1": Saves the current configuration (but not the result of auto-tuning) to EEPROM. SCS automatically switches to nO as soon as the save has been performed. This function is used to keep another configuration in reserve, in addition to the current configuration. When drives leave the factory the current configuration and the backup configuration are both initialized with the factory configuration. If the remote display terminal option is connected to the drive, the following additional selection options will appear: 11 = "FIL1" 12 = "FIL2" 13 = "FIL3" 14 = "FIL4" FIL1, FIL2, FIL3, FIL4 are files available in the remote display terminals EEPROM memory for saving the current configuration. They can be used to store between 1 and 4 different configurations which can also be stored on or even transferred to other drives of the same rating. SCS automatically switches to nO as soon as the save has been performed.
9607
2042 / 8
UFt
R/WS
3107
2001 / 8
nrd
R/WS
3102
2001 / 3
SFr
R/W
3103
2001 / 4
tFr
R/WS
9101
203D / 2
SrF
R/WS
8001
2032 / 2
SCS
R/WS
27
Modbus address 8002
Code FCS
Read/ Write R/WS
Name/Description/Possible values Return to factory settings/Restore configuration Factory setting: 0 0 = "nO": Function inactive 2 = "rEC1": The current configuration becomes identical to the backup configuration previously saved by SCS = StrI. rECI is only visible if the backup has been carried out. FCS automatically changes to nO as soon as this action has been performed. 64 = "InI": The current configuration becomes identical to the factory setting. FCS automatically changes to nO as soon as this action has been performed. If the remote display terminal option is connected to the drive, the following additional selection options appear, as long as the corresponding files have been loaded in the remote display terminals EEPROM memory (0 to 4 files): 11 = "FIL1": display terminal file 1 not empty 12 = "FIL2": display terminal file 2 not empty 13 = "FIL3": display terminal file 3 not empty 14 = "FIL4": display terminal file 4 not empty They enable the current configuration to be replaced with one of the 4 configurations that may be loaded on the remote display terminal. FCS automatically changes to nO as soon as this action has been performed. 2-wire/3-wire control (Type of control) Factory setting: 0 except for ATV31ppp A: 2 Control configuration: 0 = "2C" = 2-wire control: The open or closed state of the input controls running or stopping. 1 = "3C" = 3-wire control (pulse control): A "forward" or "reverse" pulse is sufficient to control starting, a "stop" pulse is sufficient to control stopping. 2 = "LOC "= local control (drive RUN/STOP/RESET) for ATV31ppp A only (inactive if LAC = L3, see page 30). Changing the assignment of tCC returns the following functions to their factory setting: rrS, tCt and all functions affecting logic inputs. Type of 2-wire control (parameter active only if tCC = 2C) Factory setting: 1 0 = "LEL ": State 0 or 1 is taken into account for run or stop. 1 = "trn": A change of state (transition or edge) is necessary to initiate operation, in order to prevent accidental restarts after a break in the power supply. 2 = "PFO": State 0 or 1 is taken into account for run or stop, but the "forward" input always takes priority over the "reverse" input. Reverse operation via logic input Factory setting: - if tCC = 0: 130 - if tCC = 1: 131 - if tCC = 2: 0 If rrS = nO, reverse operation is active, by means of negative voltage on AI2 for example. 0 = "nO": Not assigned 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 Value for low speed (LSP) on input AI3 Unit: 0.1 mA Factory setting: 40 Adjustment range: 0 to 200 CrL3 and CrH3 are used to configure the input for 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA, 20-4 mA, etc. Value for high speed (HSP) on input AI3 Unit: 0.1 mA Factory setting: 200 Adjustment range: 40 to 200 CrL3 and CrH3 are used to configure the input for 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA, 20-4 mA, etc. Configuration of the analog output Factory setting: 2 1 = "10U": 0 - 10 V configuration (use terminal AOV) 2 = "0A": 0 - 20 mA configuration (use terminal AOC) 3 = "4A": 4 - 20 mA configuration (use terminal AOC)
11101
2051 / 2
tCC
R/WS
11102
2051 / 3
tCt
R/WS
11105
2051 / 6
rrS
R/WS
4434
200E / 23
CrL3
R/WS
4444
200E / 2D
CrH3 R/WS
4601
2010 / 2
AO1t R/WS
28
Modbus address 5031
Code dO
Read/ Write R/WS
Name/Description/Possible values Analog/logic output AOC/AOV Factory setting: 0 0 = "nO": Not assigned For the following assignments the output is analog type: 129 = "OCr": Motor current. 20 mA or 10 V corresponds to twice the nominal drive current. 130 = "OFr": Motor frequency. 20 mA or 10 V corresponds to the maximum frequency tFr (page 27). 132 = "Otr": Motor torque. 20 mA or 10 V corresponds to twice the nominal motor torque. 139 = "OPr": Power supplied by the drive. 20 mA or 10 V corresponds to twice the nominal drive power. For the following assignments the output is logic type (see diagram in the Installation Manual): With these assignments, configure AO1t = 0A. 1 = "FLt": Drive fault 2 = "rUn": Drive running 4 = "FtA": Frequency threshold reached (Ftd parameter page 24) 5 = "FLA": High speed (HSP) reached 6 = "CtA": Current threshold reached (Ctd parameter page 24) 7 = "SrA": Frequency reference reached 8 = "tSA": Motor thermal threshold reached (ttd parameter page 24) 9 = "bLC": Brake sequence (for information, as this assignment can be only be activated or deactivated via the bLC parameter page 42) 12 = "APL": Loss of 4-20 mA signal, even if LFL = nO (page 48) The logic output is in state 1 (24 V) when the selected assignment is active, with the exception of FLt (state 1 if the drive is not faulty). Relay r1 Factory setting: 1 0 = "nO": Not assigned 1 = "FLt": Drive fault 2 = "rUn": Drive running 4= "FtA": Frequency threshold reached (Ftd parameter page 24) 5 = "FLA": High speed (HSP) reached 6 = "CtA": Current threshold reached (Ctd parameter page 24) 7 = "SrA": Frequency reference reached 8 = "tSA": Motor thermal threshold reached (ttd parameter page 24) 12 = "APL": Loss of 4-20 mA signal, even if LFL = nO (page 48) The relay is powered up when the selected assignment is active, with the exception of FLt (powered up if the drive is not faulty). Relay r2 Factory setting: 0 0 = "nO": Not assigned 1 = "FLt": Drive fault 2 = "rUn": Drive running 4 = "FtA": Frequency threshold reached (Ftd parameter page 24) 5 = "FLA": High speed (HSP) reached 6 = "CtA": Current threshold reached (Ctd parameter page 24) 7 = "SrA": Frequency reference reached 8 = "tSA": Motor thermal threshold reached (ttd parameter page 24) 9 = "bLC": Brake sequence (for information, as this assignment can be only be activated or deactivated via the bLC parameter page 42) 12 = "APL": Loss of 4-20 mA signal, even if LFL = nO (page 48) The relay is powered up when the selected assignment is active, with the exception of FLt (powered up if the drive is not faulty).
5001
2014 / 2
r1
R/WS
5002
2014 / 3
r2
R/WS
29
Modbus address 3006
Code LAC
Read/ Write R/WS
Name/Description/Possible values Function access level Factory setting: 0 0 = "L1": Access to standard functions. Significantly, this level is interchangeable with ATV28. 1 = "L2": Access to advanced functions: - +/- speed (motorized potentiometer) - Brake control - Switching for second current limit - Motor switching - Management of limit switches 2 = L3: Access to advanced functions and management of mixed control modes. Assigning LAC to L3 will restore the factory settings of the Fr1 (below), Cd1 (page 31), CHCF (page 31), and tCC (page 28) parameters. The latter is forced to "2C" on ATV31 pppA. L3 can only be restored to L2 or L1 and L2 to L1 by means of a "factory setting" via FCS (page 28). Configuration reference 1 Factory setting: 1 except for ATV31pppp A: 16 1 = "AI1": Analog input AI1 2 = "AI2": Analog input AI2 3 = "AI3": Analog input AI3 16 = "AIP": Potentiometer (ATV31pppA only) If LAC = L2 or L3, the following additional assignments are possible: 160 = "UPdt": (1) + speed/- speed via LI 161 = "UpdH": (1) + speed/- speed via keys r on the ATV31 or ATV31pppA keypad or remote display terminal. For operation, display the frequency rFr (see page 16) If LAC = L3, the following additional assignments are possible: 163 = "LCC": Reference via the remote display terminal, LFr parameter page 14. 164 = "Mdb": Reference via Modbus 167 = "CAn": Reference via CANopen (1) Caution, you cannot assign UPdt to Fr1 or Fr2 and UPdH to Fr1 or Fr2 at the same time. Only one of the UPdt/UPdH assignments is permitted on each reference channel. Configuration reference 2 Factory setting: 0 0 = "nO": Not assigned 1 = "AI1": Analog input AI1 2 = "AI2": Analog input AI2 3 = "AI3": Analog input AI3 16 = "AIP": Potentiometer (ATV31pppA only) If LAC = L2 or L3, the following additional assignments are possible: 160 = "UPdt": (1) + speed/- speed via LI 161 = "UpdH": (1) + speed/- speed via keys r on the ATV31 or ATV31pppA keypad or remote display terminal. For operation, display the frequency rFr (see page 16) If LAC = L3, the following additional assignments are possible: 163 = "LCC": Reference via the remote display terminal, LFr parameter page 14. 164 = "Mdb": Reference via Modbus 167 = "CAn": Reference via CANopen (1) Caution, you cannot assign UPdt to Fr1 or Fr2 and UPdH to Fr1 or Fr2 at the same time. Only one of the UPdt/UPdH assignments is permitted on each reference channel.
r r
8413
2036 / E
Fr1
R/WS
8414
2036 / F
Fr2
R/WS
30
Modbus address 8411
CANopen address 2036 / C
Code rFC
Read/ Write R/WS
Name/Description/Possible values Reference switching Factory setting: 96 Parameter rFC can be used to select channel Fr1 or Fr2 or to configure a logic input or a control bit for remote switching of Fr1 or Fr2. 96 = "Fr1": Reference = Reference 1 97 = "Fr2": Reference = Reference 2 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following additional assignments are possible: 187 188 189 190 191 203 205 206 207 = "C111": bit 11 of the CMD control word (page = "C112": bit 12 of the CMD control word (page = "C113": bit 13 of the CMD control word (page = "C114": bit 14 of the CMD control word (page = "C115": bit 15 of the CMD control word (page = "C211": bit 11 of the CMD control word (page = "C213": bit 13 of the CMD control word (page = "C214": bit 14 of the CMD control word (page = "C215": bit 15 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by Modbus Modbus Modbus Modbus Modbus CANopen CANopen CANopen CANopen
The reference can be switched with the drive running. Fr1 is active when the logic input or control word bit is at state 0. Fr2 is active when the logic input or control word bit is at state 1. Switching channel may result in a change of direction of motor rotation. 8401 2036 / 2 CHCF R/WS Mixed mode (control channels separated from reference channels) Factory setting: 1 Active if LAC = L3 1 = "SIM": Combined 2 = "SEP": Separate Configuration of control channel 1 Factory setting: 1 except for ATV31ppp A: 2 Active if CHCF = SEP and LAC = L3 1 = "tEr": Terminal block control 2 = "LOC": Keypad control (ATV31pppA only) 3 = "LCC": Remote display terminal control 10 = "Mdb": Control via Modbus 20 = "CAn": Control via CAN Configuration of control channel 2 Factory setting: 10 Active if CHCF = SEP and LAC = L3 1 = "tEr": Terminal block control 2 = "LOC": Keypad control (ATV31pppA only) 3 = "LCC": Remote display terminal control 10 = "Mdb": Control via Modbus 20 = "CAn": Control via CAN
8423
2036 / 18
Cd1
R/WS
8424
2036 / 19
Cd2
R/WS
31
Modbus address 8421
Code CCS
Read/ Write R/WS
Name/Description/Possible values Control channel switching Factory setting: 98 Active if CHCF = SEP and LAC = L3 Parameter CCS can be used to select channel Cd1 or Cd2 or to configure a logic input or a control bit for remote switching of Cd1 or Cd2. 98 = "Cd1": Control channel = Channel 1 99 = "Cd2": Control channel = Channel 2 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 187 = "C111": bit 11 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by Modbus 188 = "C112": bit 12 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by Modbus 189 = "C113": bit 13 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by Modbus 190 = "C114": bit 14 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by Modbus 191 = "C115": bit 15 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by Modbus 203 = "C211": bit 11 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by CANopen 204 = "C212": bit 12 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by CANopen 205 = "C213": bit 13 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by CANopen 206 = "C214": bit 14 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by CANopen 207 = "C215": bit 15 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by CANopen Channel 1 is active when the input or control word bit is at state 0. Channel 2 is active when the input or control word bit is at state 1. Switching channel may result in a change of direction of motor rotation.
8402
2036 / 3
COP
R/WS
Copy channel 1 to channel 2 Factory setting: 0 Active if LAC = L3 Copying is only performed from channel 1 to channel 2. 0 = "nO": No copy 1 = "SP": Copy reference 2 = "Cd": Copy control 3 = "ALL": Copy control and reference Exceptions: If channel 2 is controlled via the terminal block (2-wire or 3-wire control), channel 1 control is not copied. If channel 2 reference is set via analog input (AI1, AI2, AI3 or AIP), channel 1 reference is not copied. Reference copied: If channel 2 is the +/- speed type, the output frequency applied to the motor (rFr) is copied. In other cases (built-in keypad, remote display terminal or communication bus), the reference before ramp (FrH) is copied. Note: If channel 2 is a communication bus, the copy is "overwritten" as soon as a new control or reference is received by the bus. Control via remote display terminal Factory setting: 0 Parameter active only with the remote display terminal option and if LAC = L1 or L2. 0 = "nO": Function inactive 1 = "YES": Enables control of the drive using the STOP/RESET, RUN and FWD/REV buttons on the display terminal. The speed reference is then given by parameter LFr page 14. Only the freewheel, fast stop and DC injection stop commands remain active on the terminal block. If the drive/terminal connection is cut or if the terminal has not been connected, the drive locks in an SLF fault. Stop priority Factory setting: 1 This function gives priority to the STOP key on the keypad (ATV31 pppA only) or the STOP key on the remote display terminal, regardless of the control channel (terminal block or communication bus). 0 = "nO": Function inactive 1 = "YES": STOP key priority
64003
2262 / 4
LCC
R/WS
64002
2262 / 3
PSt
R/WS
32
Code rOt
Read/ Write R/WS
Name/Description/Possible values Direction of operation authorized Factory setting: 0 Direction of operation authorized for the RUN key on the keypad (ATV31ppp A only) or the RUN key on the remote display terminal. 0 = "dFr": Forward 1 = "drS": Reverse 2 = "bOt": Both directions are authorized (except for the keypad on the ATV31ppp A: Forward only). Type of ramp Defines the shape of the acceleration and deceleration ramps. Factory setting: 0 0 = "LIn": Linear 1 = "S": S ramp 2 = "U": U ramp 3 = "CUS": Customized Start of CUS-type acceleration ramp rounded Unit: 1% (as % of total ramp time ACC or AC2) Factory setting: 10 Adjustment range: 0 to 100 End of CUS-type acceleration ramp rounded Unit: 1% (as % of total ramp time ACC or AC2) Factory setting: 10 Adjustment range: 0 to 100 - tA1 Start of CUS-type deceleration ramp rounded Unit: 1% (as % of total ramp time dEC or dE2) Factory setting: 10 Adjustment range: 0 to 100 End of CUS-type deceleration ramp rounded Unit: 1% (as % of total ramp time dEC or dE2) Factory setting: 10 Adjustment range: 0 to 100 - tA3 Acceleration ramp time Unit: 0.1 s Factory setting: 30 Adjustment range: 1 to 9999 Defined for accelerating between 0 and the nominal frequency FrS (page 25). Deceleration ramp time Unit: 0.1 s Factory setting: 30 Adjustment range: 1 to 9999 Defined for decelerating between the nominal frequency FrS (page 25) and 0. Check that the value of dEC is not too low in relation to the load to be stopped. Ramp switching Factory setting: 0 This function remains active regardless of the control channel. 0 = "nO": Not assigned 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: 171 172 173 174 175 = "Cd11": bit 11 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd12": bit 12 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd13": bit 13 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd14": bit 14 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd15": bit 15 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen
9004
203C / 5
rPt
R/WS
9005
203C / 6
tA1
R/W
9006
203C / 7
tA2
R/W
9007
203C / 8
tA3
R/W
9008
203C / 9
tA4
R/W
9001
203C / 2
ACC
R/W
9002
203C / 3
dEC
R/W
9010
203C / B
rPS
R/WS
ACC and dEC are enabled when the logic input or control word bit is at state 0. AC2 and dE2 are enabled when the logic input or control word bit is at state 1.
33
Modbus address 9011
CANopen address 203C / C
Code Frt
Read/ Write R/WS
Name/Description/Possible values Ramp switching threshold Unit: 0.1 Hz Factory setting: 0 Adjustment range: 0 to 5000 The second ramp is switched if the value of Frt is not equal to 0 (0 deactivates the function) and the output frequency is greater than Frt. Threshold ramp switching can be combined with switching via LI or bit as follows: LI or bit 0 0 1 1 Frequency <Frt >Frt <Frt >Frt Ramp ACC, dEC AC2, dE2 AC2, dE2 AC2, dE2
9012
203C / D
AC2
R/W
9013
203C / E
dE2
R/W
9003
203C / 4
brA
R/WS
11201
2052 / 2
Stt
R/WS
11204
2052 / 5
FSt
R/WS
2nd acceleration ramp time Unit: 0.1 s Factory setting: 50 Adjustment range: 1 to 9999 Enabled via logic input (rPS) or frequency threshold (Frt). 2nd deceleration ramp time Unit: 0.1 s Factory setting: 50 Adjustment range: 1 to 9999 Enabled via logic input (rPS) or frequency threshold (Frt). Deceleration ramp adaptation Factory setting: 1 Activating this function automatically adapts the deceleration ramp, if this has been set at too low a value for the inertia of the load. 0 = "nO": Function inactive 1 = "YES": Function active. The function is incompatible with applications requiring: - positioning on a ramp - the use of a braking resistor (no guarantee of the function operating correctly) brA is forced to nO if brake control bLC is assigned (page 42). Normal stop mode Factory setting: 0 Stop mode on disappearance of the run command or appearance of a stop command. 0 = "rMP": On ramp 1 = "FSt": Fast stop 2 = "nSt": Freewheel stop 3 = "dCI": DC injection stop Fast stop via logic input Factory setting: 0 0 = "nO": Not assigned 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: 171 172 173 174 175 = "Cd11": bit 11 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd12": bit 12 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd13": bit 13 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd14": bit 14 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd15": bit 15 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen
The stop is activated when the logic state of the input changes to 0 and the control word bit changes to 1. The fast stop is a stop on a reduced ramp via parameter dCF. If the input falls back to state 1 and the run command is still active, the motor will only restart if 2-wire level control has been configured (tCC = 2C and tCt = LEL or PFO, see page 28). In other cases, a new run command must be sent.
34
CANopen address 2052 / 1F
Code dCF
Read/ Write R/WS
Name/Description/Possible values Coefficient for dividing the deceleration ramp time for fast stopping Unit: 1 Factory setting: 4 Adjustment range: 0 to 10 Ensure that the reduced ramp is not too low in relation to the load to be stopped. The value 0 corresponds to the minimum ramp. DC injection via logic input Factory setting: 0 0 = "nO": Not assigned 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: 171 172 173 174 175 = "Cd11": bit 11 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd12": bit 12 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd13": bit 13 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd14": bit 14 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd15": bit 15 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen
11203
2052 / 4
dCI
R/WS
11210
2052 / B
IdC
R/W
11211
2052 / C
tdC
R/W
11202
2052 / 3
nSt
R/WS
Braking is activated when the logic state of the input or control word bit is at 1. Level of DC injection braking current activated via logic input or selected as stop mode Caution: This setting is not related to the "automatic standstill DC injection" function. Unit: 0.1 A Factory setting: 0.7 In (1) Adjustment range: 0 to In (1) After 5 seconds the injection current is peak limited at 0.5 Ith if it is set at a higher value. (1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive rating plate. Total DC injection braking time selected as normal stop mode Caution: This setting is not related to the "automatic standstill DC injection" function. Unit: 0.1 s Factory setting: 5 Adjustment range: 1 to 300 Freewheel stop via logic input Factory setting: 0 0 = "nO": Not assigned 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 The stop is activated when the logic state of the input is at 0. If the input falls back to state 1 and the run command is still active, the motor will only restart if 2-wire level control has been configured. In other cases, a new run command must be sent. Automatic standstill DC injection (at the end of the ramp) Factory setting: 1 0 = "nO": No injection 1 = "YES": Standstill injection for adjustable period 2 = "Ct": Continuous standstill injection This parameter gives rise to the injection of current even if a run command has not been sent.
10401
204A / 2
AdC
R/W
35
CANopen address 204A / 3
Code tdC1
Read/ Write R/W
Name/Description/Possible values Automatic standstill DC injection time Unit: 0.1 s Factory setting: 50 Adjustment range: 1 to 300 Level of automatic standstill DC injection current Unit: 0.1 A Factory setting: 0.7 In (1) Adjustment range: 0 to 1.2 In (1) Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating. (1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive rating plate. 2nd automatic standstill DC injection time Unit: 0.1 s Factory setting: 0 Adjustment range: 0 to 300 2nd level of standstill DC injection current Unit: 0.1 A Factory setting: 0.5 In (1) Adjustment range: 0 to 1.2 In (1) Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating. (1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive rating plate. Summing input 2 Factory setting: 2 Can be used to sum one or two inputs to reference Fr1 only. 0 = "nO": Not assigned 1 = "AI1": Analog input AI1 2 = "AI2": Analog input AI2 3 = "AI3": Analog input AI3 16 = "AIP": Potentiometer (type A drives only) If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: 163 = "LCC": Reference via the remote display terminal, LFr parameter in the SEt- menu page 14. 164 = "Mdb": Reference via Modbus 167 = "CAn": Reference via CANopen Summing input 3 Factory setting: 0 Can be used to sum one or two inputs to reference Fr1 only. 0 = "nO": Not assigned 1 = "AI1": Analog input AI1 2 = "AI2": Analog input AI2 3 = "AI3": Analog input AI3 16 = "AIP": Potentiometer (type A drives only) If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: 163 = "LCC": Reference via the remote display terminal, LFr parameter in the SEt- menu page 14. 164 = "Mdb": Reference via Modbus 167 = "CAn": Reference via CANopen
10403
204A / 4
SdC1 R/W
10404
204A / 5
tdC2
R/W
10405
204A / 6
SdC2 R/W
11801
2058 / 2
SA2
R/WS
11802
2058 / 3
SA3
R/WS
36
Code PS2
Read/ Write R/WS
Name/Description/Possible values 2 preset speeds Factory setting: if tCC = 1: 0 if tCC = 0 or 2: 131 Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. 0 = "nO": Not assigned 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: 171 = "Cd11": bit 11 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by 172 = "Cd12": bit 12 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by 173 = "Cd13": bit 13 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by 174 = "Cd14": bit 14 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by 175 = "Cd15": bit 15 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by 4 preset speeds Factory setting: if tCC = 1: 0 if tCC = 0 or 2: 132 Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. Check that PS2 has been assigned before assigning PS4. 0 = "nO": Not assigned 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: 171 = "Cd11": bit 11 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by 172 = "Cd12": bit 12 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by 173 = "Cd13": bit 13 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by 174 = "Cd14": bit 14 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by 175 = "Cd15": bit 15 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by 8 preset speeds Factory setting: 0 Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. Check that PS4 has been assigned before assigning PS8. 0 = "nO": Not assigned 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: 171 172 173 174 175 = "Cd11": bit 11 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd12": bit 12 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd13": bit 13 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd14": bit 14 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd15": bit 15 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen
11402
2054 / 3
PS4
R/WS
11403
2054 / 4
PS8
R/WS
37
Read/ Write PS16 R/WS Code
Name/Description/Possible values 16 preset speeds Factory setting: 0 Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. Check that PS8 has been assigned before assigning PS16. 0 = "nO": Not assigned 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: 171 = "Cd11": bit 11 of the CMD control word (page 172 = "Cd12": bit 12 of the CMD control word (page 173 = "Cd13": bit 13 of the CMD control word (page 174 = "Cd14": bit 14 of the CMD control word (page 175 = "Cd15": bit 15 of the CMD control word (page 2nd preset speed Unit: 0.1 Hz Factory setting: 100 Adjustment range: 0 to 5000 3rd preset speed Unit: 0.1 Hz Factory setting: 150 Adjustment range: 0 to 5000 4th preset speed Unit: 0.1 Hz Factory setting: 200 Adjustment range: 0 to 5000 5th preset speed Unit: 0.1 Hz Factory setting: 250 Adjustment range: 0 to 5000 6th preset speed Unit: 0.1 Hz Factory setting: 300 Adjustment range: 0 to 5000 7th preset speed Unit: 0.1 Hz Factory setting: 350 Adjustment range: 0 to 5000 8th preset speed Unit: 0.1 Hz Factory setting: 400 Adjustment range: 0 to 5000 9th preset speed Unit: 0.1 Hz Factory setting: 450 Adjustment range: 0 to 5000 10 th preset speed Unit: 0.1 Hz Factory setting: 500 Adjustment range: 0 to 5000 11 th preset speed Unit: 0.1 Hz Factory setting: 550 Adjustment range: 0 to 5000 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen
11410
2054 / B
SP2
R/W
11411
2054 / C
SP3
R/W
11412
2054 / D
SP4
R/W
11413
2054 / E
SP5
R/W
11414
2054 / F
SP6
R/W
11415
2054 / 10
SP7
R/W
11416
2054 / 11
SP8
R/W
11417
2054 / 12
SP9
R/W
11418
2054 / 13
SP10 R/W
11419
2054 / 14
SP11 R/W
38
Read/ Write SP12 R/W Code
Name/Description/Possible values 12 preset speed Unit: 0.1 Hz Factory setting: 600 Adjustment range: 0 to 5000 13 th preset speed Unit: 0.1 Hz Factory setting: 700 Adjustment range: 0 to 5000 14 th preset speed Unit: 0.1 Hz Factory setting: 800 Adjustment range: 0 to 5000 15 th preset speed Unit: 0.1 Hz Factory setting: 900 Adjustment range: 0 to 5000 16 th preset speed Unit: 0.1 Hz Factory setting: 1000 Adjustment range: 0 to 5000 Jog operation Factory setting: if tCC = 0 or 2: 0 if tCC = 1: 132 Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. 0 = "nO": Not assigned 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 Jog operation reference Unit: 0.1 Hz Factory setting: 100 Adjustment range: 0 to 100 + speed (motorized potentiometer) Factory setting: 0 Function active only if LAC = L2 or L3 and UPdt has been selected (see page 30). Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. 0 = "nO": Not assigned 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 - speed (motorized potentiometer) Factory setting: 0 Function active only if LAC = L2 or L3 and UPdt has been selected (see page 30). Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. 0 = "nO": Not assigned 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6
th
11421
2054 / 16
SP13 R/W
11422
2054 / 17
SP14 R/W
11423
2054 / 18
SP15 R/W
11424
2054 / 19
SP16 R/W
11110
2051 / B
JOG
R/WS
11111
2051 / C
JGF
R/W
11501
2055 / 2
USP
R/WS
11502
2055 / 3
dSP
R/WS
39
Code Str
Read/ Write R/WS
Name/Description/Possible values Save reference Factory setting: 0 Associated with the "+/- speed" function, this parameter can be used to save the reference: - When the run commands disappear (saved to RAM) - When the line supply or the run commands disappear (saved to EEPROM) On the next start-up, the speed reference is the last reference saved. 0 = "nO": No save 1 = "rAM": Save to RAM 2 = "EEP": Save to EEPROM PI regulator feedback Factory setting: 0 0 = "nO": Not assigned 1 = "AI1": Analog input AI1 2 = "AI2": Analog input AI2 3 = "AI3": Analog input AI3 PI regulator proportional gain Unit: 0.01 Factory setting: 100 Adjustment range: 1 to 10000 Contributes to dynamic performance during rapid changes in the PI feedback. PI regulator integral gain Unit: 0.01 Factory setting: 100 Adjustment range: 1 to 10000 Contributes to static precision during slow changes in the PI feedback. PI feedback multiplication coefficient Unit: 0.1 Factory setting: 10 Adjustment range: 1 to 1000 For process adaptation Reversal of the direction of correction of the PI regulator Factory setting: 0 0 = "nO": normal 1 = "YES": reverse 2 preset PI references Factory setting: 0 Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. 0 = "nO": Not assigned 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: 171 172 173 174 175 = "Cd11": bit 11 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd12": bit 12 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd13": bit 13 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd14": bit 14 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd15": bit 15 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen
11901
2059 / 2
PIF
R/WS
11941
2059 / 2A
rPG
R/W
11942
2059 / 2B
rIG
R/W
11903
2059 / 4
FbS
R/W
11940
2059 / 29
PIC
R/W
11909
2059 / A
Pr2
R/WS
40
CANopen address 2059 / B
Code Pr4
Read/ Write R/WS
Name/Description/Possible values 4 preset PI references Factory setting: 0 Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. Check that Pr2 has been assigned before assigning Pr4. 0 = "nO": Not assigned 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: 171 = "Cd11": bit 11 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by Modbus or CANopen 172 = "Cd12": bit 12 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by Modbus or CANopen 173 = "Cd13": bit 13 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by Modbus or CANopen 174 = "Cd14": bit 14 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by Modbus or CANopen 175 = "Cd15": bit 15 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by Modbus or CANopen 2nd preset PI reference Unit: 0.1% Factory setting: 300 Adjustment range: 0 to 1000 Only active if Pr2 has been enabled by selecting an input. 3rd preset PI reference Unit: 0.1% Factory setting: 600 Adjustment range: 0 to 1000 Only active if Pr4 has been enabled by selecting an input. 4th preset PI reference Unit: 0.1% Factory setting: 900 Adjustment range: 0 to 1000 Only active if Pr4 has been enabled by selecting an input. Restart error threshold ("wake-up" threshold) Unit: 0.1 Factory setting: 0 Adjustment range: 0 to 1000 If the "PI" and "Low speed operating time"(tLS) (see page 24) functions are configured at the same time, the PI regulator may attempt to set a speed lower than LSP. This results in unsatisfactory operation which consists of starting, operating at low speed then stopping, and so on Parameter rSL (restart error threshold) can be used to set a minimum PI error threshold for restarting after a stop at prolonged LSP. The function is inactive if tLS = 0. Internal PI regulator reference Factory setting: 0 0 = "nO": The PI regulator reference is Fr1, except for UPdH and UPdt (+/- speed cannot be used as the PI regulator reference). 1 = "YES": The PI regulator reference is internal via parameter rPI. Internal PI regulator reference Unit: 0.1% Factory setting: 0 Adjustment range: 0 to 1000
11921
2059 / 16
rP2
R/W
11922
2059 / 17
rP3
R/W
11923
2059 / 18
rP4
R/W
11960
2059 / 3D
rSL
RW0
11908
2059 / 9
PII
R/WS
11920
2059 / 15
rPI
R/W
41
Code bLC
Read/ Write R/WS
Name/Description/Possible values Brake control configuration Factory setting: 0 Function active only if LAC = L2 or L3 (page 30). 0 = "nO": Not assigned 2 = "r2": Relay R2 64 = "dO": Logic output AOC If bLC is assigned, parameters FLr (page 46) and brA (page 34) are forced to nO, and parameter OPL (page 47) is forced to YES. bLC is forced to nO if OPL = OAC (page 46). Brake release frequency Unit: 0.1 Hz Factory setting: According to drive rating Adjustment range: 0 to 100 Motor current threshold for brake release Unit: 0.1 A Factory setting: According to drive rating Adjustment range: 0 to 1.36 In (1) (1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive rating plate. Brake release time Unit: 0.01 s Factory setting: 50 Adjustment range: 0 to 500 Brake engage frequency threshold Unit: 0.1 Hz Factory setting: 65535 Adjustment range: 0 to LSP 65535 = "nO": Not set 0 to LSP: Adjustment range in Hz If bLC is assigned and bEn still equals nO, the drive will lock on a bLF fault on the first run command. Brake engage time Unit: 0.01 s Factory setting: 50 Adjustment range: 0 to 500 Brake release pulse Factory setting: 0 0 = "nO": Whilst the brake is releasing, the motor torque direction corresponds to the direction of rotation commanded. 1 = "YES": Whilst the brake is releasing, the motor torque direction is always forward, regardless of the direction of operation commanded. Check that the motor torque direction for "Forward" control corresponds to the upward direction of the load. If necessary, reverse two motor phases.
10002
2046 / 3
brL
R/WS
10006
2046 / 7
Ibr
R/WS
10004
2046 / 5
brt
R/WS
10003
2046 / 4
bEn
R/WS
10005
2046 / 6
bEt
R/WS
10007
2046 / 8
bIP
R/WS
42
Modbus address 9202
CANopen address 203E / 3
Code LC2
Read/ Write R/WS
Name/Description/Possible values Switching for second current limit Factory setting: 0 Function active only if LAC = L2 or L3 (page 30). Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. 0 = "nO": Not assigned 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: 171 = "Cd11": bit 11 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by Modbus or CANopen 172 = "Cd12": bit 12 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by Modbus or CANopen 173 = "Cd13": bit 13 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by Modbus or CANopen 174 = "Cd14": bit 14 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by Modbus or CANopen 175 = "Cd15": bit 15 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by Modbus or CANopen CL1 is enabled when the logic input or control word bit is at state 0 (page 24). CL2 is enabled when the logic input or control word bit is at state 1 (page 43). 2nd current limit Unit: 0.1 A Factory setting: 1.5 In (1) Adjustment range: 0.25 to 1.5 In (1) (1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive rating plate. Switching, motor 2 Factory setting: 0 Function active only if LAC = L2 or L3 (page 30). 0 = "nO": Not assigned 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: 171 172 173 174 175 = "Cd11": bit 11 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd12": bit 12 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd13": bit 13 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd14": bit 14 of the CMD control word (page = "Cd15": bit 15 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by 14) written by Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen Modbus or CANopen
9203
203E / 4
CL2
R/W
8011
2032 / C
CHP
R/WS
LI or bit = 0: Motor 1 LI or bit = 1: Motor 2 - The motor switching function disables motor thermal protection. An external means of motor thermal protection must therefore be provided. - If you use this function, do not use the tUn auto-tuning function (page 26) on motor 2 and do not configure tUn = rUn or POn. - Changes to parameters are only taken into account when the drive is locked. 9701 2043 / 2 UnS2 R/WS Nominal motor voltage (motor 2) given on the rating plate Unit: 1 V Factory setting: According to drive rating Adjustment range: According to drive rating: ATV31ppp M2: 100 to 240 V ATV31ppp M3X: 100 to 240 V ATV31ppp N4: 100 to 500 V ATV31ppp S6X: 100 to 600 V
43
Modbus address 9702
Code FrS2
Read/ Write R/WS
Name/Description/Possible values Nominal motor frequency (motor 2) given on the rating plate Unit: 0.1 Hz Factory setting: if bFr = 50: 500 if bFr = 60: 600 Adjustment range: 100 to 5000 The ratio UnS (in volts) must not exceed the following values: FrS (in Hz)
9703
2043 / 4
nCr2
R/WS
9704
2043 / 5
nSP2 R/WS
ATV31ppp M2: 7 max. ATV31ppp M3X: 7 max. ATV31ppp N4: 14 max. ATV31ppp S6X: 17 max. Nominal motor current (motor 2) given on the rating plate Unit: 0.1 A Factory setting: According to drive rating Adjustment range: 0.25 to 1.5 In (1) (1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive rating plate. Nominal motor speed (motor 2) given on the rating plate Unit: 1 rpm Factory setting: According to drive rating Adjustment range: 0 to 32767 If, rather than the nominal speed, the rating plate indicates the synchronous speed and the slip in Hz or as a %, calculate the nominal speed as follows: Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x or Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x or Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x 100 - slip as a % 100 50 - slip in Hz 50 60 - slip in Hz 60
9706
2043 / 7
COS2 R/WS
9707
2043 / 8
UFt2
R/W
9723
2043 / 18
UFr2
R/W
9720
2043 / 15
FLG2 R/W
Motor Cos Phi (motor 2) given on the rating plate Unit: 0.01 Factory setting: According to drive rating Adjustment range: 50 to 100 Selection of the type of voltage/frequency ratio for motor 2 Factory setting: 2 0 = "L": Constant torque for motors connected in parallel or special motors 1 = "P": Variable torque for pump and fan applications 2 = "n": Sensorless flux vector control for constant torque applications 3 = "nLd": Energy saving, for variable torque applications not requiring high dynamics (behaves in a similar way to the P ratio at no load and the n ratio on load). IR compensation/Voltage boost, motor 2 Unit: 1% Factory setting: 20 Adjustment range: 0 to 100 For UFt2 = n or nLd: IR compensation. For UFt2 = L or P: Voltage boost. Used to optimize the torque at very low speed (increase UFr2 if the torque is insufficient). Check that the value of UFr2 is not too high for when the motor is warm (risk of instability). Modifying UFt2 will cause UFr2 to return to the factory setting (20%). Frequency loop gain, motor 2 Unit: 1% Factory setting: 20 Adjustment range: 1 to 100 Parameter active only if UFt2 = n or nLd. The FLG2 parameter adjusts the drives ability to follow the speed ramp based on the inertia of the machine being driven. Too high a gain may result in operating instability.
44
Modbus address 9721
Code StA2
Read/ Write R/W
Name/Description/Possible values Frequency loop stability, motor 2 Unit: 1% Factory setting: 20 Adjustment range: 1 to 100 Parameter active only if UFt2 = n or nLd. Used to adapt the return to steady state after a speed transient (acceleration or deceleration), according to the dynamics of the machine. Gradually increase the stability to avoid any overspeed. Slip compensation, motor 2 Unit: 1% Factory setting: 100 Adjustment range: 0 to 150 Parameter active only if UFt2 = n or nLd. Used to adjust the slip compensation value fixed by nominal motor speed. The speeds given on motor rating plates are not necessarily exact. If slip setting < actual slip: the motor is not rotating at the correct speed in steady state. If slip setting > actual slip: the motor is overcompensated and the speed is unstable. Limit, forward direction Factory setting: 0 Function active only if LAC = L2 or L3 (page 30). 0 = "nO": Not assigned 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 Limit, reverse direction Factory setting: 0 Function active only if LAC = L2 or L3 (page 30). 0 = "nO": Not assigned 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 Type of limit switch stop Factory setting: 2 Function active only if LAC = L2 or L3 (page 30). 0 = "rMP": On ramp 1 = "FSt": Fast stop 2 = "nSt": Freewheel stop
9725
2043 / 1A
SLP2 R/W
11601
2056 / 2
LAF
R/WS
11602
2056 / 3
LAr
R/WS
11603
2056 / 4
LAS
R/WS
45
Modbus address 7122
Code Atr
Read/ Write R/WS
Name/Description/Possible values Automatic restart Factory setting: 0 0 = "nO": Function inactive 1 = "YES": Automatic restart, after locking on a fault, if the fault has disappeared and the other operating conditions permit the restart. The restart is performed by a series of automatic attempts separated by increasingly longer waiting periods: 1 s, 5 s, 10 s, then 1 min for the following periods. If the restart has not taken place once the configurable time tAr has elapsed, the procedure is aborted and the drive remains locked until it is powered down then powered up. The following faults permit this function: - External fault (EPF) - Loss of 4-20 mA reference (LFF) - CANopen fault (COF) - Line overvoltage (OSF) - Loss of a line phase (PHF) - Loss of a motor phase (OPF) - DC bus overvoltage (ObF) - Motor overload (OLF) - Serial link (SLF) - Drive overheating (OHF) The drive safety relay remains activated if this function is active. The speed reference and the operating direction must be maintained. Use 2-wire control (tCC = 2C) with tCt = LEL or PFO (page 28). Check that an automatic restart does not present any danger to personnel or equipment. Max. duration of restart process Factory setting: 0 0 = "5" : 5 minutes 1 = "10" : 10 minutes 2 = "30" : 30 minutes 3 = "1h": 1 hour 4 = "2h": 2 hours 5 = "3h": 3 hours 6 = "Ct": Unlimited This parameter is active if Atr = YES. It can be used to limit the number of consecutive restarts on a recurrent fault. Reset of current fault Factory setting: 0 0 = "nO": Not assigned 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 Flying restart (automatic catching a spinning load on ramp) Factory setting: 0 Used to enable a smooth restart if the run command is maintained after the following events: - Loss of line supply or disconnection - Reset of current fault or automatic restart - Freewheel stop The speed given by the drive resumes from the estimated speed of the motor at the time of the restart, then follows the ramp to the reference speed. This function requires 2-wire control (tCC = 2C) with tCt = LEL or PFO. 0 = "nO": Function inactive 1 = "YES": Function active When the function is operational, it activates on each restart following one of the above events, resulting in a slight delay (1 second max). FLr is forced to nO if brake control (bLC) is assigned (page 42).
7123
2029 / 18
tAr
R/WS
7124
2029 / 19
rSF
R/WS
3110
2001 / B
FLr
R/WS
46
Modbus address 7131
Code EtF
Read/ Write R/WS
Name/Description/Possible values External fault Factory setting: 0 0 = "nO": Not assigned 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: 171 = "Cd11": bit 11 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by Modbus or CANopen 172 = "Cd12": bit 12 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by Modbus or CANopen 173 = "Cd13": bit 13 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by Modbus or CANopen 174 = "Cd14": bit 14 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by Modbus or CANopen 175 = "Cd15": bit 15 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by Modbus or CANopen Stop mode in the event of an external fault EPF Factory setting: 1 0 = "nO": Fault ignored 1 = "YES": Fault with freewheel stop 6 = "rMP": Fault with stop on ramp 7 = "FSt": Fault with fast stop Configuration of motor phase loss fault Factory setting: 1 0 = "nO": Function inactive 1 = "YES": Triggering of OPF fault 2 = "OAC": No fault triggered but management of the output voltage in order to avoid an overcurrent when the link with the motor is re-established and flying restart even if FLr = nO. To be used with downstream contactor. OPL is forced to YES if brake control bLC is assigned (page 42). If OPL = OAC, bLC is forced to nO (page 42). Configuration of line phase loss fault Factory setting: 1 except for ATV31ppp M2: 0 This parameter is only active on 3-phase drives. 0 = "nO": Fault ignored 1 = "YES": Fault with fast stop Stop mode in the event of a drive overheating fault OHF Factory setting: 1 0 = "nO": Fault ignored 1 = "YES": Fault with freewheel stop 6 = "rMP": Fault with stop on ramp 7 = "FSt": Fault with fast stop Stop mode in the event of a motor overload fault OLF Factory setting: 1 0 = "nO": Fault ignored 1 = "YES": Fault with freewheel stop 6 = "rMP": Fault with stop on ramp 7 = "FSt": Fault with fast stop Stop mode in the event of a Modbus serial link fault SLF Factory setting: 1 0 = "nO": Fault ignored 1 = "YES": Fault with freewheel stop 6 = "rMP": Fault with stop on ramp 7 = "FSt": Fault with fast stop Stop mode in the event of a CANopen serial link fault COF Factory setting: 1 0 = "nO": Fault ignored 1 = "YES": Fault with freewheel stop 6 = "rMP": Fault with stop on ramp 7 = "FSt": Fault with fast stop
7006
2028 / 7
EPL
R/WS
9611
2042 / C
OPL
R/WS
7002
2028 / 3
IPL
R/WS
7008
2028 / 9
OHL
R/WS
7009
2028 / A
OLL
R/WS
7010
2028 / B
SLL
R/WS
7011
2028 / C
COL
R/WS
47
Modbus address 7012
CANopen address 2028 / D
Code tnL
Read/ Write R/WS
Name/Description/Possible values Configuration of auto-tuning fault tnF Factory setting: 1 0 = "nO": Fault ignored (the drive reverts to the factory settings) 1 = "YES": Fault with drive locked. If rSC (see page 26) is other than nO, tnL is forced to YES. Stop mode in the event of a loss of 4 - 20 mA signal fault LFF Factory setting: 0 0 = "nO": Fault ignored (only value possible if CrL3 y 3 mA, see page 28) 1 = "YES": Fault with freewheel stop 4 = "LFF": The drive switches to the fallback speed (LFF parameter) 5 ="rLS": The drive maintains the speed at which it was travelling when the fault occurred until the fault has disappeared. 6 = "rMP": Fault with stop on ramp 7 = "FSt": Fault with fast stop The factory setting of LFL is forced to YES if CrH3 < CrL3 (see page 28) and nO is impossible. Before setting LFL to YES, rMP or FSt, check the connection of input AI3. Otherwise, the drive may immediately switch to an LFF fault. Fallback speed Unit: 0.1 Hz Factory setting: 100 Adjustment range: 0 to 5000 Fallback speed setting for stopping in the event of a fault Derated operation in the event of an overvoltage Factory setting: 0 0 = "nO": Function inactive 1 = "YES": The line voltage monitoring threshold is: ATV31ppp M2: 130 V ATV31ppp M3X: 130 V ATV31ppp N4: 270 V ATV31ppp S6X: 340 V In this case, a line choke must be used and the performance of the drive cannot be guaranteed. Controlled stop on mains power break Factory setting: 0 0 = "nO": Locking of the drive and freewheel stopping of the motor 1 = "MMS": This stop mode uses the inertia to maintain the drive power supply as long as possible. 2 = "rMP": Stop according to the valid ramp (dEC or dE2) 3 = "FSt": Fast stop, the stopping time depends on the inertia and the braking ability of the drive. Fault inhibit Factory setting: 0 Inhibiting faults may damage the drive beyond repair. This would invalidate the guarantee. 0 = "nO": Not assigned 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 Fault monitoring is active when the input is at state 0. It is inactive when the input is at state 1. All active faults are reset on a rising edge (from 0 to 1) of the input. Operating time reset to zero Factory setting: 0 0 = "nO": No 2 = "rtH": Operating time reset to zero The rPr parameter automatically falls back to nO as soon as the reset to zero is performed.
7003
2028 / 4
LFL
R/WS
7080
2028 / 51
LFF
R/WS
7007
2028 / 8
drn
R/WS
7004
2028 / 5
StP
R/WS
7125
2029 / 1A
InH
R/WS
3120
2001 / 15
rPr
R/WS
48
Modbus address 6001
CANopen address 201E / 2
Code Add
Read/ Write R/WS
Name/Description/Possible values Modbus: Drive address Unit: 1 Factory setting: 1 Adjustment range: 1 to 247 Modbus: Drive address Unit: 1 Factory setting: 1 Adjustment range: 1 to 247 Modbus: Transmission speed Factory setting: 32 24 = "4.8" : 4800 bps 28 = "9.6" : 9600 bps 32 = "19.2": 19200 bps (Caution: The remote display terminal can only be used with this value.) Modbus: communication format Factory setting: 3 2 = "8O1": 8 data bits, odd parity, 1 stop bit 3 = "8E1": 8 data bits, even parity, 1 stop bit (Caution: The remote display terminal can only be used with this value.) 4 = "8n1": 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit 5 = "8n2": 8 data bits, no parity, 2 stop bits Modbus: Time-out Unit: 0.1 s Factory setting: 100 Adjustment range: 1 to 100 CANopen: Drive address Unit: 1 Factory setting: 0 Adjustment range: 0 to 127 CANopen: Transmission speed Factory setting: 52 30 = "10.0": 10 kbps 34 = "20.0": 20 kbps 38 = "50.0": 50 kbps 52 = "125.0": 125 kbps 60 = "250.0": 250 kbps 68 = "500.0": 500 kbps 76 = "1000": 1000 kbps Forced local mode Factory setting: 0 0 = "nO": Not assigned 129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1 130 = "LI2": Logic input LI2 131 = "LI3": Logic input LI3 132 = "LI4": Logic input LI4 133 = "LI5": Logic input LI5 134 = "LI6": Logic input LI6 In forced local mode, the terminal block or display terminal regains control of the drive. Selection of the reference and control channel in forced local mode Active only if LAC = 3 Factory setting: 1 except for ATV31ppp A: 16 In forced local mode, only the speed reference is taken into account. PI functions, summing inputs, etc. are not active. 1 = "AI1": Analog input AI1, logic inputs LI 2 = "AI2": Analog input AI2, logic inputs LI 3 = "AI3": Analog input AI3, logic inputs LI 16 = "AIP": Potentiometer (type A drives only), RUN, STOP buttons 163 = "LCC": Remote display terminal: LFr reference page 14, RUN, STOP, FWD/REV buttons.
6001
201E / 2
Add
R/WS
6003
201E / 4
tbr
R/WS
6004
201E / 5
tFO
R/WS
6005
201E / 6
ttO
R/WS
6051
201E / 34
AdCO R/WS
6053
201E / 36
bdCO R/WS
8431
2036 / 20
FLO
R/WS
8432
2036 / 21
FLOC R/WS
49
Modbus address 3003
Code COd
Read/ Write R/W
Name/Description/Possible values Display terminal locking code Enables the drive configuration to be protected using an access code. Caution: Before entering a code, do not forget to make a careful note of it. 0 = OFF: No access locking codes - To lock access, enter a code (2 to 9999). "On" appears on the screen to indicate that the parameters have been locked. 1 = On: A code is locking access (2 to 9999) - To unlock access, enter the code. The code remains on the display and access is unlocked until the next power down. Parameter access will be locked again on the next power-up. - If an incorrect code is entered, COd changes to "On" and the parameters remain locked. 2 to 9999: Parameter access is unlocked (the code remains on the screen). - To reactivate locking with the same code when the parameters have been unlocked, return to "On". - To lock access with a new code when the parameters have been unlocked, enter the new code. - To disable locking when the parameters have been unlocked, return to "OFF". When access is locked using a code, only the monitoring parameters can be accessed, with only a temporary choice of parameter displayed.
50
Replacing an ATV28 with an ATV31
If necessary, it is easy to replace an ATV28 with a ATV31 in an installation communicating via Modbus. In fact, most of the variables used in the ATV28 are found in the ATV31 with the same addresses (double addressing). To replace an ATV28, the ATV28 addresses in this table can be used, but only these . All the other ATV28 addresses must be replaced with those for the ATV31. For any new installation, we recommend using the new addresses, as this enables the number of Modbus requests to be reduced. ATV 28 address 2 4 5 6 10 40 51 52 53 55 60 61 64 65 110 151 152 155 190 250 251 252 253 258 260 261 262 264 265 New address 3003 4434 4444 11101 6001 3015 3102 3103 9602 9601 3107 9607 9003 9011 5002 9611 7002 3110 7007 3104 3105 9001 9002 9622 9012 9013 11111 11410 11411 Code COd CrL3 CrH3 tCC Add bFr SFr tFr FrS UnS nrd UFt brA Frt r2 OPL IPL FLr drn HSP LSP ACC dEC ItH AC2 dE2 JGF SP2 SP3 ATV 28 address 266 267 268 269 270 272 279 280 281 282 283 284 286 287 340 400 401 402 440 450 451 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 New address 11412 11413 11414 11415 11210 11701 11941 11942 11903 11001 11002 11003 11301 11940 64001 8501 8502 8504 11920 3203 3202 3204 3207 9630 3209 7121 3201 3206 Code SP4 SP5 SP6 SP7 IdC tLS rPG rIG FbS Ctd ttd Ftd JPF PIC rOt CMD LFR CMI rPI FrH rFr LCr ULn tHr tHd LFt ETA ETI ETI2 (1) ATV 28 address 462 464 466 468 478 482 487 491 530 555 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 991 New address 7201 7202 7203 7204 5240 5261 3208 3211 3231 3017 8606 8601 8603 8602 8605 8604 8607 8608 8609 8610 8611 8612 8613 8614 8615 8616 64003 Code DP1 DP2 DP3 DP4 IOLR AO1R Otr OPr rtH INV ERRD CMDD ETAD LFRD FRHD RFRD SMIL SMIL SMAL SMAL SPAL SPAL SPAT SPDL SPDL SPDT LCC
(1)See the ATV28 communication variables manual.
51
Code index
Code AC2 ACC AdC AdCO Add AI1C AI2C AI3C AIPC AO1R AO1t Atr bdCO bEn bEt bFr bIP bLC brA brL brt CCS Cd1 Cd2 CHCF CHP CL2 CLI CMD CMDD CMI CMI1 CMI2 COd COL COP COS COS2 CrH3 CrL3 Ctd dCF dCI dE2 dEC dO DP1 DP2 DP3 DP4 drn dSP EP1 EP2
Modbus address CANopen address 9012 203C / D 2nd acceleration ramp time 9001 203C / 2 Acceleration ramp time 10401 6051 6001 5242 5243 5244 5241 5261 4601 7122 6053 10003 10005 3015 10007 10001 9003 10002 10004 8421 8423 8424 8401 8011 9203 9201 8501 8601 8504 8541 8542 3003 7011 8402 9606 9706 4444 4434 11001 11230 11203 9013 9002 5031 7201 7202 7203 7204 7007 11502 7211 7212 204A / 2 201E / 34 201E / 2 2016 / 2B 2016 / 2C 2016 / 2D 2016 / 2A 2016 / 3E 2010 / 2 2029 / 17 201E / 36 2046 / 4 2046 / 6 2000 / 10 2046 / 8 2046 / 2 203C / 4 2046 / 3 2046 / 5 2036 / 16 2036 / 18 2036 / 19 2036 / 2 2032 / C 203E / 4 203E / 2 2037 / 2 6040 2037 / 5 2037 / 2A 2037 / 2B 2000 / 4 2028 / C 2036 / 3 2042 / 7 2043 / 7 200E / 2D 200E / 23 2050 / 2 2052 / 1F 2052 / 4 203C / E 203C / 3 2014 / 20 202A / 2 202A / 3 202A / 4 202A / 5 2028 / 8 2055 / 3 202A / C 202A / D
Name
Page 34 33 35 49 49 18 18 18 18 18 28 46 49 42 42 25 42 42 34 42 42 32 31 31 31 43 43 24 14 11 15 20 21 50 47 32 26 44 28 28 24 35 35 34 33 29 19 19 19 19 48 39 20 20
Automatic standstill DC injection CANopen: Drive address Modbus: Drive address Value of analog input AI1 Value of analog input AI2 Value of analog input AI3 Value of analog input AIP (ATV31.A drive potentiometer) Value of the analog output Configuration of the analog output Automatic restart CANopen: Transmission speed Brake engage frequency threshold Brake engage time Standard motor frequency Brake release pulse Brake control configuration Deceleration ramp adaptation Brake release frequency Brake release time Control channel switching Configuration of control channel 1 Configuration of control channel 2 Mixed mode (control channels separated from reference channels) Switching, motor 2 2nd current limit Current limit Control word DRIVECOM control word Extended control word Image of Modbus extended control word Image of CANopen extended control word Display terminal locking code Stop mode in the event of a CANopen serial link fault COF Copy channel 1 to channel 2 Motor Cos Phi given on the rating plate Motor Cos Phi (motor 2) given on the rating plate Value for high speed (HSP) on input AI3 Value for low speed (LSP) on input AI3 Motor current threshold Coefficient for dividing the deceleration ramp time for fast stopping DC injection via logic input 2nd deceleration ramp time Deceleration ramp time Analog/logic output AOC/AOV Past fault No. 1 Past fault No. 2 Past fault No. 3 Past fault No. 4 Derated operation in the event of an overvoltage - speed (motorized potentiometer) Status of past fault No. 1 Status of past fault No. 2
52
Code index
Code EP3 EP4 EPL ErCO ERRD ETA ETAD EtF ETI FbS FCS FLG FLG2 FLO FLOC FLr Fr1 Fr2 FrH FRHD FrS FrS2 Frt FSt Ftd HSP Ibr IdC InH INV IOLR IPL ItH JF2 JGF JOG JPF LAC LAF LAr LAS LC2 LCC LCr LFD1 LFD2 LFF LFL LFr LFR1 LFR2 LFRD LFt LRS1
Modbus address 7213 7214 7006 6056 8606 3201 8603 7131 3206 11903 8002 9620 9720 8431 8432 3110 8413 8414 3203 8605 9602 9702 9011 11204 11003 3104 10006 11210 7125 3017 5240 7002 9622 11302 11111 11110 11301 3006 11601 11602 11603 9202 64003 3204 8631 8632 7080 7003 8502 8521 8522 8602 7121 3250
CANopen address Name 202A / E Status of past fault No. 3 202A / F Status of past fault No. 4 2028 / 7 Stop mode in the event of an external fault EPF 201E / 39 CANopen: error word 603F Fault code 2002 / 2 Status word 6041 DRIVECOM status word 2029 2002 2059 2032 2042 2043 2036 2036 2001 2036 2036 / 20 /7 /4 /3 / 15 / 15 / 20 / 21 /B /E /F External fault Extended status word PI feedback multiplication coefficient Return to factory settings/Restore configuration Frequency loop gain Frequency loop gain, motor 2 Forced local mode Selection of the reference and control channel in forced local mode Flying restart (automatic catching a spinning load on ramp) Configuration reference 1 Configuration reference 2 Frequency reference before ramp (absolute value) Speed reference (signed ramp input) Nominal motor frequency given on the rating plate Nominal motor frequency (motor 2) given on the rating plate Ramp switching threshold Fast stop via logic input Motor frequency threshold High speed Motor current threshold for brake release Level of DC injection braking current activated via logic input or selected as stop mode Fault inhibit Nominal drive current Value of logic I/O Configuration of line phase loss fault Motor thermal protection - max. thermal current 2nd skip frequency Jog operation reference Jog operation Skip frequency Function access level Limit, forward direction Limit, reverse direction Type of limit switch stop Switching for second current limit Control via remote display terminal Current in the motor Image of Modbus speed reference Image of CANopen speed reference Fallback speed Stop mode in the event of a loss of 4 - 20 mA signal fault LFF Frequency reference via the bus (signed value) Image of Modbus frequency reference Image of CANopen frequency reference Speed reference via the bus (signed value) Last fault Extended status word No. 1
Page 20 20 47 20 12 16 11 47 17 40 28 23 44 49 49 46 30 30 16 12 25 44 34 34 24 23 42 35 48 22 18 47 23 24 39 39 23 30 45 45 45 43 32 16 21 21 48 48 14 21 21 11 19 17
2002 / 4 6043 2042 / 3 2043 / 3 203C / C 2052 / 5 2050 / 4 2001 / 5 2046 / 7 2052 / B 2029 2000 2016 2028 2042 2053 2051 / 1A / 12 / 29 /3 / 17 /3 /C
2051 / B 2053 / 2 2000 / 7 2056 / 2 2056 / 3 2056 / 4 203E / 3 2262 / 4 2002 / 8 2038 / 20 2038 / 21 2028 / 51 2028 2037 2037 2037 6042 2029 2002 /4 /3 / 16 / 17 / 16 / 33
53
Code index
Code LRS3 LSP nCr nCr2 NCV nrd nSP nSP2 nSt OHL OLL OPL OPr Otr PIC PIF PII PIR1 PIR2 PISP Pr2 Pr4 PS16 PS2 PS4 PS8 PSt r1 r2 rFC rFr RFRD rIG rOt rP2 rP3 rP4 rPG rPI rPr rPS rPt rrS rSC rSF rSL rtH SA2 SA3 SCS SdC1 SdC2 SdS SFr SLL
Modbus address 3252 3105 9603 9703 3011 3107 9604 9704 11202 7008 7009 9611 3211 3205 11940 11901 11908 8531 8532 8503 11909 11910 11404 11401 11402 11403 64002 5001 5002 8411 3202 8604 11942 64001 11921 11922 11923 11941 11920 3120 9010 9004 11105 9643 7124 11960 3231 11801 11802 8001 10403 10405 12001 3102 7010
CANopen address Name 2002 / 35 Extended status word No. 3 2001 / 6 Low speed 2042 / 4 Nominal motor current given on the rating plate 2043 / 4 Nominal motor current (motor 2) given on the rating plate 2000 / C Drive rating 2001 / 8 Random switching frequency 2042 / 5 Nominal motor speed given on the rating plate 2043 2052 2028 2028 2042 2002 2002 2059 2059 2059 2037 2037 2037 2059 2059 2054 2054 2054 2054 2262 2014 2014 2036 /5 /3 /9 /A /C /C /6 / 29 /2 /9 / 20 / 21 /4 /A /B /5 /2 /3 /4 /3 /2 /3 /C Nominal motor speed (motor 2) given on the rating plate Freewheel stop via logic input Stop mode in the event of a drive overheating fault OHF Stop mode in the event of a motor overload fault OLF Configuration of motor phase loss fault Motor power Motor torque Reversal of the direction of correction of the PI regulator PI regulator feedback Internal PI regulator reference Image of Modbus PI reference Image of CANopen PI reference PI regulator reference via the bus 2 preset PI references 4 preset PI references 16 preset speeds 2 preset speeds 4 preset speeds 8 preset speeds Stop priority Relay r1 Relay r2 Reference switching Output frequency applied to the motor (signed value) Output speed (signed value) PI regulator integral gain Direction of operation authorized 2nd preset PI reference 3rd preset PI reference 4th preset PI reference PI regulator proportional gain Internal PI regulator reference Operating time reset to zero Ramp switching Type of ramp Reverse operation via logic input Cold state stator resistance Reset of current fault Restart error threshold ("wake-up" threshold) Operating time Summing input 2 Summing input 3 Saving the configuration Level of automatic standstill DC injection current 2nd level of standstill DC injection current USPL/USPH scale factor Switching frequency Stop mode in the event of a Modbus serial link fault SLF
Page 18 23 25 44 22 27 26 44 35 47 47 47 16 16 40 40 41 21 21 14 40 41 38 37 37 37 32 29 29 31 16 12 40 33 41 41 41 40 41 48 33 33 28 26 46 41 16 36 36 27 36 36 25 27 47
2002 / 3 6044 2059 / 2B 2262 / 2 2059 / 16 2059 / 17 2059 / 18 2059 / 2A 2059 / 15 2001 / 15 203C / B 203C / 5 2051 / 6 2042 / 2C 2029 / 19 2059 / 3D 2002 / 20 2058 / 2 2058 / 3 2032 / 2 204A / 4 204A / 6 205A / 2 2001 / 3 2028 / B
54
Code index
Code SLP SLP2 SMAL SMIL SP10 SP11 SP12 SP13 SP14 SP15 SP16 SP2 SP3 SP4 SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8 SP9 SPAL SPAT SPDL SPDT SrF StA StA2 StP Str Stt tA1 tA2 tA3 tA4 tAr tbr tCC tCt tdC tdC1 tdC2 TDM tFO tFr tHd tHr tLS tnL TSP ttd ttO tUn tUS UdP UFr UFr2
Modbus address 9625 9725 8609 - 8610 8607 - 8608 11418 11419 11420 11421 11422 11423 11424 11410 11411 11412 11413 11414 11415 11416 11417 8611 - 8612 8613 8614 - 8615 8616 9101 9621 9721 7004 11503 11201 9005 9006 9007 9008 7123 6003 11101 11102 11211 10402 10404 3210 6004 3103 3209 9630 11701 7012 3401 11002 6005 9608 9609 3302 9623 9723
CANopen address 2042 / 1A Slip compensation 2043 / 1A Slip compensation, motor 2 6046 / 2 Max. speed 6046 / 1 Min. speed 2054 / 13 10th preset speed 2054 / 14 11th preset speed 2054 2054 2054 2054 2054 2054 2054 2054 2054 2054 2054 2054 / 15 / 16 / 17 / 18 / 19 /B /C /D /E /F / 10 / 11 12th preset speed 13th preset speed 14th preset speed 15th preset speed 16th preset speed 2nd preset speed 3rd preset speed 4th preset speed 5th preset speed 6th preset speed 7th preset speed 8th preset speed
Name
Page 23 45 12 12 38 38 39 39 39 39 39 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 12 12 13 13 27 23 45 48 40 34 33 33 33 33 46 49 28 28 35 36 36 16 49 27 16 16 24 48 22 24 49 26 27 22 23 44
2054 / 12 6048 / 1 6048 / 2 6049 / 1 6049 / 2 203D / 2 2042 / 16 2043 / 16 2028 / 5 2055 / 4 2052 / 2 203C / 6 203C / 7 203C / 8 203C / 9 2029 / 18 201E / 4 2051 / 2 2051 / 3 2052 / C 204A / 3 204A / 5 2002 / B 201E / 5 2001 / 4 2002 / A 2042 / 1F 2057 / 2 2028 / D 2004 / 2 2050 / 3 201E / 6 2042 / 9 2042 / A 2000 / 4 2042 / 18 2043 / 18
9th preset speed Acceleration - Speed delta Acceleration - Time delta Deceleration - Speed delta Deceleration - Time delta Suppression of the speed loop filter Frequency loop stability Frequency loop stability, motor 2 Controlled stop on mains power break Save reference Normal stop mode Start of CUS-type acceleration ramp rounded End of CUS-type acceleration ramp rounded Start of CUS-type deceleration ramp rounded End of CUS-type deceleration ramp rounded Max. duration of restart process Modbus: Transmission speed 2-wire/3-wire control Type of 2-wire control Total DC injection braking time selected as normal stop mode Automatic standstill DC injection time 2nd automatic standstill DC injection time Max. thermal state reached by the drive Modbus: communication format Maximum output frequency Drive thermal state Motor thermal state Low speed operating time Configuration of auto-tuning fault tnF Drive firmware type Motor thermal state threshold Modbus: Time-out Motor control auto-tuning Auto-tuning status Drive firmware version IR compensation/Voltage boost IR compensation/Voltage boost, motor 2
55
Code index
Code UFt UFt2 ULn UnS UnS2 USP USPH USPL VCAL ZON
Modbus address CANopen address Name 9607 2042 / 8 Selection of the type of voltage/frequency ratio 9707 2043 / 8 Selection of the type of voltage/frequency ratio for motor 2 3207 9601 9701 11501 12003 12002 3012 3010 2002 / 5 2042 / 2 2043 / 2 2055 / 2 205A / 4 205A / 3 2000 / D 2000 / B Line voltage Nominal motor voltage given on the rating plate Nominal motor voltage (motor 2) given on the rating plate + speed (motorized potentiometer) Motor speed in customer units - High order Motor speed in customer units - Low order Drive voltage Drive type
Page 27 44 16 25 43 39 17 17 22 22
56
VVDED303092 EN
atv31_communication variables_EN_V1 2003-11
Altivar 31
Programming manual
Contents
Warnings____________________________________________________________________________________________________ 2 Steps for setting up the starter ___________________________________________________________________________________ 3 Factory configuration __________________________________________________________________________________________ 4 Basic functions _______________________________________________________________________________________________ 5 Setup - Preliminary recommendations _____________________________________________________________________________ 7 Functions of the display and the keys______________________________________________________________________________ 8 Remote terminal option________________________________________________________________________________________ 10 Programming _______________________________________________________________________________________________ 11 Function compatibility _________________________________________________________________________________________ 13 List of functions which can be assigned to inputs/outputs _____________________________________________________________ 14 Settings menu SEt-___________________________________________________________________________________________ 16 Motor control menu drC-_______________________________________________________________________________________ 20 I/O menu I-O- _______________________________________________________________________________________________ 23 Control menu CtL- ___________________________________________________________________________________________ 26 Application functions menu FUn- ________________________________________________________________________________ 37 Fault menu FLt- _____________________________________________________________________________________________ 60 Communication menu COM- ___________________________________________________________________________________ 63 Display menu SUP- __________________________________________________________________________________________ 64 Maintenance ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 67 Faults - Causes - Remedies ____________________________________________________________________________________ 68 Configuration/Settings table ____________________________________________________________________________________ 70 Index of parameter codes ______________________________________________________________________________________ 74 Index of functions ____________________________________________________________________________________________ 75
NOTE: Please also refer to the "Installation Guide".
Warnings
When the drive is powered up, the power components and some of the control components are connected to the line supply. It is extremely dangerous to touch them. The drive cover must be kept closed. In general, the drive power supply must be disconnected before any operation on either the electrical or mechanical parts of the installation or machine. After the ALTIVAR has been switched off and the display has disappeared completely, wait for 10 minutes before working on the equipment. This is the time required for the capacitors to discharge. The motor can be stopped during operation by inhibiting start commands or the speed reference while the drive remains powered up. If personnel safety requires prevention of sudden restarts, this electronic locking system is not sufficient: fit a cut-off on the power circuit. The drive is fitted with safety devices which, in the event of a fault, can shut down the drive and consequently the motor. The motor itself may be stopped by a mechanical blockage. Finally, voltage variations, especially line supply failures, can also cause shutdowns. If the cause of the shutdown disappears, there is a risk of restarting which may endanger certain machines or installations, especially those which must conform to safety regulations. In this case the user must take precautions against the possibility of restarts, in particular by using a low speed detector to cut off power to the drive if the motor performs an unprogrammed shutdown. The drive must be installed and set up in accordance with both international and national standards. Bringing the device into conformity is the responsibility of the systems integrator who must observe the EMC directive among others within the European Union. The specifications contained in this document must be applied in order to comply with the essential requirements of the EMC directive. The Altivar 31 must be considered as a component: it is neither a machine nor a device ready for use in accordance with European directives (machinery directive and electromagnetic compatibility directive). It is the responsibility of the end user to ensure that the machine meets these standards. The drive must not be used as a safety device for machines posing a potential risk of material damage or personal injury (lifting equipment, for example). In such applications, overspeed checks and checks to ensure that the trajectory remains under constant control must be made by separate devices which are independent of the drive. The products and equipment described in this document may be changed or modified at any time, either from a technical point of view or in the way they are operated. Their description can in no way be considered contractual.
Steps for setting up the starter

1 - Delivery of the drive
Check that the drive reference printed on the label is the same as that on the delivery note corresponding to the purchase order. Remove the Altivar 31 from its packaging and check that it has not been damaged in transit.
2 - Check that the line voltage is compatible with the supply voltage range of the drive
(see the ATV 31Installation Manual). - The drive may be damaged if the line voltage is not compatible.
3 - Fit the drive 4 - Connect the following to the drive:

The line supply, ensuring that it is: - compatible with the voltage range of the drive - switched off The motor, ensuring that its coupling corresponds to the line voltage The control via the logic inputs The speed reference via the logic or analog inputs
5 - Switch on the drive, but do not give a run command 6 - Configure the following:
The nominal frequency (bFr) of the motor, if it is different from 50 Hz.
7 - Configure the following in the drC- menu:

The motor parameters, only if the factory configuration of the drive is not suitable.
8 - Configure the following in the I-O-, CtL- and FUn- menus:

The application functions (only if the factory configuration of the drive is not suitable), for example the control mode: 3-wire, or 2-wire transition detection, or 2-wire level detection, or 2-wire level detection with forward direction priority, or local control for ATV31pppA. The user must ensure that the programmed functions are compatible with the wiring diagram used.
9 - Set the following in the SEt- menu:

- The ACC (Acceleration) and dEC (Deceleration) parameters - The LSP (Low speed when the reference is zero) and HSP (High speed when the reference is maximum) parameters - The ItH parameter (Motor thermal protection)
10 - Start the drive Practical recommendations

Preparations can be made for programming the drive by filling in the configuration and settings tables (see page 70), in particular when the factory configuration has to be changed. It is always possible to return to the factory settings using the FCS parameter in the drC-, I-O-, CtL- and FUn- menus (set InI to activate the function, see page 22, 25, 36 or 59). Auto-tuning, which is performed using the drC- menu, can be applied to optimize performance in terms of accuracy and response time. Auto-tuning measures the stator resistance of the motor in order to optimize the control algorithms.
Factory configuration
Factory settings
The Altivar 31 is factory-set for the most common operating conditions: Display: Drive ready (rdY) with motor stopped, and motor frequency with motor running Motor frequency (bFr): 50 Hz Constant torque application with sensorless flux vector control (UFt = n) Normal stop mode on deceleration ramp (Stt = rMP). Stop mode in the event of a fault: Freewheel Linear ramps (ACC, dEC): 3 seconds Low speed (LSP): 0 Hz High speed (HSP): 50 Hz Motor thermal current (ItH) = nominal motor current (value depending on drive rating) Standstill injection braking current (SdC) = 0.7 x nominal drive current, for 0.5 seconds Automatic adaptation of the deceleration ramp in the event of overvoltage on braking No automatic restarting after a fault Switching frequency 4 kHz Logic inputs: - LI1, LI2 (2 directions of operation): 2-wire transition detection control, LI1 = forward, LI2 = reverse, inactive on ATV 31ppppppA drives (not assigned) - LI3, LI4: 4 preset speeds (speed 1 = speed reference or LSP, speed 2 = 10 Hz, speed 3 = 15 Hz, speed 4 = 20 Hz). - LI5 - LI6: Inactive (not assigned) Analog inputs: - AI1: Speed reference 0-10 V, inactive on ATV 31ppppppA (not assigned) - AI2: Summed speed reference input 010 V - AI3: 4-20 mA inactive (not assigned) Relay R1: The contact opens in the event of a fault (or drive off) Relay R2: Inactive (not assigned) Analog output AOC: 0-20 mA inactive (not assigned)
ATV 31ppppppA range

When they leave the factory, ATV 31ppppppA drives are supplied with local control activated: the RUN, STOP buttons and the drive potentiometer are active. Logic inputs LI1 and LI2 and analog input AI1 are inactive (not assigned). If the above values are compatible with the application, the drive can be used without changing the settings.
Basic functions
Drive thermal protection
Functions:
Thermal protection by PTC probe fitted on the heatsink or integrated in the power module. Indirect protection of the drive against overloads by tripping in the event of an overcurrent. Typical tripping points: - Motor current = 185% of nominal drive current: 2 seconds - Motor current = 150% of nominal drive current: 60 seconds Time (seconds) 5000
3000
1000 200
160
100
60
2 0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
Motor current/Drive In
Drive ventilation
The fan starts up when the drive is powered up then shuts down after 10 seconds if a run command has not been received. The fan is powered automatically when the drive is unlocked (operating direction + reference). It is powered down a few seconds after the drive is locked (motor speed < 0.2 Hz and injection braking completed).
Basic functions
Motor thermal protection
Function:
Thermal protection by calculating the I2t. The protection takes account of self-cooled motors. Caution: The memory of the motor thermal state returns to zero when the drive is disconnected. Trip time t in seconds
10 000 1 Hz 3 Hz 5 Hz 10 Hz 20 Hz 50 Hz
1 000
100 0.7
0.8
0.9
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6 Motor current/ItH
Setup - Preliminary recommendations

Prior to switching on and configuring the drive
- Check that the line voltage is compatible with the supply voltage range of the drive (see pages 3 and 4 of the ATV 31 Installation Manual). The drive may be damaged if the line voltage is not compatible. - Ensure the logic inputs are switched off (state 0) to prevent accidental starting. Otherwise, an input assigned to the run command may cause the motor to start immediately on exiting the configuration menus.
With power switching via line contactor

- Avoid operating the contactor frequently (premature ageing of the filter capacitors). Use inputs LI1 to LI6 to control the drive. - These instructions are vital for cycles < 60 s, otherwise the load resistor may be damaged.
User adjustment and extension of functions

If necessary, the display and buttons can be used to modify the settings and to extend the functions described in the following pages. It is very easy to return to the factory settings using the FCS parameter in the drC-, I-O-, CtL- and FUn- menus (set InI to activate the function, see page 22, 25, 36 or 59). There are three types of parameter: - Display: Values displayed by the drive - Setting: Can be changed during operation or when stopped - Configuration: Can only be modified when stopped and no braking is taking place. Can be displayed during operation. - Check that changes to the current operating settings do not present any danger. Changes should preferably be made with the drive stopped.
Start up
Important: In factory settings mode on power-up, or in a manual fault reset or after a stop command, the motor can only be powered once the "forward", "reverse" and "DC injection stop" commands have been reset. If they have not been reset, the drive will display "nSt" but will not start. If the automatic restart function is configured (parameter Atr in the FLt- menu, see page 60), these commands are taken into account without a reset being necessary.
Test on a low power motor or without a motor

In factory settings mode, "motor phase loss" detection is active (OPL = YES). To check the drive in a test or maintenance environment without having to switch to a motor with the same rating as the drive (particularly useful in the case of high power drives), deactivate "motor phase loss" detection (OPL = NO). Configure the voltage/frequency ratio: UFt = L (drC- menu on page 21) Motor thermal protection will not be provided by the drive if the motor current is less than 0.2 times the nominal drive current.
Using motors in parallel

Configure the voltage/frequency ratio: UFt = L (drC- menu on page 21) Motor thermal protection is no longer provided by the drive. Provide an alternative means of thermal protection on every motor.
Functions of the display and the keys
Red LED "DC bus ON" Four 7-segment displays
Altivar 31
RUN CAN ERR
2 CANopen status LEDs
Returns to the previous menu or parameter, or increases the displayed value Goes to the next menu or parameter, or decreases the displayed value
ESC
ENT
Exits a menu or parameter, or clears the displayed value to return to the previous stored value Enters a menu or a parameter, or saves the displayed parameter or value
Pressing
or
does not store the selection. or to scroll through the data quickly.
Press and hold down (>2 s) To save and store the selection: ENT The display flashes when a value is stored.
Normal display, with no fault present and no starting: - 43.0: Display of the parameter selected in the SUP- menu (default selection: motor frequency). In current limit mode, the display flashes. - init: Initialization sequence - rdY: Drive ready - dcb: DC injection braking in progress - nSt: Freewheel stop - FSt: Fast stop - tUn: Auto-tuning in progress The display flashes to indicate the presence of a fault.
Functions of the display and the keys

ATV31ppppppA:
Red LED "DC bus ON" Four 7-segment displays Returns to the previous menu or parameter, or increases the displayed value Goes to the next menu or parameter, or decreases the displayed value
Altivar 31
RUN CAN ERR
2 CANopen status LEDs Exits a menu or a parameter, or clears the displayed value to return to the previous stored value
ESC
ENT
Enters a menu or a parameter, or saves the displayed parameter or value STOP/RESET button Used to reset faults Can be used to control motor stopping - If tCC (I-O- menu) is not configured as LOC, it is a freewheel stop. - If tCC (I-O- menu) is configured as LOC, stopping is on a ramp, but if injection braking is in progress, a freewheel stop takes place.
Reference potentiometer, active if the Fr1 parameter in the CtL- menu is configured as AIP RUN button: Controls motor switch-on in forward mode, if parameter tCC in the I-O- menu is configured as LOC
RUN
STOP
RESET
Pressing
or
does not store the selection. or to scroll through the data quickly.
Press and hold down (>2 s) To save and store the selection: ENT The display flashes when a value is stored.
Normal display, with no fault present and no starting: - 43.0: Display of the parameter selected in the SUP- menu (default selection: output frequency applied to the motor). In current limit mode, the display flashes. - init: Initialization sequence - rdY: Drive ready - dcb: DC injection braking in progress - nSt: Freewheel stop - FSt: Fast stop - tUn: Auto-tuning in progress The display flashes to indicate the presence of a fault.
Remote terminal option
This module is a local control unit which can be mounted on the door of the wall-mounted or floor-standing enclosure. It has a cable with connectors, which is connected to the drive serial link (see the manual supplied with the terminal). It has the same display and the same programming buttons as the Altivar 31 with the addition of a switch to lock access to the menus and three buttons for controlling the drive: FWD/REV: reversal of the direction of rotation RUN: motor run command STOP/RESET: Motor stop command or fault reset Pressing the button a first time stops the motor, and if DC injection standstill braking is configured, pressing it a second time stops this braking. View of the front panel: View of the rear panel:
4-character display unit
ESC ENT
FWD REV
Connector
STOP RESET
RUN
Access locking switch: positions: settings and display accessible (SEt- and SUP- menus) all menus can be accessed
position:
Note: Customer password protection has priority on the switch.
The access locking switch on the remote terminal also prevents the drive settings being accessed via the keypad. When the remote terminal is disconnected, if the drive has been locked, the keypad will remain locked. In order for the remote terminal to be active, the tbr parameter in the COM- menu must remain in factory settings mode: 19.2 (see page 73).
Saving and loading configurations

Up to four complete configurations for ATV 31 drives can be stored on the remote terminal. These configurations can be saved, transported and transferred from one drive to another of the same rating. 4 different operations for the same device can also be stored on the terminal. See the SCS and FCS parameters in the drC-, I-O-, CtL- and FUn- menus.
10
Programming
Access to menus
Power-up
XXX
ESC ENT
Displays the drive status
bFr
ENT
Motor frequency (the factory setting is only visible the first time the drive is powered up)
ESC
SEtdrCI-OCtLFUnFLtCONSUP-
ENT ESC ENT ESC ENT ESC ENT ESC ENT ESC ENT ESC ENT ESC ENT ESC
Settings Motor control I/O Control Functions Faults Communication Monitoring
ESC
ESC
ESC
Menus
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
Some parameters can be accessed in a number of menus for increased user-friendliness: - Entering settings - Return to factory settings - Restoring and saving the configuration A dash appears after menu and sub-menu codes to differentiate them from parameter codes. Examples: FUn- menu, ACC parameter.
11
Programming
Accessing menu parameters
To save and store the selection:
ENT
The display flashes when a value is stored. Example: Value or assignment Parameter Menu
SEt-
ENT
ACC dEC
ENT
15 0
.
ESC
ESC
ESC
26 0
.
1 flash (save)
ENT
26 0
.
(Next parameter) All the menus are "drop-down" type menus, which means that after the last parameter, if you continue to press first parameter and, conversely, you can switch from the first parameter to the last parameter by pressing . , you will return to the
ENT
Menu
ESC
1st
nth
last
If, after modifying any of the parameters (nth), you quit a menu and return to this menu without having accessed another menu in the meantime, you will be taken directly to the nth parameter (see below). If, in the meantime, you have accessed another menu or have restarted the system, you will always be taken to the first parameter in the menu (see above).
1st
ENT
Menu
ESC
nth
last
Configuration of the bFr parameter

This parameter can only be modified in stop mode without a run command.
>.H
Code bFr Description Adjustment range Factory setting Standard motor frequency 50 This parameter is only visible the first time the drive is switched on. It can be modified at any time in the drC- menu. 50 Hz: IEC 60 Hz: NEMA This parameter modifies the presets of the following parameters: HSP page 16, Ftd page 19, FrS page 20 and tFr page 22.
12
Function compatibility
Incompatible functions
The following functions will be inaccessible or deactivated in the cases described below:
Automatic restart
This is only possible for 2-wire level detection control (tCC = 2C and tCt = LEL or PFO).
Flying restart
This is only possible for 2-wire level detection control (tCC = 2C and tCt = LEL or PFO). This function is locked if automatic standstill injection is configured as DC (AdC = Ct).
Reverse
On the ATV31pppA range only, this function is locked if local control is active (tCC = LOC).

The choice of application functions may be limited by the number of I/O and by the fact that some functions are incompatible with one another. Functions which are not listed in this table are fully compatible. If there is an incompatibility between functions, the first function configured will prevent the remainder being configured. Management of limit switches
DC injection stop
Brake sequence
Summing inputs
Summing inputs +/- speed (1) Management of limit switches Preset speeds PI regulator Jog operation Brake sequence DC injection stop Fast stop Freewheel stop
p p X p X p p p
A p
p p p p p p
A p A p p p X X
p X
p p p A A
(1) Excluding special application with reference channel Fr2 (see diagrams 28 and 30)
p Incompatible functions
Compatible functions
Not applicable
Priority functions (functions which cannot be active simultaneously): function indicated by the arrow has priority over the X A The other. Stop functions have priority over run commands. Speed references via logic command have priority over analog references.
Logic and analog input application functions

Each of the functions on the following pages can be assigned to one of the inputs. A single input can activate several functions at the same time (reverse and 2nd ramp for example). The user must therefore ensure that these functions are compatible. The SUP- display menu (parameters LIA and AIA on page 66) can be used to display the functions assigned to each input in order to check their compatibility.
Freewheel stop
Preset speeds
Jog operation
+/- speed (1)
PI regulator
Fast stop
13
List of functions which can be assigned to inputs/outputs
Logic inputs Not assigned Forward 2 preset speeds 4 preset speeds 8 preset speeds 16 preset speeds 2 preset PI references 4 preset PI references + speed - speed Jog operation Ramp switching Switching for 2nd current limit Fast stop via logic input DC injection via logic input Freewheel stop via logic input Reverse External fault RESET (fault reset) Forced local mode Reference switching Control channel switching Motor switching Limiting of forward motion (limit switch) Limiting of reverse motion (limit switch) Fault inhibit
Page 44 44 44 45 51 51 48 48 46 38 55 39 39 40 23 61 60 63 34 35 56 58 58 62
Code PS2 PS4 PS8 PS16 Pr2 Pr4 USP dSP JOG rPS LC2 FSt dCI nSt rrS EtF rSF FLO rFC CCS CHP LAF LAr InH
Factory setting ATV31pppA ATV31ppp LI5 - LI6 LI1 - LI2 LI5 - LI6 LI1 LI3 LI3 LI4 LI4
LI2
Analog inputs Not assigned Reference 1 Reference 2 Summing input 2 Summing input 3 PI regulator feedback
Page 33 33 42 42 51
Code Fr1 Fr2 SA2 SA3 PIF
Factory setting ATV31pppA ATV31ppp AI3 AI1 - AI3 AI1 AIP (potentiometer) AI2 AI2
Analog/logic output Not assigned Motor current Motor frequency Motor torque Power supplied by the drive Drive fault (logic data) Drive running (logic data) Frequency threshold reached (logic data) High speed (HSP) reached (logic data) Current threshold reached (logic data) Frequency reference reached (logic data) Motor thermal threshold reached (logic data) Brake sequence (logic data)
Page 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 54
Code OCr rFr OLO OPr FLt rUn FtA FLA CtA SrA tSA bLC
Factory setting AOC/AOV
14
List of functions which can be assigned to inputs/outputs
Relay Not assigned Drive fault Drive running Frequency threshold reached High speed (HSP) reached Current threshold reached Frequency reference reached Motor thermal threshold reached Brake sequence
Page 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 54
Code FLt rUn FtA FLA CtA SrA tSA bLC
Factory setting R2 R1
15
Settings menu SEt-
SEt-
ENT
LFr rPI ACC
ENT
Speed reference via the terminal
ESC ESC
ESC ENT
ESC ENT
ESC
ESC
ESC
SdS
ENT
Spd parameter scale factor

ESC
The adjustment parameters can be modified with the drive running or stopped. Check that it is safe to make changes during operation. Changes should preferably be made in stop mode. These parameter appear regardless of how the other menus have been configured. These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the corresponding function is also accessible and adjustable from within the configuration menu, to aid programming their description is detailed in these menus, on the pages indicated.
SEtCode LFr Adjustment Factory setting range Speed reference via the remote terminal 0 to HSP This parameter appears if LCC = YES (page 35) or if Fr1/Fr2 = LCC (page 33), and if the remote terminal is online. In this case, LFr can also be accessed via the drive keypad. LFr is reset to 0 when the drive is powered down. Internal PI regulator reference See page 51 0.0 to 100% 0 Acceleration ramp time 0.1 to 999.9 s 3s Defined as the acceleration time between 0 and the nominal frequency FrS (parameter in the drC- menu). 2nd acceleration ramp time See page 38 0.1 to 999.9 s 5s 2nd deceleration ramp time See page 38 0.1 to 999.9 s 5s Deceleration ramp time 0.1 to 999.9 s 3s Defined as the deceleration time between the nominal frequency FrS (parameter in the drC- menu) and 0. Check that the value of dEC is not too low in relation to the load to be stopped. Start of CUS-type acceleration ramp rounded See page 37 0 to 100 10% as % of total ramp time (ACC or AC2) End of CUS-type acceleration ramp rounded See page 37 0 to (100-tA1) 10% as % of total ramp time (ACC or AC2) Start of CUS-type deceleration ramp rounded See page 37 0 to 100 10% as % of total ramp time (dEC or dE2) End of CUS-type deceleration ramp rounded See page 37 0 to (100-tA3) 10% as % of total ramp time (dEC or dE2) Low speed 0 to HSP 0 Hz (Motor frequency at min. reference) High speed LSP to tFr bFr (Motor frequency to max. reference): Check that this setting is suitable for the motor and the application. Motor thermal protection - max. thermal current 0.2 to 1.5 In (1) According to drive rating Set ItH to the nominal current on the motor rating plate. Please refer to OLL on page 61 if you wish to suppress thermal protection. Description
rPI ACC AC2 dE2 dEC
tA1 tA2 tA3 tA4 LSP HSP ItH
(1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive rating plate.
16
Settings menu SEt-
SEtCode UFr Description IR compensation/voltage boost 20 - For UFt (page 21) = n or nLd: IR compensation - For UFt = L or P: Voltage boost Used to optimize the torque at very low speed (increase UFr if the torque is insufficient). Check that the value of UFr is not too high for when the motor is warm (risk of instability). Modifying UFt (page 21) will cause UFr to return to the factory setting (20%). Frequency loop gain 1 to 100% 20 Parameter can only be accessed if UFt (page 21) = n or nLd. The FLG parameter adjusts the drives ability to follow the speed ramp based on the inertia of the machine being driven. Too high a gain may result in operating instability.
Hz 50 40 30 20 10 0 -10 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 t
Adjustment range 0 to 100%
Factory setting
FLG
FLG low
Hz 50 40
FLG correct
Hz 50 40 30 20 10 0 -10
FLG high
In this case, increase FLG
30 20 10 0 -10 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 t
In this case, reduce FLG
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5 t
StA
Frequency loop stability 1 to 100% 20 Parameter can only be accessed if UFt (page 21) = n or nLd. Used to adapt the return to steady state after a speed transient (acceleration or deceleration), according to the dynamics of the machine. Gradually increase the stability to avoid any overspeed.
Hz 50 40 30 20 10 0 -10 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 t
StA low In this case, increase StA
Hz 50 40 30 20 10 0 -10 0 0.1
StA correct
Hz 50 40 30 20 10 0 -10
StA high In this case, reduce StA
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5 t
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5 t
SLP
IdC tdC tdC1 SdC1 tdC2 SdC2
Slip compensation 0 to 150% 100 Parameter can only be accessed if UFt (page 21) = n or nLd. Used to adjust the slip compensation value fixed by nominal motor speed. The speeds given on motor rating plates are not necessarily exact. If slip setting < actual slip: the motor is not rotating at the correct speed in steady state. If slip setting > actual slip: the motor is overcompensated and the speed is unstable. Level of DC injection braking current activated See page 39 0 to In (1) 0.7 In (1) via logic input or selected as stop mode (2). Total DC injection braking time selected as stop See page 39 0.1 to 30 s 0.5 s mode (2). Automatic standstill DC injection time See page 41 0.1 to 30 s 0.5 s Level of automatic standstill DC injection current See page 41 0 to 1.2 In (1) 0.7 In (1) 2nd automatic standstill DC injection time See page 41 0 to 30 s 0s 2nd level of standstill DC injection current See page 41 0 to 1.2 In (1) 0.5 In (1)
(1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive rating plate. (2) Caution: These settings are not related to the "automatic standstill DC injection" function. These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the corresponding function is also accessible and adjustable from within the configuration menu, to aid programming their description is detailed in these menus, on the pages indicated. Those which are underlined appear in factory settings mode.
17
Settings menu SEt-
SEtCode JPF Adjustment Factory setting range Skip frequency 0 to 500 0 Hz Prevents prolonged operation at a frequency range of 1 Hz around JPF. This function prevents a critical speed which leads to resonance. Setting the function to 0 renders it inactive. 0 to 500 0 Hz 2nd skip frequency Prevents prolonged operation at a frequency range of 1 Hz around JF2. This function prevents a critical speed which leads to resonance. Setting the function to 0 renders it inactive. Jog operating frequency See page 46 0 to 10 Hz 10 Hz PI regulator proportional gain See page 51 0.01 to 100 1 PI regulator integral gain See page 51 0.01 to 100/s 1/s PI feedback multiplication coefficient See page 51 0.1 to 100 1 Reversal of the direction of correction of the PI See page 51 nO - YES nO regulator 2nd preset PI reference See page 51 0 to 100% 30% 3rd preset PI reference See page 51 0 to 100% 60% 4th preset PI reference See page 51 0 to 100% 90% 2nd preset speed See page 45 0 to 500 Hz 10 Hz 3rd preset speed See page 45 0 to 500 Hz 15 Hz 4th preset speed See page 45 0 to 500 Hz 20 Hz 5th preset speed See page 45 0 to 500 Hz 25 Hz th 6 preset speed See page 45 0 to 500 Hz 30 Hz 7th preset speed See page 45 0 to 500 Hz 35 Hz 8th preset speed See page 45 0 to 500 Hz 40 Hz 9th preset speed See page 45 0 to 500 Hz 45 Hz 10th preset speed See page 45 0 to 500 Hz 50 Hz 11th preset speed See page 45 0 to 500 Hz 55 HZ 12th preset speed See page 45 0 to 500 Hz 60 Hz 13th preset speed See page 45 0 to 500 Hz 70 Hz th 14 preset speed See page 45 0 to 500 Hz 80 Hz 15th preset speed See page 45 0 to 500 Hz 90 Hz 16th preset speed See page 45 0 to 500 Hz 100 Hz Current limit 0.25 to 1.5 In (1) 1.5 In (1) Used to limit the torque and the temperature rise of the motor. 2nd current limit See page 55 0.25 to 1.5 In (1) 1.5 In (1) Low speed operating time 0 to 999.9 s 0 (no time limit) Following operation at LSP for a defined period, a motor stop is requested automatically. The motor restarts if the frequency reference is greater than LSP and if a run command is still present. Caution: Value 0 corresponds to an unlimited time Restart error threshold ("wake-up" threshold) See page 52 0 to 100% 0 IR compensation, motor 2 See page 57 0 to 100% 20 Frequency loop gain, motor 2 See page 57 1 to 100% 20 Stability, motor 2 See page 57 1 to 100% 20 Slip compensation, motor 2 See page 57 0 to 150% 100% Description
JF2
JGF rPG rIG FbS PIC rP2 rP3 rP4 SP2 SP3 SP4 SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8 SP9 SP10 SP11 SP12 SP13 SP14 SP15 SP16 CLI CL2 tLS
rSL UFr2 FLG2 StA2 SLP2
(1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive rating plate. These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the corresponding function is also accessible and adjustable from within the configuration menu, to aid programming their description is detailed in these menus, on the pages indicated. Those which are underlined appear in factory settings mode.
18
Settings menu SEt-
SEtCode Ftd ttd Ctd SdS Description Motor frequency threshold above which the relay contact bFr (R1 or R2 = FtA) closes or output AOV = 10 V (dO = StA) Motor thermal state threshold above which the relay contact (R1 0 to 118% 100% or R2 = tSA) closes or output AOV = 10 V (dO = tSA) Motor current threshold beyond which the relay contact 0 to 1.5 In (1) In (1) (R1 or R2 = CtA) closes or output AOV = 10 V (dO = CtA) Scale factor for display parameter SPd1/SPd2/SPd3 (SUP0.1 to 200 30 menu on page 65) Used to scale a value in proportion to the output frequency rFr: the machine speed, the motor speed, etc. - If SdS y 1, SPd1 is displayed (possible definition = 0.01) - If 1 < SdS y 10, SPd2 is displayed (possible definition = 0.1) - If SdS > 10, SPd3 is displayed (possible definition = 1) - If SdS > 10 and SdS x rFr > 9999: Display of Spd3 = SdS x rFr to 2 decimal places 1000 Adjustment range 0 to 500 Hz Factory setting
Example: For 24 223, display is 24.22 - If SdS > 10 and SdS x rFr > 65535, display locked at 65.54 Example: Display motor speed for 4-pole motor, 1500 rpm at 50 Hz (synchronous speed): SdS = 30 SPd3 = 1500 at rFr = 50 Hz Switching frequency See page 22 2.0 to 16 kHz This parameter can also be accessed in the drC- menu.
SFr
4 kHz
19
Motor control menu drC-
ENT
drC-
ESC ESC
bFr tAI
ESC ENT
Standard motor frequency
ESC
FCS
ESC ENT
Return to factory settings/restore configuration
With the exception of tUn, which can power up the motor, parameters can only be modified in stop mode, with no run command present. On the optional remote terminal, this menu can be accessed with the switch in the Drive performance can be optimized by: - Entering the values given on the motor rating plate in the drive menu - Performing an auto-tune operation (on a standard asynchronous motor) position.
drCCode bFr Description Adjustment range Factory setting Standard motor frequency 50 50 Hz: IEC 60 Hz: NEMA This parameter modifies the presets of the following parameters: HSP page 16, Ftd page 19, FrS page 20 and tFr page 22. Nominal motor voltage given on the rating plate According to drive According to drive rating rating ATV31pppM2: 100 to 240 V ATV31pppM3X: 100 to 240 V ATV31pppN4: 100 to 500 V ATV31pppS6X: 100 to 600 V Nominal motor frequency given on the rating plate 10 to 500 Hz 50 Hz The ratio UnS (in volts) must not exceed the following values: FrS (in Hz)
UnS
FrS
nCr nSP
ATV31pppM2: 7 max. ATV31pppM3X: 7 max. ATV31pppN4: 14 max. ATV31pppS6X: 17 max. The factory setting is 50 Hz, or preset to 60 Hz if bFr is set to 60 Hz. Nominal motor current given on the rating plate 0.25 to 1.5 In (1) Nominal motor speed given on the rating plate 0 to 32760 RPM
According to drive rating According to drive rating
0 to 9999 RPM then 10.00 to 32.76 KRPM If, rather than the nominal speed, the rating plate indicates the synchronous speed and the slip in Hz or as a %, calculate the nominal speed as follows: Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x or Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x or Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x COS Motor Cos Phi given on the rating plate 100 - slip as a % 100 50 - slip in Hz 50 60 - slip in Hz 60
(50 Hz motors) (60 Hz motors) 0.5 to 1 According to drive rating
20
drCCode rSC Description Adjustment range Factory setting Cold state stator resistance nO nO: Function inactive. For applications which do not require high performance or do not tolerate automatic autotuning (passing a current through the motor) each time the drive is powered up. InIt: Activates the function. To improve low-speed performance whatever the thermal state of the motor. XXXX: Value of cold state stator resistance used, in m. Caution: It is strongly recommended that this function is activated in Lifting and Handling applications. The function should only be activated (InIt) when the motor is in cold state. When rSC = InIt, parameter tUn is forced to POn. At the next run command, the stator resistance is measured with an auto-tune. Parameter rSC then changes to this value (XXXX) and maintains it; tUn remains forced to POn. Parameter rSC remains at InIt as long as the measurement has not been performed. Value XXXX can be forced or modified using the keys. Motor control auto-tuning nO It is essential that all the motor parameters (UnS, FrS, nCr, nSP, COS) are configured correctly before performing auto-tuning. nO: Auto-tuning not performed. YES: Auto-tuning is performed as soon as possible, then the parameter automatically switches to dOnE or nO in the event of a fault (the tnF fault is displayed if tnL = YES (see page 62). dOnE: Use of the values given the last time auto-tuning was performed. rUn: Auto-tuning is performed every time a run command is sent. POn: Auto-tuning is performed on every power-up. LI1 to LI6: Auto-tuning is performed on the transition from 0 V 1 of a logic input assigned to this function. Caution: tUn is forced to POn if rSC is other than nO. Auto-tuning is only performed if no command has been activated. If a "freewheel stop" or "fast stop" function is assigned to a logic input, this input must be set to 1 (active at 0). Auto-tuning may last for 1 to 2 seconds. Do not interrupt; wait for the display to change to "dOnE" or "nO". During auto-tuning the motor operates at nominal current. Auto-tuning status tAb (information only, cannot be modified) tAb: The default stator resistance value is used to control the motor. PEnd: Auto-tuning has been requested but not yet performed. PrOG: Auto-tuning in progress FAIL: Auto-tuning has failed. dOnE: The stator resistance measured by the auto-tuning function is used to control the motor. Strd: The cold state stator resistance (rSC other than nO) that is used to control the motor. Selection of the type of voltage/frequency ratio n L: Constant torque for motors connected in parallel or special motors P: Variable torque: pump and fan applications n: Sensorless flux vector control for constant torque applications nLd: Energy saving, for variable torque applications not requiring high dynamics (behaves in a similar way to the P ratio at no load and the n ratio on load) Voltage
UnS
tUn
tUS
UFt
L n P FrS
Frequency
21
drCCode nrd Description Adjustment range Factory setting Random switching frequency YES YES: Frequency with random modulation nO: Fixed frequency Random frequency modulation prevents any resonance which may occur at a fixed frequency. Switching frequency 2.0 to 16 kHz 4 kHz (1) The frequency can be adjusted to reduce the noise generated by the motor. If the frequency has been set to a value higher than 4 kHz, in the event of an excessive rise in temperature, the drive will automatically reduce the switching frequency and increase it again once the temperature has returned to normal. Maximum output frequency 10 to 500 Hz 60 Hz The factory setting is 60 Hz, or preset to 72 Hz if bFr is set to 60 Hz. Suppression of the speed loop filter nO nO: The speed loop filter is active (prevents the reference being exceeded). YES: The speed loop filter is suppressed (in position control applications, this reduces the response time and the reference may be exceeded).
Hz 50 40 30 20 10 0 -10 0 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 t Hz 50 40 30 20 10 0 -10 0 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 t
SFr
tFr SrF
SrF = nO
SrF = YES
SCS
FCS
Saving the configuration nO (1) nO: Function inactive StrI: Saves the current configuration (but not the result of auto-tuning) to EEPROM. SCS automatically switches to nO as soon as the save has been performed. This function is used to keep another configuration in reserve, in addition to the current configuration. When drives leave the factory the current configuration and the backup configuration are both initialized with the factory configuration. If the remote terminal option is connected to the drive, the following additional selection options will appear: FIL1, FIL2, FIL3, FIL4 (files available in the remote terminal's EEPROM memory for saving the current configuration). They can be used to store between 1 and 4 different configurations which can also be stored on or even transferred to other drives of the same rating. SCS automatically switches to nO as soon as the save has been performed. Return to factory settings/restore configuration nO (1) nO: Function inactive rECI: The current configuration becomes identical to the backup configuration previously saved by SCS = StrI. rECI is only visible if the backup has been carried out. FCS automatically changes to nO as soon as this action has been performed. InI: The current configuration becomes identical to the factory setting. FCS automatically changes to nO as soon as this action has been performed. If the remote terminal option is connected to the drive, the following additional selection options appear, as long as the corresponding files have been loaded in the remote terminal's EEPROM memory (0 to 4 files): FIL1, FIL2, FIL3, FIL4. They enable the current configuration to be replaced with one of the 4 configurations which may be loaded on the remote terminal. FCS automatically changes to nO as soon as this action has been performed. Caution: If nAd appears on the display briefly once the parameter has switched to nO, this means that the configuration transfer is not possible and has not been performed (different drive ratings for example). If ntr appears on the display briefly once the parameter has switched to nO, this means that a configuration transfer error has occurred and the factory settings must be restored using InI. In both cases, check the configuration to be transferred before trying again. For rECI, InI and FL1 to FL4 to be taken into account, the ENT key must be held down for 2 s.
(1) SCS and FCS can be accessed via several configuration menus but they concern all menus and parameters as a whole. (2) Parameter can also be accessed in the settings menu (SEt-).
22
I/O menu I-O-
ENT
I-O-
ESC ESC
tCC
ESC ENT
2-wire/3-wire control
ESC
FCS
ESC ENT
The parameters can only be modified when the drive is stopped and no run command is present. On the optional remote terminal, this menu can be accessed with the switch in the position.
I-OCode tCC Description Factory setting 2-wire/3-wire control 2C (Type of control) ATV31pppA: LOC Control configuration: 2C = 2-wire control 3C = 3-wire control LOC = local control (drive RUN/STOP/RESET) for ATV31pppA only (invisible if LAC = L3, see page 33). 2-wire control: The open or closed state of the input controls running or stopping. Wiring example: LI1: forward LIx: reverse
ATV 31 24 V
LI1 LIx
3-wire control (pulse control): A "forward" or "reverse" pulse is sufficient to control starting, a "stop" pulse is sufficient to control stopping. Example of wiring: ATV 31 LI1: stop 24 V LI1 LI2 LIx LI2: forward LIx: reverse To change the assignment of tCC press the "ENT" key for 2 s. This causes the following functions to return to their factory setting: rrS, tCt and all functions affecting logic inputs. tCt Type of 2-wire control (parameter only accessible if tCC = 2C) trn LEL: State 0 or 1 is taken into account for run or stop. trn: A change of state (transition or edge) is necessary to initiate operation, in order to prevent accidental restarts after a break in the power supply. PFO: State 0 or 1 is taken into account for run or stop, but the "forward" input always takes priority over the "reverse" input. Reverse operation via logic input if tCC = 2C: LI2 if tCC = 3C: LI3 if tCC = LOC: nO If rrS = nO, reverse operation is active, by means of negative voltage on AI2 for example. nO: Not assigned LI2: Logic input LI2, can be accessed if tCC = 2C LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6
rrS
23
I/O menu I-O-
I-OCode CrL3 CrH3 Description Factory setting Value for low speed (LSP) on input AI3, can be set between 0 and 20 mA 4 mA Value for high speed (HSP) on input AI3, can be set between 4 and 20 mA 20 mA These two parameters are used to configure the input for 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA, 20-4 mA, etc. Frequency Frequency
HSP
Example: 20 - 4 mA
HSP
LSP 0 CrL3 CrH3 20 AI 3 (mA)
LSP 0 CrH3 (4 mA) CrL3 (20 mA) AI 3 (mA)
AO1t
dO
Configuration of the analog output 0A 0A: 0 - 20 mA configuration (use terminal AOC) 4A: 4 - 20 mA configuration (use terminal AOC) 10U: 0 - 10 V configuration (use terminal AOV) Analog/logic output AOC/AOV nO nO: Not assigned OCr: Motor current. 20 mA or 10 V corresponds to twice the nominal drive current. OFr: Motor frequency. 20 mA or 10 V corresponds to the maximum frequency tFr (page 22). Otr: Motor torque. 20 mA or 10 V corresponds to twice the nominal motor torque. OPr: Power supplied by the drive. 20 mA or 10 V corresponds to twice the nominal drive power. Making the following assignments (1) will transform the analog output to a logic output (see the diagram in the Installation Manual): FLt: Drive fault rUn: Drive running FtA: Frequency threshold reached (Ftd parameter in the SEt- menu, page 19) FLA: High speed (HSP) reached CtA: Current threshold reached (Ctd parameter in the SEt- menu, page 19) SrA: Frequency reference reached tSA: Motor thermal threshold reached (ttd parameter in the SEt- menu, page 19) bLC: Brake sequence (for information, as this assignment can be only be activated or deactivated from the FUn- menu, see page 54) APL: Loss of 4-20 mA signal, even if LFL = nO (page 62) The logic output is in state 1 (24 V) when the selected assignment is active, with the exception of FLt (state 1 if the drive is not faulty). (1) With these assignments, configure AOt = 0A.
r1
r2
Relay r1 FLt nO: Not assigned FLt: Drive fault rUn: Drive running FtA: Frequency threshold reached (Ftd parameter in the SEt- menu, page 19) FLA: High speed (HSP) reached CtA: Current threshold reached (Ctd parameter in the SEt- menu, page 19) SrA: Frequency reference reached tSA: Motor thermal threshold reached (ttd parameter in the SEt- menu, page 19) APL: Loss of 4-20 mA signal, even if LFL = nO (page 62) The relay is powered up when the selected assignment is active, with the exception of FLt (powered up if the drive is not faulty). Relay r2 nO nO: Not assigned FLt: Drive fault rUn: Drive running FtA: Frequency threshold reached (Ftd parameter in the SEt- menu, page 19) FLA: High speed (HSP) reached CtA: Current threshold reached (Ctd parameter in the SEt- menu, page 19) SrA: Frequency reference reached tSA: Motor thermal threshold reached (ttd parameter in the SEt- menu, page 19) bLC: Brake sequence (for information, as this assignment can be only be activated or deactivated from the FUn- menu, see page 54) APL: Loss of 4-20 mA signal, even if LFL = nO (page 62) The relay is powered up when the selected assignment is active, with the exception of FLt (powered up if the drive is not faulty).
24
I/O menu I-O-
I-OCode SCS Description Factory setting Saving the configuration (1) nO: Function inactive StrI: Saves the current configuration (but not the result of auto-tuning) to EEPROM. SCS automatically switches to nO as soon as the save has been performed. This function is used to keep another configuration in reserve, in addition to the current configuration. When drives leave the factory the current configuration and the backup configuration are both initialized with the factory configuration. If the remote terminal option is connected to the drive, the following additional selection options will appear: FIL1, FIL2, FIL3, FIL4 (files available in the remote terminal's EEPROM memory for saving the current configuration). They can be used to store between 1 and 4 different configurations which can also be stored on or even transferred to other drives of the same rating. SCS automatically switches to nO as soon as the save has been performed. Return to factory settings/restore configuration (1) nO: Function inactive rECI: The current configuration becomes identical to the backup configuration previously saved by SCS = StrI. rECI is only visible if the backup has been carried out. FCS automatically changes to nO as soon as this action has been performed. InI: The current configuration becomes identical to the factory setting. FCS automatically changes to nO as soon as this action has been performed. If the remote terminal option is connected to the drive, the following additional selection options appear, as long as the corresponding files have been loaded in the remote terminal's EEPROM memory (0 to 4 files): FIL1, FIL2, FIL3, FIL4. They enable the current configuration to be replaced with one of the 4 configurations that may be loaded on the remote terminal. FCS automatically changes to nO as soon as this action has been performed. Caution: If nAd appears on the display briefly once FCS has switched to nO, this means that the configuration transfer is not possible and has not been performed (different drive ratings for example). If ntr appears on the display briefly once the parameter has switched to nO, this means that a configuration transfer error has occurred and the factory settings must be restored using InI. In both cases, check the configuration to be transferred before trying again. For rECI, InI and FL1 to FL4 to be taken into account, the ENT key must be held down for 2 s. (1) SCS and FCS can be accessed via several configuration menus but they concern all menus and parameters as a whole.
FCS
25
Control menu CtL-
ENT
CtL-
ESC ESC
LAC Fr1
ESC ENT
Function access level
ESC
FCS
ESC ENT
Control and reference channels

Run commands (forward, reverse, etc.) and references can be sent using the following methods: Command CMD tEr: Terminal (LI.) LOC: Keypad (RUN/STOP) on ATV31pppA only LCC: Remote terminal (RJ45 socket) Mdb: Modbus (RJ45 socket) CAn: CANopen (RJ45 socket) Reference rFr AI1-AI2-AI3: Terminal AIP: Potentiometer on ATV31pppA only LCC: ATV31 keypad or ATV31pppA keypad or remote terminal Mdb: Modbus (RJ45 socket) CAn: CANopen (RJ45 socket)
Note: The STOP keys on the keypad and the remote terminal may retain priority (PSt parameter in the CtL- menu). The LAC parameter in the CtL- menu can be used to select priority modes for the control and reference channels. It has 3 function levels: LAC = L1: LAC = L2: Basic functions, with priority via communication bus. This level is interchangeable with ATV28. Provides the option of additional functions compared with L1: - +/- speed (motorized potentiometer) - Brake control - Switching for 2nd current limit - Motor switching - Management of limit switches Same options as with L2, plus mixed mode for control and reference channels.
LAC = L3:
These channels can be combined as follows if parameter LAC = L1 or L2.

Highest priority to lowest priority: Local forcing, CANopen, Modbus, Remote terminal, Terminal/Keypad (from right to left in the diagram below).
Terminal/Keypad
LCC
Remote terminal
Modbus CANopen
FLO
Forced local mode
See the detailed diagrams on pages 28 and 29. On ATV31 drives, in factory settings mode, control and reference are managed by the terminal. On ATV31pppA drives, in factory settings mode, control is via the keypad and the reference is set via the potentiometer for this keypad. With a remote terminal, if LCC = YES (CtL- menu), control and reference are managed by the remote terminal (reference via LFr, SEtmenu).
26
Control menu CtLThese channels can be combined in other ways described below if LAC = L3. Combined control and reference (parameter CHCF = SIM):
Selection of reference channel: parameter Fr1 The control channel is connected to the same source. Selection of reference channel: parameter Fr2 The control channel is connected to the same source.
Control and reference
H.+
Parameter rFC can be used to select channel Fr1 or Fr2 or to configure a logic input or a control word bit for remote switching of either. See the detailed diagrams on pages 30 et 32.
Separate control and reference (parameter CHCF = SEP):

Reference
Selection of reference channel: parameter Fr1 Reference
Selection of reference channel: parameter Fr2
H.+
Parameter rFC can be used to select channel Fr1 or Fr2 or to configure a logic input or a control word bit for remote switching of either.
Control
Selection of control channel: parameter Cdl Control
Selection of control channel: parameter Cd2
++5
Parameter CCS can be used to select channel Cd1 or Cd2 or to configure a logic input or a control word bit for remote switching of either. See the detailed diagrams on pages 30 and 31.
27
Control menu CtLReference channel for LAC = L1 or L2
Fr1
UPdt UPdH AI1 AI2 AI3 AIP
Preset speeds nO Remote terminal
+ speed speed
Note: If the +/- speed command is configured (Fr1 = UPdt or UPdH), summing inputs SA2/SA3 are not active.
LFr
SA2
nO AI1 AI2 AI3 AIP
(SP1) SP2 LI SP16 LI

PI not assigned nO PI assigned Jog operation
SA3
nO AI1 AI2 AI3 AIP nO AI1 AI2 AI3
PIF
PI function see page 49
YES
PIF
Channel 1
Ramps
nO
nO
HSP nO LSP
.H0
ACC DEC AC2 DE2
H.H
UPdt UPdH nO AI1 AI2 AI3 AIP
+ speed speed
Channel 2
Fr2
rFC
LCC
Modbus Forced local mode CANopen
FLO
"Modbus" or "CANopen" is selected online by writing the appropriate control word (see the busspecific documentation).
Key: Parameter: The black square represents the factory setting assignment Function accessible for LAC = L2
28
Control menu CtLControl channel for LAC = L1 or L2

Parameters FLO, LCC and the selection of the Modbus or CANopen bus are common to the reference and control channels. Example: LCC = YES sets the drive to control and reference via the remote terminal.
tCC
LI LI 2C 3C LOC
LCC
nO YES nO
LI
FLO
CMD
Forward Reverse STOP
Modbus RUN STOP RUN STOP FWD / REV Remote terminal
CANopen
ATV31pppA keypad
ATV31pppA keypad
STOP nO YES
STOP
Remote terminal Key: Parameter: The black square represents the factory setting assignment
(STOP priority)
PSt
29
Control menu CtLReference channel for LAC = L3
Fr1
UPdt UPdH
+ speed speed
Note: If the +/- speed command is configured (Fr1 = UPdt or UPdH), summing inputs SA2/SA3 are not active.
FLOC
AI1 AI2
AI1 AI2
LFr
Remote terminal
AI3 AIP LCC Mdb
Preset speeds
nO
LFr
Remote terminal
AI3 AIP LCC
(SP1) CAn SP2
SA2
nO LI AI1 Mdb AI2 CAn
SP16
LI
Jog operation PI not assigned

nO
PIF
LFr
Remote terminal
AI3 AIP LCC
PI assigned Channel 1 Ramps

HSP nO nO
Mdb CAn
LI
SA3
nO AI1 AI2
.H0
ACC DEC
H.H
Channel 2
rFC
FLO
LSP
AC2 DE2
Forced local mode
LFr
Remote terminal
AI3 AIP LCC nO Mdb AI1 CAn AI2
PIF
)
PI function see page 49
Fr2
UPdt UPdH
AI3
+ speed speed
nO AI1 AI2
Key:
LFr
Remote terminal
AI3 AIP LCC Mdb CAn
Parameter: The black square represents the factory setting assignment
30
Control menu CtLControl channel for LAC = L3

Combined reference and control
Parameters Fr1, Fr2, rFC, FLO and FLOC are common to reference and control. The control channel is therefore determined by the reference channel. Example: If reference Fr1 = AI1 (analog input on terminal block) control is via LI (logic input on terminal block)..
Fr1
LI LI UPdt UPdH AI1 AI2 AI3 AIP LCC Mdb CAn
ATV31pppA keypad
FLOC
AI1 AI2 AI3 AIP LCC
(RUN / STOP) (RUN / STOP FWD / REV
ATV31pppA keypad
RUN STOP RUN / STOP FWD / REV
Remote terminal
LI
Remote terminal
rFC
SEP
CHCF
FLO
nO
ATV31pppA keypad
Forced local mode
SIM STOP nO YES
CMD
Fr2
LI UPdt UPdH nO AI1 AI2 AI3 AIP LCC Mdb CAn
STOP
Remote terminal
PSt
(STOP has priority)
ATV31pppA keypad
RUN STOP RUN / STOP FWD / REV

Key:
Remote terminal
31
Control menu CtLControl channel for LAC = L3

Mixed mode (separate reference and control)
Parameters FLO and FLOC are common to reference and control. Example: If the reference is in local forced mode via AI1 (analog input on terminal block) control in local forced mode is via LI (logic input on terminal block).
Cd1
LI LI tEr
FLOC
AI1 AI2 AI3 AIP LCC
ATV31pppA keypad
RUN STOP LOC
Keypad ATV31pppA
(RUN / STOP)
RUN / STOP FWD / REV
(RUN / STOP LCC Mdb CAn FWD / REV)
Remote terminal
Remote terminal
LI LI
CCS
SIM
CHCF
SEP
FLO
nO
Forced
local
ATV31pppA keypad
STOP nO YES
CMD
Cd2
LI tEr
STOP
Remote terminal
(STOP has priority)
PSt
ATV31pppA keypad
RUN STOP LOC
RUN / STOP FWD / REV
LCC Mdb CAn
Remote terminal
Key:
32
Control menu CtL-
There may be an incompatibility between functions (see the incompatibility table 13). In this case, the first function configured will prevent the remainder being configured.
CtLCode LAC Description Adjustment range Factory setting Function access level L1 L1: Access to standard functions. Significantly, this level is interchangeable with ATV28. L2: Access to advanced functions in the FUn- menu: - +/- speed (motorized potentiometer) - Brake control - Switching for second current limit - Motor switching - Management of limit switches L3: Access to advanced functions and management of mixed control modes. Assigning LAC to L3 will restore the factory settings of the Fr1 (below), Cd1 (page 34), CHCF (page 34), and tCC (page 23) parameters. The latter is forced to "2C" on ATV31pppA. L3 can only be restored to L2 or L1 and L2 to L1 by means of a "factory setting" via FCS (page 36). In order to change the assignment of LAC, you must press and hold down the "ENT" key for 2 seconds. Configuration reference 1 AI1 AIP for ATV31pppA AI1: Analog input AI1 AI2: Analog input AI2 AI3: Analog input AI3 AIP: Potentiometer (ATV31pppA only) If LAC = L2 or L3, the following additional assignments are possible: UPdt: (1) + speed/- speed via LI UpdH: (1) + speed/- speed via keys r on the ATV31 or ATV31pppA keypad or remote terminal. For operation, display the frequency rFr (see page 65) If LAC = L3, the following additional assignments are possible: LCC: Reference via the remote terminal, LFr parameter in the SEt- menu page 16. Ndb: Reference via Modbus CAn: Reference via CANopen Configuration reference 2 nO: Not assigned AI1: Analog input AI1 AI2: Analog input AI2 AI3: Analog input AI3 AIP: Potentiometer (ATV31pppA only) If LAC = L2 or L3, the following additional assignments are possible: UPdt: (1) + speed/- speed via LI UpdH: (1) + speed/- speed via keys r on the ATV31 or ATV31pppA keypad or remote terminal. For operation, display the frequency rFr (see page 65) If LAC = L3, the following additional assignments are possible: LCC: Reference via the remote terminal, LFr parameter in the SEt- menu page 16. Ndb: Reference via Modbus CAn: Reference via CANopen (1) Caution: You cannot assign UPdt to Fr1 or Fr2 and UPdH to Fr1 or Fr2 at the same time. Only one of the UPdt/UPdH assignments is permitted on each reference channel.
r r
Fr1
Fr2
nO
33
Control menu CtL-
CtLCode rFC Description Adjustment range Factory setting Reference switching Fr1 Parameter rFC can be used to select channel Fr1 or Fr2 or to configure a logic input or a control bit for remote switching of Fr1 or Fr2. Fr1: Reference = Reference 1 Fr2: Reference = Reference 2 LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following additional assignments are possible: C111: Bit 11 of the Modbus control word C112: Bit 12 of the Modbus control word C113: Bit 13 of the Modbus control word C114: Bit 14 of the Modbus control word C115: Bit 15 of the Modbus control word C211: Bit 11 of the CANopen control word C212: Bit 12 of the CANopen control word C213: Bit 13 of the CANopen control word C214: Bit 14 of the CANopen control word C215: Bit 15 of the CANopen control word The reference can be switched with the drive running. Fr1 is active when the logic input or control word bit is in state 0. Fr2 is active when the logic input or control word bit is in state 1. Mixed mode (control channels separated from reference channels) Can be accessed if LAC = L3 SIN: Combined SEP: Separate Configuration of control channel 1
CHCF
SIM
Cd1
tEr LOC for ATV31pppA
Cd2
Can be accessed if CHCF = SEP and LAC = L3 tEr: Terminal block control LOC: Keypad control (ATV31pppA only) LCC: Remote terminal control Ndb: Control via Modbus CAn: Control via CAN Configuration of control channel 2 Can be accessed if CHCF = SEP and LAC = L3 tEr: Terminal block control LOC: Keypad control (ATV31pppA only) LCC: Remote terminal control Ndb: Control via Modbus CAn: Control via CAN
Mdb:
These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.
34
Control menu CtL-
CtLCode CCS Description Adjustment range Factory setting Control channel switching Cd1 Can be accessed if CHCF = SEP and LAC = L3 Parameter CCS can be used to select channel Cd1 or Cd2 or to configure a logic input or a control bit for remote switching of Cd1 or Cd2. Cd1: Control channel = Channel 1 Cd2: Control channel = Channel 2 LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 C111: Bit 11 of the Modbus control word C112: Bit 12 of the Modbus control word C113: Bit 13 of the Modbus control word C114: Bit 14 of the Modbus control word C115: Bit 15 of the Modbus control word C211: Bit 11 of the CANopen control word C212: Bit 12 of the CANopen control word C213: Bit 13 of the CANopen control word C214: Bit 14 of the CANopen control word C215: Bit 15 of the CANopen control word Channel 1 is active when the input or control word bit is in state 0. Channel 2 is active when the input or control word bit is in state 1. Copy channel 1 to channel 2 nO (copy only in this direction) Can be accessed if LAC = L3 nO: No copy SP: Copy reference Cd: Copy control ALL: Copy control and reference If channel 2 is controlled via the terminal block, channel 1 control is not copied. If channel 2 reference is set via AI1, AI2, AI3 or AIP, channel 1 reference is not copied. The reference copied is FrH (before ramp) unless the channel 2 reference is set via +/- speed. In this case, the reference copied is rFr (after ramp) - Copying the control and/or the reference may change the direction of rotation. LCC Control via remote terminal nO Parameter can only be accessed with the remote terminal option and if LAC = L1 or L2. nO: Function inactive YES: Enables control of the drive using the STOP/RESET, RUN and FWD/REV buttons on the terminal. The speed reference is then given by parameter LFr in the SEt- menu. Only the freewheel, fast stop and DC injection stop commands remain active on the terminal block. If the drive/terminal connection is cut or if the terminal has not been connected, the drive locks in an SLF fault. Stop priority YES This function gives priority to the STOP key on the keypad (ATV31pppA only) or the STOP key on the remote terminal, regardless of the control channel (terminal block or communication bus). nO: Function inactive YES: STOP key priority In order to change the assignment of PSt, you must press and hold down the "ENT" key for 2 seconds. Direction of operation authorized dFr Direction of operation authorized for the RUN key on the keypad (ATV31pppA only) or the RUN key on the remote terminal. dFr: Forward drS: Reverse bOt: Both directions are authorized (except for the keypad on the ATV31pppA: Forward only).
COp
PSt
rOt
35
Control menu CtL-
CtLCode SCS Description Adjustment range Factory setting Saving the configuration (1) nO: Function inactive StrI: Saves the current configuration (but not the result of auto-tuning) to EEPROM. SCS automatically switches to nO as soon as the save has been performed. This function is used to keep another configuration in reserve, in addition to the current configuration. When drives leave the factory the current configuration and the backup configuration are both initialized with the factory configuration. If the remote terminal option is connected to the drive, the following additional selection options will appear: FIL1, FIL2, FIL3, FIL4 (files available in the remote terminal's EEPROM memory for saving the current configuration). They can be used to store between 1 and 4 different configurations which can also be stored on or even transferred to other drives of the same rating. SCS automatically switches to nO as soon as the save has been performed. Return to factory settings/Restore configuration (1) nO: Function inactive rECI: The current configuration becomes identical to the backup configuration previously saved by SCS = StrI. rECI is only visible if the backup has been carried out. FCS automatically changes to nO as soon as this action has been performed. InI: The current configuration becomes identical to the factory setting. FCS automatically changes to nO as soon as this action has been performed. If the remote terminal option is connected to the drive, the following additional selection options appear, as long as the corresponding files have been loaded in the remote terminal's EEPROM memory (0 to 4 files): FIL1, FIL2, FIL3, FIL4. They enable the current configuration to be replaced with one of the 4 configurations that may be loaded on the remote terminal. FCS automatically changes to nO as soon as this action has been performed. Caution: If nAd appears on the display briefly once FCS has switched to nO, this means that the configuration transfer is not possible and has not been performed (different drive ratings for example). If ntr appears on the display briefly once the parameter has switched to nO, this means that a configuration transfer error has occurred and the factory settings must be restored using InI. In both cases, check the configuration to be transferred before trying again. For rECI, InI and FL1 to FL4 to be taken into account, the ENT key must be held down for 2 s. (1) SCS and FCS can be accessed via several configuration menus but they concern all menus and parameters as a whole.
FCS
36
Application functions menu FUn-
ENT
FUn-
ESC
rPCSA1FCS
ENT
ENT
ESC
ESC
Sub-menu
ESC
ENT
ENT
Sub-menu
ESC
ESC
ESC
ENT
ESC
The parameters can only be modified when the drive is stopped and no run command is present. On the optional remote terminal, this menu can be accessed with the switch in the position. Some functions have numerous parameters. In order to clarify programming and avoid having to scroll through endless parameters, these functions have been grouped in sub-menus. Like menus, sub-menus are identified by a dash after their code: PSS- for example. There may be an incompatibility between functions (see the incompatibility table 13). In this case, the first function configured will prevent the remainder being configured.
FUnCode rPCrPt Description Adjustment range Factory setting Ramps Type of ramp Defines the shape of the acceleration and deceleration ramps. LIn: Linear S: S ramp U: U ramp CUS: Customized S ramps
LIn
The curve coefficient is fixed, with t2 = 0.6 x t1 with t1 = set ramp time.
t2 t1 t
t2 t1
f (Hz) HSP
U ramps
f (Hz) HSP
The curve coefficient is fixed, with t2 = 0.5 x t1 with t1 = set ramp time.
t1 t2 t
0 t1
t2
Customized ramps
0 tA1
tA2 ACC or AC2
0 t tA3
tA4 dEC or dE2
tA1: Can be set between 0 and 100% (of ACC or AC2) tA2: Can be set between 0 and (100% - tA1) (of ACC or AC2) tA3: Can be set between 0 and 100% (of dEC or dE2) tA4: Can be set between 0 and (100% - tA3) (of dEC or dE2) 0 to 100 10%
tA1
Start of CUS-type acceleration ramp rounded as % of total ramp time (ACC or AC2)
37
FUnCode rPC(continued) tA2 tA3 tA4 ACC dEC Description Adjustment Factory setting range End of CUS-type acceleration ramp rounded as 0 to (100-tA1) 10% % of total ramp time (ACC or AC2) Start of CUS-type deceleration ramp rounded 0 to 100 10% as % of total ramp time (dEC or dE2) End of CUS-type deceleration ramp 0 to (100-tA3) 10% as % of total ramp time (dEC or dE2) Acceleration and deceleration ramp times (1) 0.1 to 999.9 s 3s 0.1 to 999.9 s 3s Defined for accelerating and decelerating between 0 and the nominal frequency FrS (parameter in the drC- menu). Check that the value of dEC is not too low in relation to the load to be stopped. Ramp switching nO This function remains active regardless of the control channel. nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word ACC and dEC are enabled when the logic input or control word bit is in state 0. AC2 and dE2 are enabled when the logic input or control word bit is in state 1. Ramp switching threshold 0 to 500 Hz 0 The second ramp is switched if the value of Frt is not equal to 0 (0 deactivates the function) and the output frequency is greater than Frt. Threshold ramp switching can be combined with switching via LI or bit as follows: LI or bit 0 0 1 1 AC2 Frequency <Frt >Frt <Frt >Frt Ramp ACC, dEC AC2, dE2 AC2, dE2 AC2, dE2
rPS
Frt
dE2
brA
2nd acceleration ramp time (1): 0.1 to 999.9 s 5s Enabled via logic input (rPS) or frequency threshold (Frt). 2nd deceleration ramp time (1): 0.1 to 999.9 s 5s Enabled via logic input (rPS) or frequency threshold (Frt). Deceleration ramp adaptation YES Activating this function automatically adapts the deceleration ramp, if this has been set at too low a value for the inertia of the load. nO: Function inactive YES: Function active. The function is incompatible with applications requiring: Positioning on a ramp The use of a braking resistor (no guarantee of the function operating correctly) brA is forced to nO if brake control (bLC) is assigned (page 54).
(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the SEt- menu. These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.
38
FUnCode StCStt Description Adjustment range Factory setting Stop modes Normal stop mode Stn Stop mode on disappearance of the run command or appearance of a stop command. rMP: On ramp FSt: Fast stop nSt: Freewheel stop dCI: DC injection stop Fast stop via logic input nO nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word The stop is activated when the logic state of the input changes to 0 and the control word bit changes to 1. The fast stop is a stop on a reduced ramp via parameter dCF. If the input falls back to state 1 and the run command is still active, the motor will only restart if 2-wire level control has been configured (tCC = 2C and tCt = LEL or PFO, see page 23). In other cases, a new run command must be sent. Coefficient for dividing the deceleration ramp 0 to 10 4 time for fast stopping. Ensure that the reduced ramp is not too low in relation to the load to be stopped. The value 0 corresponds to the minimum ramp. DC injection via logic input nO nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Braking is activated when the logic state of the input or control word bit is at 1. Level of DC injection braking current activated 0 to In (2) 0.7 In (2) via logic input or selected as stop mode (1)(3) After 5 seconds the injection current is peak limited at 0.5 Ith if it is set at a higher value. Total DC injection braking time selected as 0.1 to 30 s 0.5 s normal stop mode (1)(3)
FSt
dCF
dCI
IdC
tdC
(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the settings menu (SEt-). (2) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive rating plate. (3) Caution: These settings are not related to the "automatic standstill DC injection" function. These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.
39
FUnCode StC(continued) nSt Description Freewheel stop via logic input nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 Adjustment range Factory setting nO
The stop is activated when the input is in logic state 0. If the input falls back to state 1 and the run command is still active, the motor will only restart if 2-wire level control has been configured. In other cases, a new run command must be sent.
40
FUnCode AdCAdC Description Adjustment range Factory setting Standstill DC injection Automatic standstill DC injection YES (at the end of the ramp) nO: No injection YES: Standstill injection for adjustable period Ct: Continuous standstill injection This parameter gives rise to the injection of current even if a run command has not been sent. It can be accessed with the drive running. Automatic standstill DC injection time (1) Level of automatic standstill DC injection current (1) 0.1 to 30 s 0 to 1.2 In (2) 0.5 s 0.7 In (2)
tdC1 SdC1
Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating. tdC2 SdC2 2 automatic standstill DC injection time (1) 2nd level of standstill DC injection current (1)
nd
0 to 30 s 0 to 1.2 In (2)
0s 0.5 In (2)
Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating.
AdC
SdC2
Operation
I SdC1
YES
SdC2
tdC1
tdC1 + tdC2
Ct
SdC1 SdC2
tdC1
Ct
=0
SdC1
Run command
0 t
Speed
0 t
(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the settings menu (SEt-). (2) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive rating plate. These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.
41
FUnCode SAISA2 Description Adjustment range Factory setting Summing inputs Can be used to sum one or two inputs to reference Fr1 only. Summing input 2 nO: Not assigned AI1: Analog input AI1 AI2: Analog input AI2 AI3: Analog input AI3 AIP: Potentiometer (type A drives only) If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: Ndb: Reference via Modbus CAn: Reference via CANopen LCC: Reference via the remote terminal, LFr parameter in the SEt- menu page 16. Summing input 3 nO nO: Not assigned AI1: Analog input AI1 AI2: Analog input AI2 AI3: Analog input AI3 AIP: Potentiometer (type A drives only) If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: Ndb: Reference via Modbus CAn: Reference via CANopen LCC: Reference via the remote terminal, LFr parameter in the SEt- menu page 16. AI2
SA3
Summing inputs
.H 5) 5)!
See the complete diagrams on pages 28 and 30.
Note:
AI2 is an input 10 V, which can allow a subtraction by summing a negative signal.
42
Application functions menu FUnPreset speeds

2, 4, 8 or 16 speeds can be preset, requiring 1, 2, 3 or 4 logic inputs respectively. The following order of assignments must be observed: PS2, then PS4 then PS8, then PS16. Combination table for preset speed inputs 16 speeds LI (PS16) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 8 speeds LI (PS8) 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 4 speeds LI (PS4) 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 2 speeds LI (PS2) 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Speed reference Reference (1) SP2 SP3 SP4 SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8 SP9 SP10 SP11 SP12 SP13 SP14 SP15 SP16
(1) See the diagrams on page 28 and page 30: Reference 1 = (SP1).
43
FUnCode PSSPS2 Description Adjustment range Factory setting Preset speeds 2 preset speeds Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word 4 preset speeds Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. Check that PS2 has been assigned before assigning PS4. nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word 8 preset speeds Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. Check that PS4 has been assigned before assigning PS8. nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word If tCC = 2C: LI3 If tCC = 3C: nO If tCC = LOC: LI3
PS4
If tCC = 2C: LI4 If tCC = 3C: nO If tCC = LOC: LI4
PS8
nO
44
FUnCode PS16 Description Adjustment range Factory setting nO 16 preset speeds Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. Check that PS8 has been assigned before assigning PS16. nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word 2nd preset speed (1) 0.0 to 500.0 Hz rd 3 preset speed (1) 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 4th preset speed (1) 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 5th preset speed (1) 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 6th preset speed (1) 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 7th preset speed (1) 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 8th preset speed (1) 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 9th preset speed (1) 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 10th preset speed (1) 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 11th preset speed (1) 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 12th preset speed (1) 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 13th preset speed (1) 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 14th preset speed (1) 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 15th preset speed (1) 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 16th preset speed (1) 0.0 to 500.0 Hz
SP2 SP3 SP4 SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8 SP9 SP10 SP11 SP12 SP13 SP14 SP15 SP16
10 Hz 15 Hz 20 Hz 25 Hz 30 Hz 35 Hz 40 Hz 45 Hz 50 Hz 55 Hz 60 Hz 70 Hz 80 Hz 90 Hz 100 Hz
(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the settings menu (SEt-). These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.
45
FUnCode JOGJOG Description Jog operation Jog operation Adjustment range Factory setting If tCC = 2C: nO If tCC = 3C: LI4 If tCC = LOC: nO
Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 Example: 2-wire control operation (tCC = 2C) Motor frequency Reference JGF reference

Ramp DEC/DE2
Ramp forced to 0.1 s
JGF reference LI (JOG)

u 0.5 s
Forward

Reverse

JGF
Jog operation reference (1)
0 to 10 Hz
10 Hz
46
Application functions menu FUn+/- speed

The function can only be accessed if LAC = L2 or L3 (see page 33). Two types of operation are available. 1 Use of single action buttons: Two logic inputs are required in addition to the operating direction(s). The input assigned to the "+ speed" command increases the speed, the input assigned to the "- speed" command decreases the speed. 2 Use of double action buttons: Only one logic input assigned to "+ speed" is required. + speed/- speed with double action buttons: Description: 1 button pressed twice for each direction of rotation. Each action closes a contact. Released (- speed) Forward button Reverse button Example of wiring: LI1: forward LIx: reverse LIy: + speed
ATV 31 control terminals LI1 LIx LIy + 24 b a c d
1st press (speed maintained) a c
2nd press (+ speed) a and b c and d
Motor frequency
LSP 0 LSP
Forward 2nd press 1st press 0 Reverse 2nd press 1st press 0
b a a a
b a a a a
d c c
This type of +/- speed is incompatible with 3-wire control. Whichever type of operation is selected, the max. speed is set by HSP (see page 16). Note: If the reference is switched via rFC (see page 34) from any reference channel to another with "+/- speed" the value of reference rFr (after ramp) is copied at the same time. This prevents the speed being incorrectly reset to zero when switching takes place.
47
FUnCode UPdDescription Adjustment range Factory setting +/- speed (motorized potentiometer) The function can only be accessed if LAC = L2 or L3 and UPdH or UPdt has been selected (see page 33). + speed nO Can only be accessed for UPdt. Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 - speed nO Can only be accessed for UPdt. Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 Save reference nO Associated with the "+/- speed" function, this parameter can be used to save the reference: When the run commands disappear (saved to RAM) When the mains supply or the run commands disappear (saved to EEPROM) On the next start-up, the speed reference is the last reference saved. nO: No save rAN: Save to RAM EEP: Save to EEPROM
USP
dSP
Str
48
Application functions menu FUnPI regulator

Diagram
The function is activated by assigning an analog input to the PI feedback (measurement).
LI
Internal reference
rPI
YES nO
PII
Pr2 Pr4
(rP1) rP2 rP3 rP4 nO + -
PIC
nO
Error inversion
Restart error threshold (wake-up)
tLS
rSL 0 rIG rPG
Gains
PIF
nO AI1 AI2 AI3
rFC
(auto) (manu) HSP LSP
.H0
Ramps
Reference A Pages 28 and 30
YES
x1 x(-1)
ACC DEC AC2 DE2
H.H
PIF
nO
PI AI1 feedback
Preset PI references
Key: Parameter: The black square represents the factory setting assignment
FbS
x FbS
AI2 AI3
Reference B Pages 28 and 30 PI feedback: The PI feedback must be assigned to one of the analog inputs (AI1, AI2 or AI3). PI reference: The PI reference can be assigned to the following parameters in order of priority: - Preset references via logic inputs (rP2, rP3, rP4) - Internal reference (rPI) - Reference Fr1 (see page 33) Combination table for preset PI references LI (Pr4) 0 0 1 1 LI (Pr2) 0 1 0 1 Pr2 = nO Reference rPI or Fr1 rPI or Fr1 rP2 rP3 rP4
Parameters which can be accessed in the settings menu (SEt-): Internal reference (rPI) Preset references (rP2, rP3, rP4) Regulator proportional gain (rPG) Regulator integral gain (rIG) FbS parameter: The FbS parameter can be used to scale the reference on the basis of the variation range of the PI feedback (sensor rating). E.g.: Pressure control PI reference (process) 0 - 5 bar (0 - 100%) Rating of pressure sensor 0 - 10 bar FbS = Max. sensor scale/Max. process FbS = 10/5= 2 rSL parameter: Can be used to set the PI error threshold above which the PI regulator will be reactivated (wake-up) after a stop due to the max. time threshold being exceeded at low speed (tLS). Reversal of the direction of correction (PIC): If PIC = nO, the speed of the motor will increase when the error is positive, for example: pressure control with a compressor. If PIC = YES, the speed of the motor will decrease when the error is positive, for example: temperature control via a cooling fan.
49
Application functions menu FUn"Manual - Automatic" operation with PI

This function combines the PI regulator and the switching of reference rFC (page 34). The speed reference is given by Fr2 or by the PI function, depending on the state of the logic input.
Setting up the PI regulator

1 Configuration in PI mode See the diagram on page 49. 2 Perform a test in factory settings mode (in most cases, this will be sufficient). To optimize the drive, adjust rPG or rIG gradually and independently and observe the effect on the PI feedback in relation to the reference. 3 If the factory settings are unstable or the reference is incorrect: Perform a test with a speed reference in Manual mode (without PI regulator) and with the drive on load for the speed range of the system: - In steady state, the speed must be stable and comply with the reference and the PI feedback signal must be stable. - In transient state, the speed must follow the ramp and stabilize quickly and the PI feedback must follow the speed. If this is not the case, see the settings for the drive and/or sensor signal and cabling. Switch to PI mode. Set brA to no (no auto-adaptation of the ramp). Set the speed ramps (ACC, dEC) to the minimum permitted by the mechanics without triggering an ObF fault. Set the integral gain (rIG) to minimum. Observe the PI feedback and the reference. Do several RUN/STOP or vary the load or reference rapidly. Set the proportional gain (rPG) in order to ascertain the ideal compromise between response time and stability in transient phases (slight overshoot and 1 to 2 oscillations before stabilizing). If the reference varies from the preset value in steady state, gradually increase the integral gain (rIG), reduce the proportional gain (rPG) in the event of instability (pump applications), find a compromise between response time and static precision (see diagram). Perform in-production tests throughout the reference range. Stabilization time Regulated value Reference Proportional gain rPG low Rise time time rIG high Reference Integral gain rIG low time Reference rPG and rIG correct rPG high Overshoot
Static error
time The oscillation frequency depends on the system kinematics. Parameter rPG = rIG Rise time Overshoot Stabilization time Static error
50
FUnCode PIPIF Description Adjustment range Factory setting PI regulator PI regulator feedback nO nO: Not assigned AI1: Analog input AI1 AI2: Analog input AI2 AI3: Analog input AI3 PI regulator proportional gain (1) 0.01 to 100 1 Contributes to dynamic performance during rapid changes in the PI feedback. PI regulator integral gain (1) 0.01 to 100 1 Contributes to static precision during slow changes in the PI feedback. PI feedback multiplication coefficient (1) 0.1 to 100 1 For process adaptation Reversal of the direction of correction of the PI nO regulator (1) nO: normal YES: reverse 2 preset PI references nO Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word 4 preset PI references nO Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. Check that Pr2 has been assigned before assigning Pr4. nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word 2nd preset PI reference (1) 0 to 100% 30% Only appears if Pr2 has been enabled by selecting an input. 3rd preset PI reference (1) 0 to 100% 60% Only appears if Pr4 has been enabled by selecting an input. 4th preset PI reference (1) 0 to 100% 90% Only appears if Pr4 has been enabled by selecting an input.
rPG rIG FbS PIC
Pr2
Pr4
rP2 rP3 rP4
51
FUnCode PI(continued) rSL Description Adjustment Factory setting range Restart error threshold ("wake-up" threshold) 0 to 100% 0 If the "PI" and "Low speed operating time"(tLS) (see page 18) functions are configured at the same time, the PI regulator may attempt to set a speed lower than LSP. This results in unsatisfactory operation which consists of starting, operating at low speed then stopping, and so on... Parameter rSL (restart error threshold) can be used to set a minimum PI error threshold for restarting after a stop at prolonged LSP. The function is inactive if tLS = 0. Internal PI regulator reference nO nO: The PI regulator reference is Fr1, except for UPdH and UPdt (+/- speed cannot be used as the PI regulator reference). YES: The PI regulator reference is internal via parameter rPI. Internal PI regulator reference (1) 0 to 100% 0
PII
rPI
52
Application functions menu FUnBrake control

The function can only be accessed if LAC = L2 or L3 (page 28). This function, which can be assigned to relay R2 or to logic output AOC, enables the drive to manage an electromagnetic brake.
Principle:
Synchronize brake release with the build-up of torque during start-up and brake engage at zero speed on stopping, to prevent jolting.
Brake sequence
Motor speed Speed reference
Relay R2 or logic output AOC 1
0
Motor current
brt
Ibr 0
Motor frequency
bEt
Speed reference
brL bEn 0
LI forward or reverse
1 0 t
Brake status
Engaged
Released
Engaged
Settings which can be accessed in the FUn- menu: - Brake release frequency (brL) - Brake release current (Ibr) - Brake release time (brt) - Brake engage frequency (bEn) - Brake engage time (bEt) - Brake release pulse (bIP) Recommended settings for brake control: 1 Brake release frequency: - Horizontal movement: Set to 0. - Vertical movement: Set to a frequency equal to the nominal slip of the motor in Hz. 2 Brake release current (Ibr): - Horizontal movement: Set to 0. - Vertical movement: Preset the nominal current of the motor then adjust it in order to prevent jolting on start-up, making sure that the maximum load is held when the brake is released. 3 Brake release time (brt): Adjust according to the type of brake. It is the time required for the mechanical brake to release. 4 Brake engage frequency (bEn) - Horizontal movement: Set to 0. - Vertical movement: Set to a frequency equal to the nominal slip of the motor in Hz. Caution: bEn maxi = LSP, you must therefore first set LSP to a sufficient value. 5 Brake engage time (bEt): Adjust according to the type of brake. It is the time required for the mechanical brake to engage. 6 Brake release pulse: - Horizontal movement: Set to nO. - Vertical movement: Set to YES and check that the motor torque direction for "Forward" control corresponds to the upward direction of the load. If necessary, reverse two motor phases. This parameter generates motor torque in an upward direction regardless of the direction of operation commanded in order to maintain the load whilst the brake is releasing.
53
FUnCode bLCbLC Description Adjustment range Factory setting Brake control The function can only be accessed if LAC = L2 or L3 (page 28). Brake control configuration nO nO: Not assigned r2: Relay R2 dO: Logic output AOC If bLC is assigned, parameter FLr (page 61) and brA (page 38) are forced to nO, and parameter OPL (page 61) is forced to YES. Brake release frequency 0.0 to 10.0 Hz According to drive rating Motor current threshold for brake release 0 to 1.36 In (1) According to drive rating Brake release time 0 to 5 s 0.5 s Low speed 0 to HSP (page 16) 0 Hz Motor frequency at min. reference. This parameter can also be modified in the SEt- menu (page 16). Brake engage frequency threshold nO - 0 to LSP nO nO: Not adjusted 0 to LSP: Adjustment range (Hz) If bLC is assigned and bEn remains equal to nO, the drive will lock on a bLF fault at the first run command. Brake engage time 0 to 5 s 0.5 s Brake release pulse nO nO: Whilst the brake is releasing, the motor torque direction corresponds to the direction of rotation commanded. YES: Whilst the brake is releasing, the motor torque direction is always forward, regardless of the direction of operation commanded. Check that the motor torque direction for "Forward" control corresponds to the upward direction of the load. If necessary, reverse two motor phases.
brL Ibr brt LSP
bEn
bEt bIP
(1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive rating plate. These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.
54
FUnCode LC2LC2 Description Adjustment range Factory setting Switching for second current limit The function can only be accessed if LAC = L2 or L3 (page 28). Switching for second current limit Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word CL1 is enabled when the logic input or control word bit is in state 0 (SEt- menu page 18). CL2 is enabled when the logic input or control word bit is in state 1. 2nd current limit (1) 0.25 to 1.5 In (2) 1.5 In (2) nO
CL2
55
FUnCode CHPCHP Description Adjustment range Factory setting Motor switching The function can only be accessed if LAC = L2 or L3 (page 28). Switching, motor 2 nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word LI or bit = 0: Motor 1 LI or bit = 1: Motor 2 - The motor switching function disables motor thermal protection. An external means of motor thermal protection must therefore be provided. - If you use this function, do not use the tUn auto-tuning function (page 21) on motor 2 and do not configure tUn = rUn or POn. - Changes to parameters are only taken into account when the drive is locked. UnS2 Nominal motor voltage (motor 2) given on the According to drive According to drive rating plate rating rating ATV31pppM2: 100 to 240 V ATV31pppM3X: 100 to 240 V ATV31pppN4: 100 to 500 V ATV31pppS6X: 100 to 600 V Nominal motor frequency (motor 2) given on 10 to 500 Hz 50 Hz the rating plate The ratio UnS (in volts) must not exceed the following values FrS (in Hz) nO
FrS2
nCr2 nSP2
ATV31pppM2: 7 max. ATV31pppM3X: 7 max. ATV31pppN4: 14 max. ATV31pppS6X: 17 max. The factory setting is 50 Hz, or 60 Hz if bFr is set to 60 Hz. Nominal motor current (motor 2) given on the 0.25 to 1.5 In (2) According to drive rating plate rating Nominal motor speed (motor 2) given on the 0 to 32760 RPM According to drive rating plate rating 0 to 9999 RPM then 10.00 to 32.76 KRPM If, rather than the nominal speed, the rating plate indicates the synchronous speed and the slip in Hz or as a %, calculate the nominal speed as follows: Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x or Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x or Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x 100 - slip as a % 100 50 - slip in Hz 50 60 - slip in Hz 60
56
FUnCode CHP(continued) COS2 UFt2 Description Motor Cos Phi (motor 2) given on the rating According to drive plate rating Selection of the type of voltage/frequency ratio n motor 2 L: Constant torque for motors connected in parallel or special motors P: Variable torque: Pump and fan applications n: Sensorless flux vector control for constant torque applications nLd: Energy saving, for variable torque applications not requiring high dynamics (behaves in a similar way to the P ratio at no load and the n ratio on load). Voltage
UnS
Adjustment range 0.5 to 1
Factory setting
L n P FrS
Frequency
UFr2
FLG2
IR compensation/Voltage boost, motor 2 (1) 0 to 100% 20 For UFt2 = n or nLd: IR compensation. For UFt2 = L or P: Voltage boost. Used to optimize the torque at very low speed (increase UFr2 if the torque is insufficient). Check that the value of UFr2 is not too high for when the motor is warm (risk of instability). Modifying UFt2 will cause UFr2 to return to the factory setting (20%). Frequency loop gain, motor 2 (1) 1 to 100% 20 Parameter can only be accessed if UFt2 = n or nLd. The FLG2 parameter adjusts the drives ability to follow the speed ramp based on the inertia of the machine being driven. Too high a gain may result in operating instability. FLG2 low
Hz 50 40 30 20 10 0 -10 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 t Hz 50 40 30 20 10 0 -10 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 t
FLG2 correct
Hz 50 40 30 20 10 0 -10 0 0.1
FLG2 high
In this case, increase FLG2
In this case, reduce FLG2
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
StA2
Frequency loop stability, motor 2 (1) 1 to 100% 20 Parameter can only be accessed if UFt2 = n or nLd. Used to adapt the return to steady state after a speed transient (acceleration or deceleration), according to the dynamics of the machine. Gradually increase the stability to avoid any overspeed. StA2 low
Hz 50 40 30 20 10 0 -10 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 t Hz 50 40 30 20 10 0 -10 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 t
StA2 correct
Hz 50 40 30 20 10 0 -10 0 0.1
StA2 high
In this case, increase StA2
In this case, reduce StA2
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5 t
SLP2
Slip compensation, motor 2 (1) 0 to 150% 100 Parameter can only be accessed if UFt2 = n or nLd. Used to adjust the slip compensation value fixed by nominal motor speed. The speeds given on motor rating plates are not necessarily exact. If slip setting < actual slip: the motor is not rotating at the correct speed in steady state. If slip setting > actual slip: the motor is overcompensated and the speed is unstable.
57
Application functions menu FUnManagement of limit switch

The function can only be accessed if LAC = L2 or L3 (page 28). It can be used to manage the operation of one or two limit switches (1 or 2 directions of operation): - Assignment of one or two logic inputs (forward limit, reverse limit) - Selection of the type of stop (on ramp, fast or freewheel) Following a stop, the motor is permitted to restart in the opposite direction only. - The stop is performed when the input is in state 0. The direction of operation is authorized in state 1.
FUnCode LStLAF Description Adjustment range Factory setting Management of limit switches The function can only be accessed if LAC = L2 or L3 (page 28). Limit, forward direction nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 Limit, reverse direction nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 Type of limit switch stop rMP: On ramp FSt: Fast stop nSt: Freewheel stop nO
LAr
nO
LAS
nSt
These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled via the selection of a logic input.
58
FUnSCS Saving the configuration (1) nO nO: Function inactive StrI: Saves the current configuration (but not the result of auto-tuning) to EEPROM. SCS automatically switches to nO as soon as the save has been performed. This function is used to keep another configuration in reserve, in addition to the current configuration. When drives leave the factory the current configuration and the backup configuration are both initialized with the factory configuration. If the remote terminal option is connected to the drive, the following additional selection options will appear: FIL1, FIL2, FIL3, FIL4 (files available in the remote terminal's EEPROM memory for saving the current configuration). They can be used to store between 1 and 4 different configurations which can also be stored on or even transferred to other drives of the same rating. SCS automatically switches to nO as soon as the save has been performed. Return to factory setting/restore configuration (1) nO nO: Function inactive rECI: The current configuration becomes identical to the backup configuration previously saved by SCS = StrI. rECI is only visible if the backup has been carried out. FCS automatically changes to nO as soon as this action has been performed. InI: The current configuration becomes identical to the factory setting. FCS automatically changes to nO as soon as this action has been performed. If the remote terminal option is connected to the drive, the following additional selection options appear, as long as the corresponding files have been loaded in the remote terminal's EEPROM memory (0 to 4 files): FIL1, FIL2, FIL3, FIL4. They enable the current configuration to be replaced with one of the 4 configurations that may be loaded on the remote terminal. FCS automatically changes to nO as soon as this action has been performed. Caution: If nAd appears on the display briefly once FCS has switched to nO, this means that the configuration transfer is not possible and has not been performed (different drive ratings for example). If ntr appears on the display briefly once the parameter has switched to nO, this means that a configuration transfer error has occurred and the factory settings must be restored using InI. In both cases, check the configuration to be transferred before trying again. For rECI, InI and FL1 to FL4 to be taken into account, the ENT key must be held down for 2 s. (1) SCS and FCS can be accessed via several configuration menus but they concern all menus and parameters as a whole.
FCS
59
Fault menu FLt-
ENT
FLt-
ESC ESC
Atr
ESC ENT
Automatic restart
ESC
rPr
ESC ENT
Operating time reset to zero
FLtCode Atr Description Factory setting Automatic restart nO nO: Function inactive YES: Automatic restart, after locking on a fault, if the fault has disappeared and the other operating conditions permit the restart. The restart is performed by a series of automatic attempts separated by increasingly longer waiting periods: 1 s, 5 s, 10 s, then 1 min for the following periods. If the restart has not taken place once the configurable time tAr has elapsed, the procedure is aborted and the drive remains locked until it is powered down then powered up. The following faults permit this function: External fault (EPF) Loss of 4-20 mA reference (LFF) CANopen fault (COF) System overvoltage (OSF) Loss of a line phase (PHF) Loss of a motor phase (OPF) DC bus overvoltage (ObF) Motor overload (OLF) Serial link (SLF) Drive overheating (OHF) The drive safety relay remains activated if this function is active. The speed reference and the operating direction must be maintained. Use 2-wire control (tCC = 2C) with tCt = LEL or PFO (page 23). Check that an automatic restart will not endanger personnel or equipment in any way. tAr Max. duration of restart process 5 5: 5 minutes 10: 10 minutes 30: 30 minutes 1h: 1 hour 2h: 2 hours 3h: 3 hours Ct: Unlimited This parameter appears if Atr = YES. It can be used to limit the number of consecutive restarts on a recurrent fault. Reset of current fault no nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6
rSF
60
Fault menu FLt-
FLtCode FLr Description Factory setting Flying restart (automatic catching a spinning load on ramp) nO Used to enable a smooth restart if the run command is maintained after the following events: - Loss of line supply or disconnection - Reset of current fault or automatic restart - Freewheel stop The speed given by the drive resumes from the estimated speed of the motor at the time of the restart, then follows the ramp to the reference speed. This function requires 2-wire control (tCC = 2C) with tCt = LEL or PFO. nO: Function inactive YES: Function active When the function is operational, it activates at each run command, resulting in a slight delay (1 second max.). FLr is forced to nO if brake control (bLC) is assigned (page 54). External fault nO nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible: Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd12: Bit 12 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd13: Bit 13 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd14: Bit 14 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Cd15: Bit 15 of the Modbus or CANopen control word Stop mode in the event of an external fault EPF YES nO: Fault ignored YES: Fault with freewheel stop rNP: Fault with stop on ramp FSt: Fault with fast stop Configuration of motor phase loss fault YES nO: Function inactive YES: Triggering of OPF fault OAC: No fault triggered but management of the output voltage in order to avoid an overcurrent when the link with the motor is re-established and flying restart even if FLr = nO. To be used with downstream contactor. OPL is forced to YES if brake control (bLC) is assigned (page 54). Configuration of line phase loss fault YES This parameter is only accessible on 3-phase drives. nO: Fault ignored YES: Fault with fast stop Stop mode in the event of a drive overheating fault OHF YES nO: Fault ignored YES: Fault with freewheel stop rNP: Fault with stop on ramp FSt: Fault with fast stop Stop mode in the event of a motor overload fault OLF YES nO: Fault ignored YES: Fault with freewheel stop rNP: Fault with stop on ramp FSt: Fault with fast stop
EtF
EPL
OPL
IPL
OHL
OLL
61
Fault menu FLt-
FLtCode SLL Description Adjustment range Factory setting Stop mode in the event of a Modbus serial link fault SLF YES nO: Fault ignored YES: Fault with freewheel stop rNP: Fault with stop on ramp FSt: Fault with fast stop Stop mode in the event of a CANopen serial link fault COF YES nO: Fault ignored YES: Fault with freewheel stop rNP: Fault with stop on ramp FSt: Fault with fast stop Configuration of auto-tuning fault tnF YES nO: Fault ignored (the drive reverts to the factory settings) YES: Fault with drive locked Stop mode in the event of a loss of 4 - 20 mA signal fault LFF nO nO: Fault ignored (only value possible if CrL3 y 3 mA, see page 24) YES: Fault with freewheel stop LFF: The drive switches to the fallback speed (LFF parameter) rLS: The drive maintains the speed at which it was travelling when the fault occurred until the fault has disappeared. rNP: Fault with stop on ramp FSt: Fault with fast stop Before setting LFL to YES , rMP or FSt, check the connection of input AI3. Otherwise, the drive may immediately switch to an LFF fault. Fallback speed 0 to 500 Hz 10 Hz Fallback speed setting for stopping in the event of a fault Derated operation in the event of an overvoltage nO nO: Function inactive YES: The line voltage monitoring threshold is: ATV31pppM2: 130 V ATV31pppM3X: 130 V ATV31pppN4: 270 V ATV31pppS6X: 340 V In this case, a line choke must be used and the performance of the drive cannot be guaranteed. In order to assign this function, you must press and hold down the "ENT" key for 2 seconds. Controlled stop on mains power break nO nO: Locking of the drive and freewheel stopping of the motor NNS: This stop mode uses the inertia to maintain the drive power supply as long as possible. rNP: Stop according to the valid ramp (dEC or dE2) FSt: Fast stop, the stopping time depends on the inertia and the braking ability of the drive. Fault inhibit nO Inhibiting faults may damage the drive beyond repair. This would invalidate the guarantee. nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 Fault monitoring is active when the input is in state 0. It is inactive when the input is in state 1. All active faults are reset on a rising edge (from 1 to 0) of the input. In order to assign this function, you must press and hold down the "ENT" key for 2 seconds. Operating time reset to zero nO nO: No rtH: Operating time reset to zero The rPr parameter automatically falls back to nO as soon as the reset to zero is performed.
COL
tnL
LFL
LFF drn
StP
InH
rPr
62
Communication menu COM-
ENT
CON-
ESC ESC
Add
ESC ENT
ESC
FLOC
ESC ENT
The parameters can only be modified when the drive is stopped and no run command is present. Modifications to parameters Add, tbr, tFO, AdCO and bdCO are only taken into account following a restart. On the optional remote terminal, this menu can be accessed with the switch in the position.
CONCode Add tbr Description Modbus: Drive address 1 Modbus: Transmission speed 19200 4.8: 4800 bps 9.6: 9600 bps 19.2: 19200 bps (Caution: The remote terminal can only be used with this value.) Modbus communication format 8E1 8O1: 8 data bits, odd parity, 1 stop bit 8E1: 8 data bits, even parity, 1 stop bit (Caution: The remote terminal can only be used with this value.) 8n1: 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit 8n2: 8 data bits, no parity, 2 stop bits Modbus: Time-out 0.1 to 10 s 10 s CANopen: Drive address 0 to 127 0 CANopen: Transmission speed 125 10.0: 10 kbps 20.0: 20 kbps 50.0: 50 kbps 125.0: 125 kbps 250.0: 250 kbps 500.0: 500 kbps 1000: 1000 kbps CANopen: Error registry (read-only) 0: "No error" 1: "Bus off error" 2: "Life time error" 3: "CAN overrun" 4: "Heartbeat error" Forced local mode nO nO: Not assigned LI1: Logic input LI1 LI2: Logic input LI2 LI3: Logic input LI3 LI4: Logic input LI4 LI5: Logic input LI5 LI6: Logic input LI6 In forced local mode, the terminal block and display terminal regain control of the drive. Selection of the reference and control channel in forced local AI1 mode AIP for Can only be accessed if LAC = 3 ATV31pppA In forced local mode, only the speed reference is taken into account. PI functions, summing inputs, etc. are not active. See the diagrams on pages 28 to 31. AI1: Analog input AI1, logic inputs LI AI2: Analog input AI2, logic inputs LI AI3: Analog input AI3, logic inputs LI AIP: Potentiometer (type A drives only), RUN/STOP buttons LCC: Remote terminal: LFr reference page 16, RUN/STOP/FWD/REV buttons. Adjustment range 1 to 247 Factory setting
tFO
ttO AdCO bdCO
ErCO
FLO
FLOC
63
Display menu SUP-
ENT
SUP-
ESC ESC
LFr
ENT
ESC
ESC
LIACPU
ENT
ENT
Sub-menu
ESC
ESC
ESC
ENT
ESC
Parameters can be accessed with the drive running or stopped. On the optional remote terminal, this menu can be accessed with the switch in any position. Some functions have numerous parameters. In order to clarify programming and avoid having to scroll through endless parameters, these functions have been grouped in sub-menus. Like menus, sub-menus are identified by a dash after their code: LIA- for example. When the drive is running, the value displayed is that of one of the monitoring parameters. By default, the value displayed is the output frequency applied to the motor (rFr parameter). Whilst the value of the new monitoring parameter required is being displayed, press and hold down the "ENT" key (2 seconds) to confirm the change of monitoring parameter and store this. From now on, the value of this parameter will be displayed while the drive is running (even after it has been disconnected). If the new choice is not confirmed by pressing the "ENT" key a second time, the drive will return to the previous parameter after it has been switched off.
64
Display menu SUP-
SUPCode LFr rPI FrH rFr SPd1 or SPd2 or SPd3 LCr Opr ULn tHr Description Frequency reference for control via built-in terminal or remote terminal Internal PI reference Frequency reference before ramp (absolute value) Output frequency applied to the motor Variation range 0 to 500 Hz 0 to 100% 0 to 500 Hz - 500 Hz to + 500 Hz
tHd
LFt
Otr rtH
Output value in customer units SPd1 or SPd2 or SPd3 depending on the SdS parameter, see page 19 (SPd3 in factory settings mode). Current in the motor Motor power 100% = Nominal motor power, calculated using the parameters entered in the drC- menu. Line voltage (gives the line voltage via the DC bus, motor running or stopped) Motor thermal state 100% = Nominal thermal state 118% = "OLF" threshold (motor overload) Drive thermal state 100% = Nominal thermal state 118% = "OHF" threshold (motor overload) Last fault bLF: Brake control fault CFF: Configuration (parameters) incorrect CFI: Configuration (parameters) invalid COF: Communication fault line 2 (CANopen) CrF: Capacitor pre-charge fault EEF: EEPROM memory fault EPF: External fault InF: Internal fault LFF: 4 - 20 mA fault on AI3 nOF: No fault saved ObF: DC bus overvoltage fault OCF: Overcurrent fault OHF: Drive overheating fault OLF: Motor overload fault OPF: Motor phase loss fault OSF: Line supply overvoltage fault PHF: Line supply phase loss fault SCF: Motor short-circuit fault (phase, earth) SLF: Modbus communication fault SOF: Motor overspeed fault tnF: Auto-tuning fault USF: Line supply undervoltage fault Motor torque 100% = Nominal motor torque, calculated using the parameters entered in the drC- menu. Operating time 0 to 65530 hours Total time the motor has been powered up: 0 to 9999 (hours), then 10.00 to 65.53 (kilo-hours). Can be reset to zero by the rPr parameter in the FLt- menu (see page 62).
65
Display menu SUP-
SUPCode COd Description Terminal locking code Enables the drive configuration to be protected using an access code. Caution: Before entering a code, do not forget to make a careful note of it. 0FF: No access locking codes - To lock access, enter a code (2 to 9999). The display can be incremented using . Now press "ENT". "On" appears on the screen to indicate that the parameters have been locked. On: A code is locking access (2 to 9999) - To unlock access, enter the code (incrementing the display using ) and press "ENT". The code remains on the display and access is unlocked until the next power down. Parameter access will be locked again on the next power-up. - If an incorrect code is entered, the display changes to "On" and the parameters remain locked. XXXX: Parameter access is unlocked (the code remains on the screen). - To reactivate locking with the same code when the parameters have been unlocked, return to "On" using the button then press "ENT". "On" appears on the screen to indicate that the parameters have been locked. - To lock access with a new code when the parameters have been unlocked, enter a new code (increment the display using or ) and press "ENT". "On" appears on the screen to indicate that the parameters have been locked. - To clear locking when the parameters have been unlocked, return to "OFF" using the button and press "ENT". "OFF" remains on the screen. The parameters are unlocked and will remain unlocked until the next restart. When access is locked using a code, only the monitoring parameters can be accessed, with only a temporary choice of parameter displayed. State of auto-tuning tAb: The default stator resistance value is used to control the motor. PEnd: Auto-tuning has been requested but not yet performed. PrOG: Auto-tuning in progress. FAIL: Auto-tuning has failed. dOnE: The stator resistance measured by the auto-tuning function is used to manage the drive. Strd: The cold stator resistance (rSC other than nO) that is used to control the motor. Indicates the ATV31 firmware version. E.g.: 1102 = V1.1 IE02. Logic input functions Can be used to display the functions assigned to each input. If no functions have been assigned, nO is displayed. Use the and arrows to scroll through the functions. If a number of functions have been assigned to the same input, check that they are compatible.
tUS
UdP LIALI1A LI2A LI3A LI4A LI5A LI6A LIS
Can be used to display the state of the logic inputs (using the segments of the display: high = 1, low = 0) State 1 State 0 LI1 LI2 LI3 LI4 LI5 LI6 Example above: LI1 and LI6 are at 1, LI2 to LI5 are at 0. Analog input functions Can be used to display the functions assigned to each input. If no functions have been assigned, nO is displayed. Use the and arrows to scroll through the functions. If a number of functions have been assigned to the same input, check that they are compatible.
AIAAI1A AI2A AI3A
66
Maintenance
Servicing
The Altivar 31 does not require any preventative maintenance. It is nevertheless advisable to perform the following regularly: Check the condition and tightness of connections. Ensure that the temperature around the unit remains at an acceptable level and that ventilation is effective (average service life of fans: 3 to 5 years depending on the operating conditions). Remove any dust from the drive.
Assistance with maintenance, fault display

If a problem arises during setup or operation, ensure that the recommendations relating to the environment, mounting and connections have been observed. The first fault detected is stored and displayed, flashing, on the screen: the drive locks and the fault relay (RA - RC) contact opens, if it has been configured for this function.
Clearing the fault

Cut the power supply to the drive in the event of a non-resettable fault. Wait for the display to go off completely. Find the cause of the fault in order to correct it. The drive is unlocked after a fault by: Switching off the drive until the display disappears completely, then switching on again Automatically in the cases described in the "automatic restart" function (FLt- menu, Atr = YES) Via a logic input when this input is assigned to the "fault reset" function (FLt- menu, rSF = LIp)
Monitoring menu:
This is used to prevent and find the causes of faults by displaying the drive status and its current values.
Spares and repairs:

Consult Schneider Electric product support.
67
Faults - Causes - Remedies

Drive does not start, no fault displayed
If the display does not light up, check the power supply to the drive. The assignment of the "Fast stop" or "Freewheel stop" functions will prevent the drive from starting if the corresponding logic inputs are not powered up. The ATV31 then displays "nSt" in freewheel stop mode and "FSt" in fast stop mode. This is normal since these functions are active at zero so that the drive will be stopped safely if there is a wire break. Check that the run command input(s) have been actuated in accordance with the chosen control mode (tCC parameter in the I-O- menu). If an input is assigned to the limit switch function and this input is at zero, the drive can only be started up by sending a command for the opposite direction (see page 58). If the reference channel (page 28) or the control channel (page 29) is assigned to Modbus or CANopen, the drive displays nSt on power-up and remains at stop until the communication bus sends a command.
Faults which cannot be reset automatically

The cause of the fault must be removed before resetting by switching off and then on again. CrF, SOF, tnF, bLF and OPF faults can also be reset remotely via logic input (rSF parameter in the FLt- menu page 60). Fault bLF Brake sequence Probable cause Remedy Brake release current not reached Check the drive/motor connection. Check the motor windings. Check the Ibr setting in the FUn- menu (see page 54). Carry out the recommended adjustment of bEn (see pages 53 and 54). Brake engage frequency bEn = nO (not adjusted) when brake logic bLC is assigned. Load relay control fault or Replace the drive. charging resistor damaged Internal memory fault Check the environment (electromagnetic compatibility). Replace the drive. Internal fault Check the environment (electromagnetic compatibility). Replace the drive. Incorrect parameters in the SEt- Check the SEt- and drC- parameters. and drC- menus Check the size of the motor/drive/load. Inertia or load too high Check the state of the mechanism. Mechanical blockage Short-circuit or earthing at the Check the cables connecting the drive to the motor, and the motor drive output insulation. Significant earth leakage current at Reduce the switching frequency. the drive output when several Connect chokes in series with the motor. motors are connected in parallel Instability or Check the motor, gain and stability parameters. Driving load too high Add a braking resistor. Check the size of the motor/drive/load. Special motor or motor whose Use the L or the P ratio (see Uft page 21). Check the presence of the motor during auto-tuning. power is not suitable for the drive Motor not connected to the drive If a downstream contactor is being used, close it during auto-tuning.
CrF Capacitor load circuit EEF EEPROM fault InF Internal fault OCF Overcurrent
SCF Motor short-circuit
SOF Overspeed tnF Auto-tuning fault
68
Faults - Causes - Remedies

Faults which can be reset with the automatic restart function, after the cause has disappeared
These faults can also be reset by switching the drive off and on again or via a logic input (rSF parameter in the FLt- menu page 60) Fault COF CAnopen fault EPF External fault LFF Loss of 4-20mA ObF Overvoltage during deceleration OHF Drive overheated OLF Motor overload OPF Motor phase loss Probable cause Interruption in communication on the CANopen bus According to user Remedy Check the communication bus. Please refer to the product-specific documentation. According to user
OSF Overvoltage PHF Line phase failure
SLF Modbus fault
Loss of the 4-20 mA reference on Check the connection on input AI3. input AI3 Braking too sudden Increase the deceleration time. or driving load Install a braking resistor if necessary. Activate the brA function (page 38) if it is compatible with the application. Drive temperature too high Check the motor load, the drive ventilation and the environment. Wait for the drive to cool down before restarting. Triggered by excessive motor Check the ItH setting (motor thermal protection) (page 16), check the motor load. Wait for the drive to cool down before current restarting. Loss of one phase at drive output Check the connections from the drive to the motor. Downstream contactor open If a downstream contactor is being used, set OPL to OAC Motor not connected or motor (FLt- menu page 61). Test on a low power motor or without a motor: In factory power too low settings mode, motor phase loss detection is active (OPL = Instantaneous instability in the YES). To check the drive in a test or maintenance motor current environment without having to switch to a motor with the same rating as the drive (particularly useful in the case of high power drives), deactivate motor phase loss detection (OPL = no). Check and optimize the UFr (page 17), UnS and nCr (page 20) parameters and perform auto-tuning with tUn (page 21). Line voltage too high Check the line voltage. Disturbed line supply Drive incorrectly supplied or a Check the power connection and the fuses. fuse blown Failure of one phase Reset. 3-phase ATV31 used on a single Use a 3-phase line supply. phase line supply Unbalanced load Disable the fault by setting IPL = nO (FLt- menu page 61). This protection only operates with the drive on load. Interruption in communication on Check the communication bus. the Modbus bus Please refer to the product-specific documentation.
Faults which can be reset as soon as their cause disappears

Fault CFF Configuration fault CFI Configuration fault via serial link Probable cause The current configuration is inconsistent. Invalid configuration The configuration loaded in the drive via the serial link is inconsistent. Line supply too low Transient voltage dip Damaged load resistor Remedy Return to factory settings or call up the backup configuration, if it is valid. See the FCS parameter in the I-O-, drC-, CtL- or FUn- menu. Check the configuration loaded previously. Load a consistent configuration.
USF Undervoltage
Check the voltage and the voltage parameter. Replace the drive.
69
Configuration/Settings table
Drive ATV 31............................................................................................................................................................................................... Customer ID no. (if applicable)..........................................................................................................................................................................
1st level adjustment parameter
>.H
Code bFr Factory setting 50 Customer setting
Settings menu
Code ACC AC2 dE2 dEC tA1 tA2 tA3 tA4 LSP HSP ItH UFr FLG StA SLP IdC tdC tdC1 SdC1 tdC2 SdC2 JPF JF2 JGF rPG rIG FbS PIC
SEtCustomer setting s s s s % % % % Hz Hz A % % % % A s s A s A Hz Hz Hz /s Code rP2 rP3 rP4 SP2 SP3 SP4 SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8 SP9 SP10 SP11 SP12 SP13 SP14 SP15 SP16 CLI CL2 tLS rSL UFr2 FLG2 StA2 SLP2 Ftd ttd Ctd SdS SFr Factory setting 30% 60% 90% 10 Hz 15 Hz 20 Hz 25 Hz 30 Hz 35 Hz 40 Hz 45 Hz 50 Hz 55 HZ 60 Hz 70 Hz 80 Hz 90 Hz 100 Hz 1.5 In (1) 1.5 In (1) 0 (no time limit) 0 20% 20% 20% 100% bFr 100% In (1) 30 4 kHz Customer setting % % % Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz A A s % % % % Hz % A kHz
Factory setting 3s 5s 5s 3s 10% 10% 10% 10% 0 Hz bFr According to drive rating 20% 20% 20% 100 Hz 0.7 In (1) 0.5 s 0.5 s 0.7 In (1) 0s 0.5 In (1) 0 Hz 0 Hz 10 Hz 1 1/s 1 nO
(1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive rating plate. These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. The majority can also be accessed and adjusted in the function configuration menu. Those which are underlined appear in factory settings mode.
70
Motor control menu

Code bFr UnS FrS nCr nSP COS rSC
drCCustomer setting Hz V Hz A RPM Code tUS UFt nrd SFr tFr SrF Factory setting tAb n YES 4 kHz 60 Hz nO Customer setting
Factory setting 50 Hz According to drive rating 50 Hz According to drive rating According to drive rating According to drive rating nO
kHz Hz
I/O menu
Code tCC tCt rrS
I-OFactory setting 2C ATV31pppA: LOC trn if tCC = 2C, LI2 if tCC = 3C, LI3 if tCC = LOC: nO 4 mA 20 mA Customer setting Code AO1t dO r1 Factory setting 0A nO FLt Customer setting
CrL3 CrH3
mA mA
r2
nO
Control menu
Code LAC Fr1 Fr2 rFC CHCF Cd1
CtLCustomer setting Code Cd2 CCS COp LCC PSt rOt Factory setting Mdb Cd1 nO nO YES dFr Customer setting
Factory setting L1 AI1 AIP for ATV31pppA nO Fr1 SIM tEr LOC for ATV31pppA
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been enabled.
71
Application functions menu

Code rPCrPt
FUnCode JOGJOG Factory setting Customer setting If tCC = 2C: nO If tCC = 3C: LI4 If tCC = LOC: nO 10 Hz nO nO nO nO 1 1 1 nO nO nO 30% 60% 90% 0 nO 0% nO According to drive rating 0.5 s nO 0.5 s nO nO 1.5 In (1)
Factory setting Customer setting LIn
StC-
AdC-
SAIPSS-
tA1 tA2 tA3 tA4 ACC dEC rPS Frt AC2 dE2 brA Stt FSt dCF dCI IdC tdC nSt AdC tdC1 SdC1 tdC2 SdC2 SA2 SA3 PS2
PS4
PS8 PS16 SP2 SP3 SP4 SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8 SP9 SP10 SP11 SP12 SP13 SP14 SP15 SP16
10% 10% 10% 10% 3s 3s nO 0 5s 5s YES Stn nO 4 nO 0.7 In 0.5 s nO YES 0.5 s 0.7 In (1) 0s 0.5 In (1) AI2 nO If tCC = 2C: LI3 If tCC = 3C: LI4 If tCC = LOC: LI3 If tCC = 2C: LI4 If tCC = 3C: nO If tCC = LOC: LI4 nO nO 10 Hz 15 Hz 20 Hz 25 Hz 30 Hz 35 Hz 40 Hz 45 Hz 50 Hz 55 Hz 60 Hz 70 Hz 80 Hz 90 Hz 100 Hz
% % % % s s Hz s s
UPd-
PI-
A s bLCs A s A LC2-
JGF USP dSP Str PIF rPG rIG FbS PIC Pr2 Pr4 rP2 rP3 rP4 rSL PII rPI bLC brL Ibr brt bEn bEt bIP LC2 CL2
Hz
% % %
% Hz A s Hz s
CHP-
CHP
nO
Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz
LSt-
UnS2 According to drive rating FrS2 50 Hz nCr2 nSP2 According to drive rating COS2 UFt2 n UFr2 20% FLG2 20% StA2 20% SLP2 100 Hz LAF nO LAr nO LAS nSt
V Hz A RPM
% % % Hz
(1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive rating plate. These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been enabled. They can also be accessed in the SEt menu.
72
Fault menu
Code Atr tAr rSF FLr EtF EPL OPL IPL OHL OLL
FLtCustomer setting Code SLL COL tnL LFL LFF drn StP InH rPr Factory setting YES YES YES nO 10 Hz nO nO nO nO Customer setting
Factory setting nO 5 nO nO nO YES YES YES YES YES
Hz
Communication menu
Code Add tbr tFO ttO AdCO Factory setting 1 19200 8E1 10 s 0
CONCustomer setting Code bdCO FLO FLOC s Factory setting 125 nO AI1 AIP for ATV31pppA Customer setting
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been enabled.
73
Index of parameter codes
AC2 ACC AdC AdCO Add AI1A AI2A AI3A AO1t Atr bdCO bEn bEt bFr bIP bLC brA brL brt CCS Cd1 Cd2 CHCF CHP CL2 CLI COd COp COS COS2 CrH3 CrL3 Ctd dCF dCI dE2 dEC dO drn dSP EPL ErCO EtF FbS FCS FLG FLG2 FLO
38 38 41 63 63 66 66 66 24 60 63 54 54 20 54 54 38 54 54 35 34 34 34 56 55 18 66 35 20 57 24 24 19 39 39 38 16 24 62 48 61 63 61 51 22 17 57 63
FLOC FLr Fr1 Fr2 FrH FrS FrS2 Frt FSt Ftd HSP Ibr IdC InH IPL ItH JF2 JGF JOG JPF LAC LAF LAr LAS LC2 LCC LCr LFF LFL LFr LFt LI1A LI2A LI3A LI4A LI5A LI6A LIS LSP nCr nCr2 nrd nSP nSP2 nSt OHL OLL OPL
63 61 33 33 65 20 56 38 39 19 16 54 39 62 61 16 18 46 46 18 33 58 58 58 55 35 65 62 62 65 65 66 66 66 66 66 66 66 16 20 56 22 20 56 40 61 61 61
Opr Otr PIC PIF Pr2 Pr4 PS16 PS2 PS4 PS8 PSt r1 r2 rFC rFr rIG rOt rP2 rP3 rP4 rPG rPI rPI rPr rPS rPt rrS rSC rSF rSL rtH SA2 SA3 SCS SdC1 SdC2 SdS SFr SLL SLP SLP2 SP10 SP11 SP12 SP13 SP14 SP15 SP16
65 65 51 51 51 51 45 44 44 44 35 24 24 34 65 51 35 51 51 51 51 52 65 62 38 37 23 21 60 52 65 42 42 22 41 41 19 22 62 17 57 45 45 45 45 45 45 45
SP2 SP3 SP4 SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8 SP9 SPd1 SPd2 SPd3 SrF StA StA2 StP Str Stt tA1 tA2 tA3 tA4 tAr tbr tCC tCt tdC tdC1 tdC2 tFr tHd tHr tLS ttd ttO tUn tUS tUS UdP UFr UFr2 UFt UFt2 ULn UnS UnS2 USP
45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 65 65 65 22 17 57 62 48 39 37 38 38 38 60 63 23 23 39 41 41 22 65 65 18 19 63 21 21 66 66 17 57 21 57 65 20 56 48
74
Index of functions
+/- speed 2-wire/3-wire control Analog/logic output AOC/AOV Automatic restart Automatic standstill DC injection Brake control CANopen: Drive address Control and reference channels Control channel switching Current limit DC injection via logic input Deceleration ramp adaptation Drive thermal protection Drive ventilation Fast stop via logic input Flying restart (automatic catching a spinning load on ramp) Forced local mode Freewheel stop via logic input Function access level Jog operation Management of limit switch Modbus: Drive address Motor control auto-tuning Motor switching Motor thermal protection Motor thermal protection - max. thermal current PI regulator Preset speeds Ramp switching Ramps Reference switching Relay r1 Relay r2 Reset of current fault Return to factory settings/restore configuration Saving the configuration Selection of the type of voltage/frequency ratio Skip frequency Stop modes Summing inputs Switching for second current limit Switching frequency
47 23 24 60 41 53 63 26 35 18 39 38 5 5 39 61 63 40 33 46 58 63 21 56 6 16 49 43 38 37 34 24 24 60 22 22 21 18 39 42 55 22
75
VVDED303042 EN
atv31_programming manual_EN_V1 2003-09

Atv31 (E)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Atv31 (E)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Variable speed drives Altivar 31 High performance

For 3-phase asynchronous motors from 0.18 to 15 kW

Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors

Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 10 to 13 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 14 to 17 Options

Combinations for self-assembly . . . . . . . . . . . Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schneider Electric worldwide . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors

Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors

Options and accessories

Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors

Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors

Customisable enclosed drive

Options and accessories

Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors

Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors

Options and accessories

Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors

Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors

PowerSuite software workshop

174 CEV 300 10

Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors

ATV 31H018M3X...HD15M3X, ATV 31H075S6X....HD15S6X e marking Product certification Degree of protection

Drive without 5 rail option

Storage Operation ATV 31Hppp

With braking resistor Without braking resistor

Maximum transient current Voltage/frequency ratio

Frequency loop gain

Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors

Configurable analog inputs

Analog output configurable for voltage, current and logic output

Configurable relay outputs

R1A, R1B, R1C

Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors

Electrical characteristics (continued)

Main protection and safety features of the drive

Motor protection (see page 48) Dielectric strength

Insulation resistance to earth Signalling

Characteristics, special uses

Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors

Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors

Drives with heatsink (frequency range from 0.5 to 500 Hz)

kg 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.800 1.800 3.100

0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 15

0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20

1.5 1.8 2.4 3.2 4.2 5.9 7.1 9.2 15 18 25 32

1.5 1.9 2.3 3 4.1 5.5 7.1 9.5 14.3 17 27.7 33

32 37 41 48 61 79 125 150 232 269 397 492

Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors

Customisable enclosed drives (frequency range from 0.5 to 500 Hz)

Line supply Line current (2)

HP 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3

at U1 A 3 5.3 6.8 8.9 12.1 15.8 21.9

at U2 A 2.5 4.4 5.8 7.5 10.2 13.3 18.4

kg 6.300 6.300 6.300 6.300 8.800 8.800 10.700

0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 ATV 31C/Hpppp

Ready-assembled enclosed drives (frequency range from 0.5 to 500 Hz)

Variable speed drives for asynchronous motors

Drive kit (frequency range from 0.5 to 500 Hz)

HP 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3

at U1 A 3 5.3 6.8 8.9 12.1 15.8 21.9

at U2 A 2.5 4.4 5.8 7.5 10.2 13.3 18.4

kg 6.300 6.300 6.300 6.300 8.800 8.800 10.700

0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 ATV 31Kppppp 2.2

3-phase supply voltage: 380500 V (5) 50/60 Hz with integrated filters